Operation Manual Im C300

Safety Information Safety Information English
Read This First Información de seguridad Español

Leer antes de empezar
Leia isto primeiro
Informações de segurança Português (Brasil)
À lire avant de commencer
Consignes de sécurité Français

English
Safety Information 1. Manuals Provided with This Machine
2. Safety Information for This Machine
3. Other Information for This Machine
For information not found in this manual,

see the online manuals available on our
web site (https://www.ricoh.com/) or via the
control panel.
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep
it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to
read the Safety Information in this manual before using the
machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals......................................................................................................... 3
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

Manuals for This Machine......................................................................................................... 4
2. Safety Information for This Machine

The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with This Machine............................................... 5
The Meanings of Safety Labels................................................................................................ 5
Safety Precautions to Be Followed........................................................................................... 6
Safety Labels of This Machine............................................................................................... 10
3. Other Information for This Machine

Laws and Regulations............................................................................................................. 11
Legal Requirements................................................................................................................ 11
Trademarks............................................................................................................................. 14
2
How to Read the Manuals Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer
Symbols Used in the Manuals be liable for any damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the
registered data, or the use or non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
This manual uses the following symbols:
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine.
Documents or data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the
machine.
English
Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this
may result in the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the machine or any results from the data executed by you.
instructions are not obeyed. Be sure to read these explanations.
Notes
Indicates supplementary explanations of the product's functions and instructions on resolving Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
user errors. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from
the use of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
[] For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display. manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia) Colors on color keys or the color circle may differ slightly from the colors of actual copies.
(mainly North America) The color samples in this manual may differ slightly from the colors of actual copies.
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your
Read the information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model local dealer.
you are using. For details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please
"Model-Specific Information", Specifications. contact your local dealer.
3
• You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine IT security certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from the following URL:
U.S. Government Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices Version 1.0 (IEEE Std
2600.2™-2009)
Manuals for This Machine For Administrator: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/en/
download_admin.html
For User: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/en/
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:
download_user.html
Format Manuals
Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices 1.0 dated September 10, 2015
Printed manual • Safety Information For Administrator: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/
ccmanual/im_c300_c400_c400SR/en/download_admin.html
CD-ROM • Driver Installation Guide
For User: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400_c400SR/en/
Manuals displayed on the control panel • User Guide (Full Version) (HTML) download_user.html
Web pages • Safety Information This information is about how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC Certified
• User Guide (Selected Version) (PDF) machine, be sure to read it before operating the machine so you can make the correct
• User Guide (Full Version) (HTML) settings before using it.
• Driver Installation Guide
Safety Information
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety
Information. It also describes each regulation and environmental conformance.
User Guide (Selected Version)
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting
when an error message appears, etc., summaries are provided for each user manual.
User Guide (Full Version)
Describes the setup for using the machine, how to use functions to copy, fax, print, scan
or for maintenance and specifications, troubleshooting, system settings, and security
functions.
Manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
The User Guide for languages other than shown above contains the information in User
Guide (Selected Version) and Security.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers CD.
• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Regis-
tering Administrators Before Using the Machine" in the Security.
• Using the machine’s security function prevents unauthorized use of the machine, data
tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced security, we recommend that you first
make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.
• Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator.
4
2. Safety Information for This Machine The Meanings of Safety Labels
The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with

WARNING
This Machine
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result
in death or serious injury.
English
Caution
CAUTION
Keep out of reach of children Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result
in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
Do not touch
Do not throw into the fire
Do not use the cleaner
Warning; Laser beam
Caution, hot surface
Caution, sharp edges
5
Safety Precautions to Be Followed Requirements for Using Power Plugs and Cords
Requirements for Unpacking Products

WARNING
• Avoid taking the following actions because doing so can result in fire or
WARNING electric shock:
• Using any power supply voltage or frequencies other than those that
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this match the specifications shown
product's packaging: • Using multi-socket adaptors
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this • Using extension cords
machine close to babies and small children. Suffocation can result if • Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic
polythene materials are brought into contact with the mouth or nose.
• Avoid applying the following actions to power cords because doing so can
result in fire or electric shock:
Requirements for Locating and Installing Machines • Damaging them
• Bundling them
• Modifying them
• Putting heavy objects on them
WARNING • Pulling them forcibly
• Bending them forcibly
• Avoid taking the following actions close to or inside this machine because
• Do not handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so can result in
doing so can result in fire or electric shock:
electric shock.
• Using flammable sprays, solvents, and so on
• Placing flammable sprays, solvents, and so on • The supplied power cord or cords are for use with this machine only. They
• Placing containers holding liquids or small metal objects cannot be used for appliances other than this machine. Also, do not use
power cords other than the power cord or cords supplied with this machine.
Doing so can result in fire or electric shock.
CAUTION • To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from
the wall outlet at least once a year and check them. If any of the following
• Do not place the machine in a humid or dusty environment. Doing so can conditions exist, do not use the plug and the power cord continuously, and
result in fire or electric shock. consult your dealer or service representative.
• There are burn marks on the plug
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. Doing so can
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
cause the machine to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal • The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged
components are overheated. • When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Part of the power cord becomes hot
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine
to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
• When using this machine in a poorly ventilated or narrow room continuously

for a long period of time or printing a high volume of materials, make sure to
ventilate the room sufficiently.
6
CAUTION Requirements during Emergencies
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull
the plug, not the cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can
damage the power cord, possibly resulting in fire or electric shock.
WARNING
• Be sure to push the power cord plug fully into the wall outlet. Also, do not
push it into loose and unstable wall outlets likely to cause a contact failure. • Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity.
Doing so can result in heat generation. Doing so could result in electric shock.
English
• Always connect the ground terminal of the machine to the ground terminal • Be sure to install the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet so that you
on a wall outlet. can disconnect the power cord plug easily in an emergency.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and • If the machine behaves unusually as follows, turn off the power immediately.
the area around the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on After turning off the power, make sure to disconnect the power cord plug from
the plug constitutes a fire hazard. the wall outlet, and then contact your service representative and report the
problem. Continuously using the power cord can result in fire or electric shock.
• If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive • The machine is emitting smoke
holidays, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for • The machine is emitting odors
reasons of safety. • Metal objects or other foreign objects have fallen inside the machine
• Water or other fluids have fallen inside the machine
• When performing maintenance on the machine, disconnect the power cord
from the wall outlet for safety. • If the machine topples or a cover or other part is damaged, turn off the power
immediately. After disconnecting the power cord plug from the wall outlet,
• Power Source contact your service representative. Using the machine continuously can
result in fire or electric shock.
• IM C300F
120–127 V, 10 A or more, 60 Hz
• IM C400F/C400SRF Requirements for Relocating Machines
120–127 V, 12 A or more, 60 Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
CAUTION
• When moving the machine, do not hold the control panel. Doing so may
damage the control panel and can result in injury or malfunction.
• When moving the machine with the optional paper tray unit attached, do not
push the upper part of the main unit forcibly. Doing so can cause the main
unit to detach from the optional paper tray unit, possibly resulting in injury.
• When carrying or moving the machine by lifting it for relocation to another

floor, contact your service representative. Dropping or toppling the machine
can result in injury or malfunction.
• After moving the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise,
the machine might move or topple over to cause injury.
7
CAUTION Requirements for Handling the Machine's Interior
• When moving the machine, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall
outlet and confirm that line cords and other connecting cables have been
removed. Otherwise, the power cord is damaged, possibly resulting in fire WARNING
or electric shock.
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in
this manual. There are high voltage components inside the machine that can
cause electric shock. Also there are laser components inside the machine that
Requirements for Using the Machine can cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any of the
machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or repair.
• Do not disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so can result in fire and
CAUTION electric shock. Also, exposure to the laser components inside this machine
risks blindness.
• Do not look into the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.
• If the paper feed unit is installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time.
Pressing down forcefully on the machine's upper surface might cause the CAUTION
machine topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
• There are highly-heated parts inside the machine. When removing misfed
• Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind paper, do not touch areas other than those specified in this manual. Touching
of conductive paper. Doing so can result in fire. those areas can result in burns.
• Keep SD cards and USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a • There are parts inside the machine that may break when touched. When
child accidentally swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult removing misfed paper, do not touch connectors, sensors, and LED specified
a doctor immediately. in "Troubleshooting". Touching them can result in malfunction.
• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure • Although the machine is designed so that a safety device protects users from
glass. Your hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury. injury, take care not to touch the rollers during operation. The rollers may
pinch before stopping completely.
• Contact your sales or service representative for cleaning the machine's

interior. If the machine's interior is not regularly cleaned while dust
accumulates, fire and malfunction can result.
• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or
injure your fingers.
• The fusing unit becomes hot. When removing the fusing unit, wait for 20
seconds or more after opening the cover and confirm that the fusing unit is
not hotter than the room temperature. Otherwise, you will be burned.
8
Requirements for Handling Supplies CAUTION
• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and
smears them, take the following actions:
WARNING • If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area
thoroughly with soap and water.
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in • If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with
a place with an open flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire. cold water. Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and removing the stain may become impossible.
• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact
English
with naked flame and burns can result. • When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables
• Toner (new or used) with toner, be careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used
• Toner containers while toner is inside consumables and shutting the lid of the container if the lid is available, put
• Toner-attached parts them in a bag.
• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner.
Absorbed toner may cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact
sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However, you can use a toner-compatible
industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the spilled toner
using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.
CAUTION
• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze
them. Toner spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes,
hands, or floor.
• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts
• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or

used), make sure not to inhale toner.
• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency

measures first, and then consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a
fresh air environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.
• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or

used), be careful not to have toner dirt your skin or clothes.
9
IM C400SRF
Safety Labels of This Machine
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels

The unit gets very hot. Wait for 20
This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below. seconds or more to allow hot part
For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated. to cool down.
IM C300F/C400F
The unit gets very hot. Wait for 20 seconds

or more to allow hot part to cool down.
There are sharp edges inside the machine. When

removing misfed paper, do not touch the parts indicated
by this label. Doing so could result in an injury.
There are sharp edges Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust isD0C9IA0002
flammable
There are sharp edges inside the inside the machine, which and might ignite when exposed to an open flame.
machine. When removing misfed is near this label. Keep your Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner. Absorbed toner
paper, do not touch the parts hands clear of the finisher may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact sparking inside
indicated by this label. Doing so when removing the staple the vacuum cleaner.
could result in an injury. cartridge. You might trap Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of
D0C9IA0001
your fingers if you do not. children.
Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable and might ignite
when exposed to an open flame.
Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner. Absorbed toner may cause a fire or
explosion due to electrical contact sparking inside the vacuum cleaner. Symbols for Earth, Insulation, and Power Switch
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
Symbols for earth, insulation, and power switch that are used for this machine are as follows:
: POWER ON
: STANDBY
10
3. Other Information for This Machine Legal Requirements
Laser Safety
Laws and Regulations
For IM C300F
Duplication and Printing Prohibited
CDRH Regulations
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
English
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law: This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR Subchapter J for class I laser product.
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, This equipment contains four InGaAIP laser diodes, 655–666 nanometer wavelength. The
driver's licenses. beam divergence angle is 21 degrees (minimum) and 29 degrees (maximum) in the vertical
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 11 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction,
for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power
or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor. of the light source is 10 milliwatt.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
For IM C400F/C400SRF
CDRH Regulations
This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR Subchapter J for class I laser product.
This equipment contains four AlGaInP laser diodes, 650–666 nanometer wavelength for each
emitter. The beam divergence angle is 15 degrees (minimum) and 25 degrees (maximum) in
the vertical direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 13 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal
direction, and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum
output power of the light source is 15 milliwatt.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
11
• IM C400F
Notes to USA Users of FCC Requirements • IM C400SRF
Installing the Ferrite Core

An Ethernet interface cable connected to the Device Server Option port and a telephone line
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
cable with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note:
Part 68 of the FCC Rules regarding Facsimile Unit
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide 1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio provided to the telephone company.
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a 2. T his equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or 3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product.
measures: It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. installation instructions for detail.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response
connected.
to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by
Caution: the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance 5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible.
or transmitter. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled necessary.
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This 6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or
equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding maintain uninterrupted service.
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). 7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please
Supplier's Declaration of Conformity contact Ricoh USA, Inc. Customer Support Department at 1-888-456-6457. If this device
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. is causing problems with your telephone network, the telephone company may request that
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may see the manual provided with this machine for instruction on resolving the problem.
cause undesired operation. 9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
Responsible party: Ricoh USA, Inc. commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
Address: 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341 10. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure
Telephone number: 610-296-8000 the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have
Product Name: Multi Function Peripheral questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or
Model Number: a qualified installer.
• IM C300F
12
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO • Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de
EMERGENCY NUMBERS: la fuite.
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before Conserver ces instructions.
hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a
Notes to Canadian Users of Wireless Devices
computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or (1) This device may not cause interference; and
English
on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number operation of the device.
of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
long-distance transmission charges.) equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the following from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
steps: Follow the FAX HEADER programming procedure in the Programming chapter of
the operating instructions to enter the business identification and telephone number of Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
the terminal or business. This information is transmitted with your document by the FAX
HEADER feature. In addition to the information, be sure to program the date and time into Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
your machine. radio exempts de licence.
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Important Safety Instructions for Facsimile Unit Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed
radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des
• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric
shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
Save these instructions.
IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ de l'unité Fax

Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de material
téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures. En
voici quelques-unes:
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier
de cuisine, d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
• Éviter d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un appareil sans fil) pendant un orage
électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre.
13
Notes to Canadian Users of Facsimile Unit Trademarks
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
technical specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks
to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the
devices not exceed five.
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l'unité Fax

Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation,
Sciences et Développement économique Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs
qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme
des IES de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas cinq.
Recycling Batteries (For Users in the USA and Canada)
Li-ion batteries are recyclable.

You can help preserve our environment by returning your used rechargeable batteries to the
collection and recycling location nearest you.
For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-
8837, or visit http://www.call2recycle.org/
Les batteries Li-ion sont recyclables.
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver l'environnement en rapportant vos batteries usagées
dans le point de collecte et de recyclage le plus proche.
Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage des batteries, appelez le numéro gratuit 1-800-822-
8837 (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) ou rendez-vous sur http://www.call2recycle.org/
14
15
English
16
Español
Información de 1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina
seguridad
2. Información de seguridad de esta máquina
3. Más información sobre esta máquina
Para información no incluida en este

manual, consulte los manuales online
disponibles en nuestra página web
(https://www.ricoh.com/) o a través del
panel de mandos.
Lea atentamente este manual antes de utilizar la máquina y

guárdelo a mano para consultarlo en el futuro. Para un uso seguro
y correcto, lea "Información de seguridad" antes de utilizar la
máquina.
CONTENIDO
Cómo leer los manuales........................................................................................................... 3
1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina

Manuales para esta máquina................................................................................................... 4
2. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Los significados de los símbolos de seguridad utilizados con esta máquina......................... 5
Los significados de las etiquetas de seguridad....................................................................... 5
Precauciones de seguridad...................................................................................................... 6
Etiquetas de seguridad de esta máquina............................................................................... 10
3. Más información sobre esta máquina

Leyes y normativas................................................................................................................. 11
Requisitos legales................................................................................................................... 11
Marcas comerciales................................................................................................................ 14
2
Cómo leer los manuales Exención de responsabilidades
En la medida en que lo permita la legislación aplicable, el fabricante no será responsable de
Símbolos utilizados en los manuales ningún daño causado por fallos de esta máquina, pérdida de documentos o datos, o el uso
o no uso de este producto y los manuales de producto que se proporcionan con el mismo.
En este manual se utilizan los siguientes símbolos:
Asegúrese siempre de realizar copias o tener copias de seguridad de los datos registrados
en esta máquina. Es posible que se borren documentos y datos por un error operativo o
alguna avería de la máquina.
En ningún caso el fabricante será responsable de documentos creados por usted mediante
Indica aquellos puntos a los que debe prestar atención cuando se utilicen las funciones.
esta máquina, ni cualquier resultado de los datos ejecutados por usted.
Este símbolo indica los puntos que pueden dañar el producto o servicio de forma que no
pueda utilizarse o que pueden resultar en la pérdida de información si no se siguen las
instrucciones. Asegúrese de leer estas explicaciones.
Notas
Español
El contenido de este manual está sujeto a cambios sin previo aviso.
Indica explicaciones adicionales sobre las funciones del producto e instrucciones sobre El fabricante no se hace responsable de los daños o gastos derivados del uso de piezas que
cómo resolver errores de usuario. no sean las originales del fabricante en sus productos de oficina.
Para una buena calidad de impresión, el fabricante recomienda el uso de tóner original del
[] fabricante.
Indica los nombres de las teclas y los botones del producto o de la pantalla. Algunas de las ilustraciones de este manual pueden presentar ligeras diferencias respecto
a la máquina.
(principalmente, Europa y Asia), (principalmente, Europa), o (principalmente, Asia) Los colores de las teclas de color o el círculo de color pueden diferir ligeramente de los
(principalmente Norteamérica) colores de las copias reales.
Las diferencias entre las funciones de los modelos de la región A y la región B se indican Las muestras de color que aparecen en este manual pueden diferir ligeramente de los
mediante estos dos símbolos. Lea la información indicada por el símbolo correspondiente a colores de las copias reales.
la región del modelo que está utilizando. Para obtener más información sobre qué símbolo Algunas opciones pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países. Si desea información más
corresponde al modelo que está utilizando, consulte Especificaciones. detallada, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.
En función del país en que se encuentre, determinadas unidades pueden ser opcionales. Si
desea información más detallada, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.
3
1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina • Puede descargarse la información sobre el certificado de la máquina, que se basa en
un sistema de certificación de seguridad IT (de aquí en adelante, Certificación CC), en
la siguiente URL:
Perfil de Protección del Gobierno de los EE. UU. para Dispositivos de Copia en
Manuales para esta máquina Papel, Versión 1.0 (Norma IEEE 2600.2™-2009)
Para administradores: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/en/
Las instrucciones de uso de esta máquina se proporcionan en los siguientes formatos: download_admin.html
Formato Manuales Para usuarios: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/en/
download_user.html
Manual impreso • Información de seguridad
Perfil de Protección para Dispositivos de Copia en Papel 1.0, del 10 de septiembre
CD-ROM • Guía de instalación del driver de 2015
Manuales mostrados en el panel de • Guía del usuario (versión completa) (HTML) Para administradores: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
mandos im_c300_c400_c400SR/en/download_admin.html
Para usuarios: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400_c400SR/en/
Páginas web • Información de seguridad
• Guía del usuario (versión seleccionada) (PDF) download_user.html
• Guía del usuario (versión completa) (HTML) Esta información es sobre la configuración de la máquina. Si ha adquirido una máquina
• Guía de instalación del driver
con Certificado CC, asegúrese de leerlo antes de utilizarla para realizar los ajustes
Información de seguridad necesarios.
Antes de utilizar la máquina, asegúrese de leer la sección de este manual llamada
Información de seguridad. También contiene información sobre la conformidad
medioambiental y normativas.
Guía del usuario (versión seleccionada)
En relación al uso básico de esta máquina, se proporcionan para cada manual de
usuario resúmenes sobre las funciones utilizadas con más frecuencia, detección de
errores al aparecer un mensaje de error, etc.
Guía del usuario (versión completa)
Describe la configuración para usar la máquina, cómo usar las funciones para copiar,
comunicarse por fax, imprimir, escanear o para llevar a cabo el mantenimiento y
especificaciones, detección de errores, ajustes del sistema y funciones de seguridad.
Los manuales están disponibles en inglés, alemán, francés, italiano, español, neerlandés y ruso.
La Guía del usuario para otros idiomas aparte de los indicados anteriormente contiene
la información de la Guía del usuario (versión seleccionada) y la Guía de seguridad.
Guía de instalación del driver
Describe cómo instalar y configurar cada driver. Este manual está incluido en el CD de
drivers.
• Antes de configurar los ajustes de seguridad y autenticación ampliados, consulte la

Guía de seguridad.
• Utilizar la función de seguridad de la máquina evita usos no autorizados de la máquina,
alteración de datos o fuga de información. Le recomendamos que realice los siguientes
ajustes para aumentar la seguridad:
• Instale el Certificado del Dispositivo.
• Active el cifrado SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
• Cambie el nombre de usuario y la contraseña del administrador.
4
2. Información de seguridad de esta máquina Los significados de las etiquetas de seguridad
Los significados de los símbolos de seguridad

ADVERTENCIA
utilizados con esta máquina
Indica una situación de peligro potencial que podría causar la muerte o lesiones graves si no
se siguen las instrucciones.
Precaución
PRECAUCIÓN
Mantener fuera del alcance de los niños Indica una situación de peligro potencial que podría causar lesiones leves o moderadas o
daños a la propiedad si no se siguen las instrucciones.
Español
No tocar
No tirar al fuego
No usar un aspirador
Advertencia: Rayo láser
Precaución, superficie caliente
Precaución, bordes afilados
5
Precauciones de seguridad Requisitos para el uso de enchufes y cables de alimentación
Requisitos para desempacar productos

ADVERTENCIA
• Evite llevar a cabo las siguientes acciones, ya que, de lo contrario, podría
ADVERTENCIA provocar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica:
• Usar una tensión de alimentación o frecuencias que no sean las
• A continuación, se explican los mensajes de advertencia que se indican en la
indicadas en las especificaciones
bolsa de plástico utilizada para el embalaje de este producto:
• Usar adaptadores con varias tomas
• No deje los materiales de polietileno (bolsas, etc.) suministrados con
• Usar cables prolongadores
esta máquina al alcance de bebés y niños pequeños. El contacto con
• Tocar las clavijas del enchufe del cable eléctrico con cualquier objeto
materiales de polietileno a través de la boca o la nariz puede producir
metálico
asfixia.
• Evite cualquiera de las siguientes acciones en los cables eléctricos, ya que,
de lo contrario, podría provocar un incendio o descarga eléctrica:
Requisitos para la ubicación e instalación de las máquinas • Dañarlos
• Agruparlos
• Modificarlos
• Colocar objetos pesados sobre ellos
ADVERTENCIA • Tirar de ellos con fuerza
• Doblarlos a la fuerza
• Evite llevar a cabo las siguientes acciones cerca o en el interior de esta
• No toque el enchufe del cable con las manos húmedas. Hacerlo puede
máquina, ya que, de lo contrario, se podría producir un incendio o una
provocar una descarga eléctrica.
descarga eléctrica:
• Usar pulverizadores inflamables, disolventes, etc. • Los cables de alimentación suministrados solo pueden utilizarse con esta
• Colocar pulverizadores inflamables, disolventes, etc. máquina. No pueden utilizarse con otros dispositivos. Tampoco utilice cables
• Colocar contenedores con líquidos o pequeños objetos metálicos no suministrados con esta máquina. De lo contrario, puede producirse un
incendio o una descarga eléctrica.
• Para evitar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe

PRECAUCIÓN y el cable de la toma de pared al menos una vez al año para comprobar
su estado. Si se produce alguna de las siguientes condiciones, no siga
• No coloque la máquina en un entorno húmedo o con polvo. De lo contrario, utilizando ni el enchufe ni el cable de alimentación y consulte a su distribuidor
puede producirse un incendio o una descarga eléctrica. o representante de servicio.
• Hay marcas de quemaduras en el enchufe
• No coloque la máquina en una superficie inestable o inclinada. De lo
• Las clavijas del enchufe están deformadas
contrario, la máquina podría caer o volcar, y provocar lesiones.
• Los cables del interior del cable de alimentación están expuestos o rotos
• No obstruya las rejillas de ventilación de la máquina. De lo contrario, podría • El revestimiento del cable de alimentación está agrietado, fisurado o
provocar un incendio al sobrecalentar los componentes internos. dañado
• Al doblar el cable de alimentación, la máquina se apaga y se enciende
• No coloque objetos de peso sobre la máquina. De lo contrario, la máquina • Parte del cable de alimentación se calienta
podría caer o volcar, y provocar lesiones.
• Si se utiliza esta máquina en una habitación mal ventilada o estrecha de

forma continua durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, o si se imprime
un gran volumen de materiales, asegúrese de ventilar suficientemente la
habitación.
6
PRECAUCIÓN Requisitos durante emergencias
• Al desconectar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared, asegúrese de
tirar del enchufe y no del cable. No tire del cable de alimentación con fuerza.
Hacer esto podría dañar el cable de alimentación, pudiendo llegar a producir
un incendio o descarga eléctrica.
ADVERTENCIA
• Asegúrese de insertar completamente el enchufe del cable de alimentación • No toque la máquina si ha caído un rayo en una zona próxima. Hacerlo
podría provocar una descarga eléctrica.
en la toma de la pared. Además, no lo inserte en tomas de pared flojas e
inestables, ya que es probable que se produzca un fallo de contacto. Hacerlo • Asegúrese de instalar la máquina lo más cerca posible de una toma de
podría generar calor. pared para poder desconectar el enchufe del cable de alimentación de forma
sencilla en caso de emergencia.
• Conecte siempre el terminal de conexión a tierra de la máquina a un terminal
de tierra de un enchufe de pared. • Si la máquina se comporta de forma extraña, corte la alimentación eléctrica
de inmediato. Tras desactivar la alimentación eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe
Español
• Asegúrese de desconectar el enchufe de la toma de la pared y de limpiar las del cable de alimentación de la toma de pared y póngase en contacto con su
clavijas, así como la zona de alrededor al menos una vez al año. Si deja que representante de servicio para comunicarle el problema. El uso continuo del
se acumule el polvo en el enchufe, podría producirse un incendio. cable de alimentación puede provocar un incendio o descarga eléctrica.
• La máquina desprende humo
• Si no utiliza la máquina durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, como por • La máquina desprende olores
ejemplo, en vacaciones, asegúrese de desconectar el enchufe del cable de • Han caído objetos metálicos u otros objetos extraños en el interior de
alimentación de la toma de pared por motivos de seguridad. la máquina
• Ha entrado agua u otros líquidos en el interior de la máquina
• Si realiza operaciones de mantenimiento en la máquina, desconecte el cable
de alimentación de la red por seguridad. • Si la máquina vuelca o una cubierta u otra pieza está dañada, apague la
máquina inmediatamente. Después de desconectar el enchufe del cable de
• Alimentación eléctrica alimentación de la toma de pared, póngase en contacto con su representante
del servicio técnico. Un uso continuo de la máquina puede provocar un
• IM C300F incendio o una descarga eléctrica.
120–127 V, 10 A o más, 60 Hz
• IM C400F/C400SRF
120–127 V, 12 A o más, 60 Hz Requisitos para cambiar la ubicación de las máquinas
Asegúrese de conectar el cable de alimentación a una fuente de
alimentación del tipo arriba indicado.
PRECAUCIÓN
• Cuando traslade la máquina, no la sujete por el panel de mandos. De lo
contrario, podría dañarse el panel de mandos, causar una avería o provocar
alguna lesión.
• A la hora de trasladar la máquina con la bandeja de papel opcional acoplada,

no presione con fuerza la parte superior de la unidad principal. Si lo hace, la
bandeja de papel opcional podría separarse de la unidad principal y provocar
lesiones.
• A la hora de trasladar la máquina elevándola para su reubicación en otra

planta, póngase en contacto con su representante de servicio. Una caída o
vuelco de la máquina puede producir una lesión o averías.
• Después de mover la máquina, utilice el dispositivo de fijación para fijar la máquina.

De lo contrario, la máquina se podría mover o volcar, causando lesiones.
7
PRECAUCIÓN Requisitos para la manipulación del interior de la máquina
• A la hora de trasladar la máquina, asegúrese de desenchufar el cable de
alimentación de la toma de pared y confirme que se han retirado los cables
de línea y el resto de cables de conexión. De lo contrario, el cable de ADVERTENCIA
alimentación podría sufrir daños, lo que podría provocar un incendio o una
descarga eléctrica. • No retire tapas ni tornillos si no se indica explícitamente en el presente
manual. Hay componentes de alto voltaje en el interior de la máquina que
pueden provocar descargas eléctricas. También hay componentes láser en
Requisitos para el uso de la máquina el interior de la máquina que pueden provocar ceguera. En caso de que
los componentes internos de la máquina necesiten mantenimiento, ajuste
o reparación, póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas o de
servicio técnico.
PRECAUCIÓN • No desmonte ni modifique esta máquina. Hacerlo podría producir una

descarga eléctrica o un incendio. Además, la exposición a los componentes
• No mire directamente hacia la fuente de luz. De lo contrario, podría sufrir láser del interior de la máquina puede provocar ceguera.
daños en los ojos.
• Si la unidad de alimentación de papel está instalada, no abra más de una

bandeja al mismo tiempo. Ejercer una presión o fuerza sobre la superficie PRECAUCIÓN
superior de la máquina, puede provocar que la máquina vuelque, y resultar
en daños personales. • Hay componentes a temperaturas muy altas en el interior de la máquina. A la
hora de retirar el papel mal colocado, no toque las áreas no especificadas en
• No utilice hojas de papel con grapas, láminas de aluminio, papel de carbón este manual. Si toca las áreas no especificadas, puede sufrir quemaduras.
ni ningún otro tipo de papel conductivo. Hacerlo podría provocar un incendio.
• Estos son componentes del interior de la máquina que se pueden romper si
• Guarde las tarjetas SD o los dispositivos de memoria flash USB fuera del se tocan. A la hora de retirar el papel mal colocado, no toque los conectores,
alcance de los niños. Si algún niño ingiere por accidente una tarjeta SD o sensores y LED especificados en "Resolución de problemas". Tocarlos
dispositivo de memoria flash USB, consulte inmediatamente con un médico. puede provocar una avería.
• Al bajar el ADF, no coloque las manos en las bisagras ni en el cristal de • Aunque la máquina está diseñada para que un dispositivo de seguridad
exposición. Las manos o los dedos quedarían atrapados, lo que podría proteja a los usuarios de cualquier lesión, procure no tocar los rodillos durante
provocar una lesión. el funcionamiento de la máquina. Los dedos podrían quedar atrapados entre
los rodillos antes de que estos se detengan por completo.
• Póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas o de servicio para

limpiar el interior de la máquina. Si el interior de la máquina no se limpia
periódicamente y el polvo se acumula, se puede producir un incendio y averías.
• Al sustituir el papel o retirar el papel atascado, tenga cuidado de no hacerse

daño ni pillarse los dedos.
• La unidad de fusión alcanza temperaturas altas. Al retirar la unidad de

fusión, espere 20 segundos o más tras abrir la tapa y asegúrese de que la
temperatura de la unidad de fusión no es superior a la de la habitación. Si
no, usted se quemará.
8
Requisitos para la manipulación de consumibles PRECAUCIÓN
• Si se mancha de tóner (nuevo o usado) la piel o la ropa, lleve a cabo las
siguientes acciones:
ADVERTENCIA • Si el tóner entra en contacto con la piel, lave la zona afectada con agua
abundante y jabón.
• No almacene tóner (nuevo o usado) ni contenedores con tóner en su interior • Si el tóner entra en contacto con la ropa, lave la zona manchada con
en un lugar con una llama abierta. El tóner podría entrar en combustión y agua fría. Calentar el área manchada con agua caliente fijará el tóner al
provocar quemaduras o un incendio. tejido y puede hacer imposible la eliminación de la mancha.
• No arroje al fuego los siguientes elementos. El tóner entrará en combustión • Al sustituir un contenedor con tóner (incluido tóner usado) o consumibles
en contacto con una llama abierta, provocando quemaduras. con tóner, evite que se produzcan salpicaduras. Después de retirar los
• Tóner (nuevo o usado) consumibles usados y cerrar la tapa del contenedor (si hay una tapa
• Contenedores de tóner con tóner en su interior disponible), colóquelos en una bolsa.
Español
• Componentes en contacto con tóner
• No aspire el tóner vertido (incluido tóner usado) con una aspiradora. El tóner
absorbido puede entrar en combustión o causar una explosión por contacto
eléctrico en el interior del aspirador. No obstante, puede utilizar un aspirador
industrial específico para tóner. Si se vierte tóner, limpie el tóner vertido
utilizando un paño seco, para que el tóner no se disperse.
PRECAUCIÓN
• No abra a la fuerza los contenedores de tóner cuando haya tóner en su
interior. No los apriete ni aplaste. Un vertido de tóner puede provocar una
ingestión accidental o ensuciar la ropa, las manos o el suelo.
• No deje los siguientes elementos en un lugar al que puedan acceder los

niños:
• Tóner (nuevo o usado)
• Contenedores de tóner con tóner en su interior
• Componentes en contacto con tóner
• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),

asegúrese de no inhalar el tóner.
• Si se da cualquiera de las siguientes situaciones al manejar el tóner, reciba

primero los primeros auxilios y, a continuación, acuda a un médico si fuera
necesario.
• Si inhala el tóner, realice gárgaras con una cantidad abundante de agua
y diríjase a un lugar donde pueda respirar aire fresco.
• Si ingiere el tóner, diluya el contenido gástrico con una gran cantidad
de agua.
• Si el tóner entra en contacto con los ojos, lávelos con abundante agua.
• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),

tenga cuidado de no mancharse la piel o la ropa.
9
Etiquetas de seguridad de esta máquina IM C400SRF
Posiciones de las etiquetas de ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCIÓN

La unidad se sobrecalienta.
Esta máquina dispone de etiquetas de ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCIÓN en los siguientes Espere 20 segundos o más
lugares. Por su seguridad, siga las instrucciones y manipule la máquina tal como se indica. para que el componente
caliente se enfríe.
IM C300F/C400F
La unidad se sobrecalienta.
Espere 20 segundos o más
para que el componente
caliente se enfríe.
Esta máquina tiene bordes angulosos en su interior. Al retirar

el papel atascado, no toque las piezas indicadas con esta
etiqueta. De lo contrario, podría resultar en daños y lesiones.
D0C9IA0002
Esta máquina tiene bordes No queme el tóner utilizado ni el tóner vertido. El polvo del tóner es
Esta máquina tiene bordes angulosos en su interior, que inflamable y puede arder en caso de ser expuesto a una llama.
están indicados con esta etiqueta. No utilice el aspirador para retirar el tóner derramado. El tóner
angulosos en su interior. Al retirar
Mantenga las manos alejadas del absorbido puede causar un incendio o explosión por contacto
el papel atascado, no toque las
finisher al desatascar un cartucho eléctrico en el interior del aspirador.
piezas indicadas con esta etiqueta. Mantenga el tóner (usado o no) y la botella de tóner fuera del
de grapas. De lo contrario, los
De lo contrario, podría resultar en dedos podrían quedar atrapados. alcance de los niños.
daños y lesiones. D0C9IA0001
No queme el tóner utilizado ni el tóner vertido. El polvo del tóner es inflamable y puede
arder en caso de ser expuesto a una llama. Símbolos del interruptor de toma a tierra, de aislamiento
No utilice el aspirador para retirar el tóner derramado. El tóner absorbido puede causar un y de alimentación
incendio o explosión por contacto eléctrico en el interior del aspirador.
Mantenga el tóner (usado o no) y la botella de tóner fuera del alcance de los niños. Los símbolos del interruptor de toma a tierra, aislamiento y alimentación que se usan en esta
máquina son los siguientes:
: ENCENDIDA
: EN ESPERA.
10
3. Más información sobre esta máquina Requisitos legales
Leyes y normativas Seguridad para láser
Sobre el modelo IM C300F

Duplicación e impresión prohibidas
Normas CDRH
No realice copias ni imprima ningún artículo cuya reproducción esté prohibida por la ley.
La copia o la impresión de los siguientes artículos, normalmente está prohibida por la ley: Este equipo cumple con los requisitos del 21 CFR Subchapter J para productos láser de
billetes bancarios, timbres fiscales, bonos, certificados de acciones, efectos bancarios, clase I. Este equipo contiene cuatro diodos láser InGaAIP, con una longitud de onda de
cheques, pasaportes y permisos de conducir. 655–666 nanómetros. El ángulo de divergencia del haz luminoso es de 21 grados (mínimo) y
La lista anterior es tan solo una guía orientativa y no contiene todas las prohibiciones. No 29 grados (máximo) en la dirección vertical, y 7 grados (mínimo) y 11 grados (máximo) en la
Español
asumimos responsabilidad alguna relacionada con su precisión e integridad. Si tiene alguna dirección horizontal, y los rayos láser se generan en modo Onda continua (Continuous Wave
pregunta relacionada con la legalidad de copiar o imprimir ciertos artículos, póngase en o CW). La potencia de salida máxima de la fuente lumínica es de 10 milivatios.
contacto con su asesor legal. Precaución
El uso de los controles o ajustes o la práctica de procedimientos que no se ajusten a lo
especificado en este manual, pueden causar exposición peligrosa a radiaciones.
Sobre los modelos IM C400F/C400SRF
Normas CDRH
Este equipo cumple con los requisitos del 21 CFR Subchapter J para productos láser de
clase I. Este equipo contiene cuatro diodos láser AlGaInP, y una longitud de onda de 650-
666 nanómetros para cada emisor. El ángulo de divergencia del haz luminoso es de 15
grados (mínimo) y 25 grados (máximo) en la dirección vertical, y 7 grados (mínimo) y 13
grados (máximo) en la dirección horizontal; y los rayos láser se generan en modo Onda
continua (Continuous Wave o CW). La potencia de salida máxima de la fuente lumínica es
15 milivatios.
Precaución
El uso de los controles o ajustes o la práctica de procedimientos que no se ajusten a lo
especificado en este manual, pueden causar exposición peligrosa a radiaciones.
11
• IM C400F
Notas para los usuarios de EE. UU. sobre requisitos de la FCC • IM C400SRF
Instalación del núcleo de ferrita

Debe utilizarse un cable de interfaz Ethernet conectado al puerto de opción de servidor
Apartado 15 de la Reglamentación de FCC de dispositivo y un cable de línea telefónica con un núcleo de ferrita para eliminar las
interferencias RF.
Nota:
Apartado 68 de la Reglamentación FCC acerca de la Unidad de fax
Este equipo se ha sometido a pruebas que acreditan su conformidad con los límites
establecidos para los dispositivos digitales de clase B, según el apartado 15 de las 1. Este equipo cumple con el Apartado 68 de la Reglamentación FCC. En la tapa de este
normas de la FCC. Estos límites están pensados para ofrecer una protección suficiente equipo se encuentra un adhesivo que contiene, entre otros, el número de registro FCC
contra las interferencias perjudiciales en instalaciones residenciales. Este aparato y número REN para este equipo. En caso de solicitarse, deberá proporcionar esta
genera, utiliza y puede emitir energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y se utiliza de información a la compañía telefónica.
conformidad con las instrucciones, podría provocar interferencias perjudiciales para las 2. E ste equipo utiliza un conector RJ11C USOC.
comunicaciones por radio. Sin embargo, no se garantiza la ausencia de interferencias 3. La clavija y el enchufe utilizados para conectar este equipo al cableado y a la red telefónica
deben cumplir con las reglas aplicables del Apartado 68 de la FCC y los requisitos adoptados
en una instalación concreta. Si el equipo provoca interferencias en la recepción de radio
por la ACTA. Con este producto se suministra un cable telefónico y un conector modular
o televisión (que podrá determinar encendiendo y apagando el equipo), el usuario puede
en conformidad. Se ha diseñado para conectar un enchufe hembra modular compatible
tratar de corregirlas adoptando alguna de las siguientes medidas: también en conformidad. Consulte las instrucciones de instalación para más detalles.
• Cambie la orientación o la posición de la antena de recepción. 4. El REN se utiliza para determinar el número de dispositivos que pueden conectarse a la
• Aumente la distancia que separa el equipo y el receptor.
línea telefónica. Un número excesivo de REN en una línea telefónica puede provocar que
• Conecte el equipo a una toma de un circuito diferente del circuito al que se conecta el receptor.
los dispositivos no suenen ante una llamada entrante. En la mayoría de áreas, pero no
• Consulte con el distribuidor o con un técnico de radio o televisión experimentado.
en todas, la suma de REN no debería superar cinco (5,0). Para asegurarse del número
Precaución: de dispositivos que pueden conectarse a una línea, según lo determinado por los REN
Los cambios o modificaciones que no sean aprobados expresamente por el responsable totales, contacte con la compañía de teléfonos local.
de conformidades pueden anular la autoridad del usuario para utilizar el equipo. 5. Si este equipo causara alguna anomalía en la línea de teléfono, la compañía telefónica
le notificaría previamente de un posible corte temporal del servicio. Si el aviso previo no
Este transmisor no debe colocarse ni utilizarse junto con otra antena o transmisor.
pudiera realizarse, la compañía telefónica avisará al cliente lo antes posible. Asimismo, se
Este equipo cumple con los límites de exposición a radiación FCC establecidos para le informará de su derecho a presentar una reclamación a la FCC si así lo cree necesario.
controlar los entornos y cumple con las directrices sobre exposición a radiofrecuencia 6. La compañía telefónica puede realizar cambios en sus instalaciones, equipo, operaciones
(RF) FCC. Este equipo tiene niveles muy bajos de energía RF que cumplen los límites o procedimientos que podrían afectar al funcionamiento del equipo. Si esto ocurriera, la
máximos permitidos de evaluación de exposición (MPE). No obstante, es recomendable compañía telefónica le notificará de antemano para que pueda realizar las modificaciones
que se instale y utilice con el radiador a un mínimo de 20 cm de cualquier persona necesarias sin interrumpir el servicio.
(excluidas las extremidades: manos, muñecas, pies y tobillos). 7. S
i surge algún problema con el equipo, para información sobre la garantía o reparaciones, contacte
con el departamento de atención al cliente: Ricoh USA, Inc. Customer Support Department,
Declaración de conformidad del proveedor
1-888-456-6457. Si este dispositivo causa problemas en su red telefónica, la compañía telefónica
Este dispositivo cumple con el apartado 15 de las normas de la FCC. podría solicitarle que desconectara el equipo hasta que se solucione el problema.
El funcionamiento está sujeto a las dos condiciones siguientes: 8. En el caso de problemas de funcionamiento (atasco de documentos, atasco de copias,
(1) Este dispositivo no puede provocar interferencias perjudiciales; y indicadores de error de comunicación), consulte el manual proporcionado con la máquina
Este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia recibida, incluidas las
(2) para ver instrucciones sobre cómo resolver el problema.
interferencias que afecten al funcionamiento del dispositivo. 9. La conexión con el servicio de multillamadas está sujeta a las tarifas estatales. Contacte
Responsable: Ricoh USA, Inc. con la comisión pública estatal, la comisión de servicio público o la comisión corporativa
para más información.
Dirección: 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341
10. Si tiene un equipo de alarma cableado conectado a la línea telefónica en casa, asegúrese
Teléfono: 610-296-8000
de que la instalación de este equipo no desactiva su equipo de alarma. Si tiene alguna
Nombre de producto: Multi Function Peripheral (periférico multifuncional)
pregunta acerca de qué podría desactivar su equipo de alarma, consulte a la compañía
Número de modelo:
• IM C300F telefónica o a un técnico de instalación cualificado.
12
AL PROGRAMAR NÚMEROS DE EMERGENCIA Y/O REALIZAR LLAMADAS DE • Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de
PRUEBA A NÚMEROS DE EMERGENCIA: la fuite.
1. Permanezca en línea y explique brevemente al receptor el motivo de su llamada antes de Conserver ces instructions.
colgar.
2. Realice este tipo de actividades en horas de tarifa reducida, como a primera hora de la
mañana o al final de la tarde.
Notas para los usuarios canadienses de dispositivos
El acta de protección al consumidor (Telephone Consumer Protection Act) de 1991 declara ilegal inalámbricos
el uso por parte de cualquier persona de un ordenador o cualquier otro dispositivo electrónico,
Este dispositivo cumple los estándares RSS exentos de licencia de la Industry Canada.
incluidas máquinas de fax, para enviar cualquier mensaje, a menos que dicho mensaje contenga
(1) Este dispositivo no causa interferencias y
claramente en el margen superior o inferior de cada página transmitida o en la primera página de (2) Este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluidas aquellas que afecten al
transmisión, la fecha y hora en la que se envió y una identificación de la empresa u otra entidad, u funcionamiento del dispositivo.
otro individuo que enviara el mensaje y el número de teléfono de la máquina emisora o la empresa, Este equipo cumple con los límites de exposición a radiación IC establecidos para controlar
Español
otra entidad o individuo. (El número de teléfono proporcionado no puede ser un 900 ni ningún otro entornos y cumple con RSS-102 de las normas de exposición a radiofrecuencia (FC) IC.
número para el que los cargos superen las cuotas de transmisión local o de larga distancia). Este equipo debe instalarse y utilizarse con el radiador a un mínimo de 20 cm de cualquier
Para programar esta información en su máquina de FAX, debería completar los pasos siguientes: persona (excluidas las extremidades: manos, muñecas, pies y tobillos).
Siga el procedimiento de programación de encabezado de fax en el capítulo de programación de
las instrucciones de uso para introducir el identificador de empresa y número telefónico del terminal
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
o empresa. Esta información se transmitirá con su documento mediante la función de encabezado Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
de fax. Además de dicha información, asegúrese de programar la fecha y hora de la máquina. radio exempts de licence.
(2) l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
Instrucciones de seguridad importantes para la Unidad de fax susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
Al utilizar su dispositivo telefónico, debe seguir siempre una serie de precauciones de pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
seguridad básicas para reducir el riesgo de incendio, descarga eléctrica y lesiones, entre las radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
que se incluyen las siguientes: une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
• No utilice el producto cerca del agua, como por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera, extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
lavamanos, fregadero o lavadero, ni en un sótano húmedo o cerca de una piscina.
• Evite el uso del teléfono durante tormentas eléctricas. Corre riesgo de descarga eléctrica
causada por un rayo.
• No utilice el teléfono cerca de un escape de gas para informar del mismo.
Guarde estas instrucciones.

13
Notas para usuarios de la Unidad de fax en Canadá Marcas comerciales
Este producto cumple las especificaciones técnicas aplicables del organismo de Innovación, SD es una marca comercial de SD-3C, LLC.
Ciencias y Desarrollo económico de Canadá.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to Otros nombres de productos mencionados en el presente documento lo son únicamente
be connected to a telephone interface . La terminación de una interfaz puede contar de una para su identificación y pueden ser marcas comerciales de sus respectivas empresas.
combinación de dispositivos sujetos únicamente al requisito de que la suma de los REN de Renunciamos a cualquier derecho sobre dichas marcas.
todos los dispositivos no supere cinco.
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l'unité Fax

Reciclaje de baterías (para usuarios de los EE. UU. y Canadá)
Las baterías de litio-ión se pueden reciclar.

Puede ayudar a preservar nuestro medio ambiente devolviendo las baterías recargables
utilizadas al punto de recolección y reciclado más cercano a usted.
Si desea obtener más información sobre el reciclado de baterías recargables, llame al número
de teléfono gratuito 1-800-822-8837, o bien visite el sitio web http://www.call2recycle.org/
14
15
Español
16
Português (Brasil)
Informações de 1. Manuais fornecidos com este equipamento
segurança
2. Informações de segurança relativas a este
equipamento
3. Outras informações relativas a este

equipamento
Para informações não encontradas neste

manual, consulte os manuais on-line
disponíveis em nosso site
(https://www.ricoh.com/) ou pelo painel de
controle.
Antes de usar o equipamento, leia atentamente este manual e

mantenha-o ao alcance para consultas futuras. Para um uso
seguro e correto, certifique-se de ler as Informações de segurança
neste manual antes de usar o equipamento.
ÍNDICE
Como ler os manuais................................................................................................................ 3
1. Manuais fornecidos com este equipamento

Manuais deste equipamento..................................................................................................... 4
2. Informações de segurança relativas a este equipamento

Significados dos símbolos de segurança usados neste equipamento.................................... 5
Significados das etiquetas de segurança................................................................................. 5
Precauções de segurança a serem seguidas.......................................................................... 6
Etiquetas de segurança neste equipamento.......................................................................... 10
3. Outras informações relativas a este equipamento

Leis e regulamentações.......................................................................................................... 11
Requisitos legais..................................................................................................................... 11
Marcas comerciais.................................................................................................................. 14
2
Como ler os manuais Isenção de responsabilidade
Até a extensão máxima permitida pelas leis aplicáveis, o fabricante, sob nenhuma
Símbolos usados nos manuais circunstância, será responsável por danos de qualquer natureza decorrentes de falhas
neste equipamento, perdas de dados registrados ou do uso ou não uso deste produto e dos
Este manual usa os seguintes símbolos:
manuais de operação fornecidos com ele.
Certifique-se de sempre copiar ou fazer backups dos dados registrados neste equipamento.
Documentos ou dados podem ser apagados devido a erros operacionais ou falhas de
funcionamento do equipamento.
Indica pontos que necessitam de atenção ao utilizar as funções. Este símbolo indica pontos
Sob nenhuma circunstância, o fabricante será responsável por documentos criados por você
que podem resultar em incapacidade de uso do produto ou serviço ou resultar na perda de
por meio deste equipamento ou por quaisquer resultados decorrentes dos dados executados
dados caso as instruções não sejam cumpridas. Certifique-se de ler essas explicações.
por você.
Indica explicações complementares sobre as funções do produto e instruções sobre como Notas
solucionar erros.
Português (Brasil)
O conteúdo deste manual está sujeito a alterações sem notificação prévia.
[] O fabricante não será responsável por nenhum dano ou despesa resultante do uso de peças
Indica os nomes de teclas ou botões no produto ou visor. não genuínas em seus produtos de escritório.
Para uma boa qualidade dos documentos, o fabricante recomenda a utilização de toner
(essencialmente Europa e Ásia), (essencialmente Europa) ou (essencialmente Ásia) genuíno do fabricante.
(essencialmente América do Norte) Algumas ilustrações neste manual podem ser um pouco diferentes no equipamento.
As diferenças nas funções dos modelos da região A e região B são indicadas por dois As cores nas teclas coloridas ou no círculo colorido podem diferir ligeiramente das cores de
símbolos. Leia as informações indicadas pelo símbolo que corresponde à região do modelo cópias reais.
que você está usando. Para obter mais informações sobre que símbolo corresponde ao seu As amostras de cores neste manual podem diferir ligeiramente das cores das cópias reais.
modelo, consulte Specifications. Algumas opções podem não estar disponíveis em determinados países. Para obter mais
informações, entre em contato com o seu revendedor.
Dependendo do país em que você estiver, algumas unidades podem ser opcionais. Para
obter mais informações, entre em contato com o seu revendedor.
3
1. Manuais fornecidos com este equipamento • Você pode baixar informações sobre a certificação do equipamento, que se baseia em
um sistema de certificação de segurança de TI (deste ponto em diante, Certificação
CC), na URL a seguir:
Manuais deste equipamento 2600.2™-2009)
Para administrador: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/
en/download_admin.html
As instruções de operação deste equipamento são fornecidas nos seguintes formatos:
Para usuário: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/
Formato Manuais en/download_user.html
Manual impresso • Informações de segurança Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices 1.0, 10 de setembro de 2015
Para administrador: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
CD-ROM • Guia de instalação do driver
im_c300_c400_c400SR/en/download_admin.html
Manuais exibidos no painel de controle • Guia do usuário (versão completa) (HTML) Para usuário: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400_c400SR/
en/download_user.html
Páginas da Web • Informações de segurança
• Guia do usuário (versão selecionada) (PDF) Estas informações referem-se a como configurar o equipamento. Se você adquiriu um
• Guia do usuário (versão completa) (HTML) equipamento com certificado CC, leia as informações do certificado antes de operar o
• Guia de instalação do driver equipamento para fazer as definições corretas.
Informações de segurança
Antes de usar este equipamento, certifique-se de ler a seção Informações de segurança
neste manual. Ela também descreve cada regulamentação e conformidade ambiental.
Guia do usuário (versão selecionada)
Em relação à utilização básica deste equipamento, às funções usadas com frequência,
à solução de problemas quando uma mensagem de erro é exibida, etc., são fornecidos
resumos de cada manual do usuário.
Guia do usuário (versão completa)
Descreve as configurações para utilização do equipamento, como usar as funções
de cópia, fax, impressão, digitalização ou para procedimentos de manutenção,
especificações, soluções de problemas, definições do sistema e funções de segurança.
Os manuais estão disponíveis em inglês, alemão, francês, italiano, espanhol, holandês
e russo.
O Guia do usuário para outros idiomas além daqueles mostrados acima contém as
informações no Guia do usuário (versão selecionada) e Segurança.
Guia de instalação do driver
Descreve como instalar e configurar cada driver. Este manual está incluído no CD de drivers.
• Antes de configurar as definições de segurança estendida e autenticação, consulte

Segurança.
• Usar a função de segurança do equipamento evita o uso não autorizado do equipamento,
adulteração de dados ou vazamento de informações. Para uma segurança aprimorada,
recomendamos primeiro realizar as seguintes definições:
• Instale o certificado de dispositivo.
• Habilitar a criptografia SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
• Alterar o nome do usuário e a senha do administrador.
4
2. Informações de segurança relativas a este Significados das etiquetas de segurança
equipamento
AVISO
Significados dos símbolos de segurança
Indica situação potencialmente perigosa que poderá resultar em morte ou ferimentos graves
usados neste equipamento se as instruções não forem seguidas.
Cuidado CUIDADO
Indica uma situação potencialmente perigosa que poderá resultar em ferimentos menores
ou moderados ou danos materiais se as instruções não forem seguidas.
Mantenha longe do alcance de crianças
Português (Brasil)
Não toque
Não jogue no fogo
Não use aspirador de pó
Aviso; Feixe de laser
Cuidado, superfície quente
Cuidado, bordas afiadas
5
Precauções de segurança a serem seguidas Requisitos para usar cabos de alimentação e tomadas
Requisitos para desembalar produtos

AVISO
• Evite as seguintes ações para que não ocorra incêndio ou choque elétrico:
AVISO • Usar uma tensão ou frequência diferente daquela indicada nas
especificações
• As seguintes explicações se referem às mensagens de aviso na embalagem • Usar adaptadores para várias tomadas
plástica deste produto: • Usar extensões elétricas
• Não deixe materiais feitos de polietileno (bolsas, etc.) fornecidos com • Tocar os pinos do conector do cabo de alimentação com um objeto
este equipamento próximos de bebês e crianças pequenas. Poderá metálico
ocorrer sufocamento se materiais de polietileno entrarem em contato
com a boca ou nariz. • Evite as seguintes ações nos cabos de alimentação para que não ocorra
incêndio ou choque elétrico:
• Danificá-los
Requisitos para alocar e instalar equipamentos • Enrolá-los
• Modificá-los
• Colocar objetos pesados sobre eles
• Puxá-los com força
AVISO • Dobrá-los com força
• Não manuseie o conector do cabo de alimentação com as mãos molhadas.

• Evite as ações a seguir nas proximidades ou dentro deste equipamento para
Isso pode causar choque elétrico.
evitar incêndio ou choque elétrico:
• Usar sprays inflamáveis, solventes e/ou produtos semelhantes • O(s) cabo(s) de alimentação fornecido(s) destina(m)-se exclusivamente ao
• Colocar sobre o equipamento sprays inflamáveis, solventes e/ou uso com este equipamento. Não é possível usá-lo(s) em outros aparelhos
produtos semelhantes além deste equipamento. Além disso, não use cabos de alimentação
• Colocar sobre o equipamento pequenos objetos metálicos ou diferentes daqueles fornecidos com este equipamento. Caso contrário,
recipientes contendo líquidos poderá ocorrer incêndio ou choque eléctrico.
• Para evitar incêndio ou choque elétrico, retire o conector e o cabo de

alimentação da tomada na parede pelo menos uma vez por ano e inspecione-
CUIDADO os. Se alguma das condições abaixo estiver ocorrendo, não use o conector
e o cabo de alimentação continuamente e consulte seu revendedor ou
• Não deixe o equipamento em um ambiente úmido ou empoeirado. Caso representante de serviços técnicos.
contrário, poderá ocorrer incêndio ou choque eléctrico. • A tomada apresenta sinais de que está queimada
• Os pinos da tomada estão deformados
• Não coloque o equipamento em uma superfície instável ou inclinada. Caso
• Os fios internos do cabo de alimentação estão expostos ou partidos
contrário, o equipamento poderá cair e causar lesões.
• O revestimento do cabo de alimentação está rachado, amassado ou
• Não obstrua as aberturas do equipamento. Caso contrário, poderá ocorrer danificado
incêndio, uma vez que os componentes internos superaquecem. • Quando o cabo de alimentação é dobrado, o equipamento desliga e liga
• Parte do cabo de alimentação esquenta
• Não coloque objetos pesados em cima do equipamento. Caso contrário, o
equipamento poderá cair e causar lesões.
• Se você usar este equipamento de modo contínuo em um ambiente estreito

ou com pouca ventilação por períodos prolongados ou imprimir grandes
volumes de materiais, certifique-se de ventilar o ambiente adequadamente.
6
CUIDADO Requisitos durante emergências
• Ao desconectar o cabo de alimentação da tomada na parede, puxe sempre
pela tomada, e não pelo cabo. Não aplique força ao puxar o cabo de
alimentação. Caso contrário, o cabo de alimentação poderá ser danificado,
resultando, possivelmente, em fogo ou choque elétrico.
AVISO
• Certifique-se de inserir totalmente a tomada do cabo de alimentação na • Não toque neste equipamento se estiverem ocorrendo relâmpagos nas
proximidades. Caso contrário, pode ocorrer choque elétrico.
tomada da parede. Além disso, não force o conector para inseri-lo em uma
tomada de parede solta e instável; isso poderá causar mau contato. Isso • Certifique-se de instalar o equipamento o mais próximo possível de uma
resulta em aquecimento. tomada na parede para facilitar a desconexão do cabo de alimentação em
caso de emergência.
• Sempre conecte o terminal de aterramento do equipamento ao terminal de
aterramento em uma tomada. • Se o equipamento apresentar comportamento anormal, conforme descrito
a seguir, desligue a alimentação imediatamente. Depois de desligar a
• Não se esqueça de desconectar a tomada do cabo retirando-a da tomada alimentação, desconecte o conector do cabo de alimentação da tomada na
na parede e de limpar os pinos e a área ao redor dos pinos pelo menos parede e entre em contato com seu representante de serviços técnicos e
uma vez por ano. O acúmulo de sujeira na tomada constitui risco de relate o problema. O uso contínuo do cabo de alimentação pode resultar em
incêndio. fogo ou choque elétrico.
Português (Brasil)
• O equipamento está emitindo fumaça
• Se for necessário deixar o equipamento ocioso por um longo período, por • O equipamento está emitindo odores
exemplo, durante férias, desconecte a tomada do cabo de força da tomada • Objetos de metal ou outros objetos estranhos caíram dentro do
na parede para fins de segurança. equipamento
• Água ou outros líquidos caíram dentro do equipamento
• Ao fazer manutenção no equipamento, desconecte o cabo de alimentação
da tomada na parede para fins de segurança. • Se o equipamento cair ou uma tampa ou outra parte estiver danificada,
desligue a energia imediatamente. Depois de desconectar o conector do
• Fonte de alimentação cabo de alimentação da tomada na parede, entre em contato com o seu
representante de serviços técnicos. Usar o equipamento continuamente
• IM C300F
pode resultar em fogo ou choque elétrico.
120–127 V, 10 A ou mais, 60 Hz
• IM C400F/C400SRF
120-127 V, 12 A ou mais, 60 Hz Requisitos para mudar equipamentos de lugar
Certifique-se de conectar o cabo de alimentação a uma fonte de
alimentação, conforme indicado acima.
CUIDADO
• Ao mover o equipamento, não segure-o pelo painel de controle. Isso pode danificar
o painel de controle e resultar em mau funcionamento ou causar ferimentos.
• Ao mover o equipamento com a unidade de bandeja de papel opcional

ainda conectada, não force a parte superior da unidade principal. Caso
contrário, a unidade principal pode desencaixar da bandeja de papel
opcional, podendo causar ferimentos.
• Se o equipamento precisar ser carregado ou movido para outro andar,

entre em contato com seu representante de serviços técnicos. A queda do
equipamento pode resultar em ferimentos ou mau funcionamento.
• Depois de deslocar o equipamento, use a trava dos rodízios para fixá-lo. Caso
contrário, o equipamento poderá se mover ou tombar, causando ferimentos.
7
CUIDADO Requisitos para manusear a parte interna do equipamento
• Ao mover o equipamento, certifique-se de desconectar o cabo de
alimentação da tomada na parede e certifique-se de que outros frio e
cabos de conexão tenham sido removidos. Caso contrário, o cabo de AVISO
alimentação ficará danificado, resultando possivelmente em fogo ou
choque elétrico. • Não retire tampas ou parafusos diferentes daqueles explicitamente
especificados neste manual. Existem componentes de alta tensão no interior do
equipamento que podem causar choque elétrico. Além disso, há componentes
Requisitos para usar o equipamento a laser dentro do equipamento que podem causar cegueira. Entre em contato
com seu representante comercial ou técnico se algum dos componentes
internos do equipamento precisar de manutenção, ajuste ou reparo.
• Não desmonte nem modifique este equipamento. Caso contrário, poderá
CUIDADO ocorrer incêndio e choque eléctrico. Além disso, a exposição aos componentes
do laser no interior deste equipamento pode causar cegueira.
• Não olhe diretamente para a fonte de luz. Isso poderá causar ferimentos
aos seus olhos.
• Se a unidade de alimentação de papel estiver instalada, não retire mais de CUIDADO

uma bandeja por vez. Pressionar a superfície superior do equipamento com
força excessiva poderá resultar em seu tombamento e causar lesões. • Existem partes com temperaturas muito altas dentro do equipamento.
Ao remover papel atolado, não toque em áreas diferentes daquelas
• Não use folhas de papel grampeadas, folha de alumínio, papel carbono ou especificadas neste manual. Tocar nessas áreas pode causar
outro tipo de papel condutor. Caso contrário, há risco de incêndio. queimaduras.
• Mantenha cartões SD e dispositivos USB de memória flash fora do alcance • Existem partes no interior do equipamento que podem quebrar ao serem
de crianças. Se uma criança engolir acidentalmente um cartão SD ou um tocadas. Ao remover papel atolado, não toque nos conectores, sensores
dispositivo USB de memória flash, procure um médico imediatamente. e LEDs especificados na seção "Solução de problemas". Tocar nessas
partes poderá resultar em mau funcionamento.
• Ao abaixar o ADF, não coloque as mãos nas dobradiças nem no vidro
de exposição. Suas mãos ou dedos poderão ficar presos, resultando em • Embora o equipamento seja projetado de modo que um dispositivo de
ferimentos. segurança proteja os usuários contra ferimentos, tome cuidado para não
tocar nos rolos durante o funcionamento. Os rolos podem ser pressionados
uns contra os outros antes de pararem completamente.
• Entre em contato com seu representante de serviços técnicos para fazer

a limpeza do interior do equipamento. Se o pó acumulado no interior do
equipamento não for limpo regularmente, há risco de incêndio e mau
funcionamento.
• Ao substituir papel ou remover papel atolado, cuidado para não prender os

dedos nem feri-los.
• A unidade de fusão pode ficar quente. Quando remover a unidade de

fusão, aguarde 20 segundos ou mais após abrir a tampa e confirme se
a unidade de fusão não está mais quente do que a temperatura do local.
Caso contrário, você se queimará.
8
Requisitos para manusear suprimentos CUIDADO
• Se o toner (novo ou usado) entrar em contato com a pele ou roupas e
manchá-las, sigas estas instruções:
AVISO • Se o toner entrar em contato com sua pele, lave a área afetada com
muita água e sabão.
• Não armazene toner (novo ou usado) ou recipientes contendo toner em locais • Se o toner entrar em contato com suas roupas, lave a área manchada
com chama aberta. O toner poderá inflamar e resultar em queimaduras ou com água fria. Aquecer a área manchada com água quente fará com
incêndio. que o toner penetre no tecido, tornando impossível a remoção da
mancha.
• Não descarte os itens abaixo em fogo. O toner inflamará em contato com
chama aberta, causando risco de queimaduras. • Ao trocar um recipiente contendo toner (mesmo toner usado) ou itens
• Toner (novo ou usado) de consumo com toner, tenha cuidado para que o toner não esparrame.
• Recipientes de toner ainda contendo toner Depois de remover itens de consumo usados e fechar a tampa do
• Partes em contato com toner recipiente (se aplicável), coloque-os em uma sacola.
• Não use aspirador de pó em toner derramado (incluindo toner usado). O

toner aspirado pode inflamar ou causar explosão devido às faíscas que
podem ocorrer dentro do aspirador de pó. No entanto, você pode usar
Português (Brasil)
um aspirador de pó industrial específico para toner. Quando houver toner
derramado, remova-o usando um pano úmido, para não espalhá-lo.
CUIDADO
• Ao abrir recipientes de toner contendo toner, não force, amasse ou aperte
o recipiente. Derramamentos de toner podem causar ingestão acidental ou
sujar roupas, mãos e o piso.
• Não deixe os itens a seguir em um local onde crianças possam alcançá-los:

• Toner (novo ou usado)
• Recipientes de toner ainda contendo toner
• Partes em contato com toner
• Ao remover papel atolado, reabastecer ou trocar o toner (novo ou usado),

não inale toner.
• Se ocorrerem as seguintes situações ao manipular toner, primeiro receba as

medidas de emergência e, em seguida, procure um médico, se necessário.
• Se você inalar toner, faça gargarejo com uma grande quantidade de
água e dirija-se a um local com ar fresco.
• Se você ingerir toner, dilua os conteúdo gástrico com uma grande
quantidade de água.
• Em caso de contato de toner com os olhos, lave-os com uma grande
quantidade de água.
• Ao remover papel atolado, reabastecer ou trocar toner (novo ou usado), evite

o contato do pó de toner com a pele ou roupas.
9
Etiquetas de segurança neste equipamento IM C400SRF
Posições das etiquetas de AVISO e CUIDADO

A unidade fica muito quente.
Aguarde 20 segundos ou mais para
Este equipamento tem etiquetas de AVISO e CUIDADO nas posições indicadas abaixo.
permitir que a parte quente esfrie.
Por questões de segurança, siga as instruções e manuseie o equipamento conforme indicado.
IM C300F/C400F
A unidade fica muito quente. Aguarde

20 segundos ou mais para permitir
que a parte quente esfrie.
Há bordas afiadas dentro do equipamento. Ao

remover o papel com falha na alimentação, não toque
as peças indicadas por esta etiqueta. Fazer isso
poderá resultar em lesão.
D0C9IA0002
Há bordas afiadas dentro Não incinere toner derramado ou usado. O pó de toner é inflamável
Há bordas afiadas dentro do
do equipamento, que estão e pode pegar fogo se exposto a chamas.
equipamento. Ao remover o papel próximas desta etiqueta. Não utilize aspirador de pó para remover o toner derramado. O toner
com falha na alimentação, não toque Mantenha suas mãos afastadas absorvido pode causar incêndio ou explosão devido ao contato
as peças indicadas por esta etiqueta. do finalizador ao remover o elétrico que ocorre no interior do aspirador de pó.
Fazer isso poderá resultar em lesão. cartucho de grampeamento. Mantenha o toner (usado ou não) e os recipientes do toner fora do
D0C9IA0001 Caso contrário, você poderá alcance de crianças.
Não incinere toner derramado ou usado. O pó de toner é inflamável e pode pegar fogo se prender os dedos.
exposto a chamas.
Não utilize aspirador de pó para remover o toner derramado. O toner absorvido pode causar
incêndio ou explosão devido ao contato elétrico que ocorre no interior do aspirador de pó.
Mantenha o toner (usado ou não) e os recipientes do toner fora do alcance de crianças.
Símbolos de aterramento, isolamento e do botão de alimentação
Os símbolos de aterramento, isolamento e do botão liga/desliga são usados neste
equipamento da seguinte maneira:
: LIGADO
: EM ESPERA
10
3. Outras informações relativas a este equipamento Requisitos legais
Leis e regulamentações Segurança relacionada a laser
Para IM C300F
Cópia e impressão proibidas
Regulamentações do CDRH (Center for Devices and Radiological Health, Centro
Não copie nem imprima nenhum item para o qual a reprodução seja proibida por lei.
para Dispositivos e Saúde Radiológica)
A cópia ou impressão dos seguintes itens é geralmente proibida pelas leis locais:
cédulas bancárias, selos fiscais, títulos, ações, cheques bancários, passaportes e carteiras Este equipamento está em conformidade com os requisitos do 21 CFR, Subcapítulo J,
de motorista. para produtos a laser da classe I. Este equipamento contém quatro diodos laser InGaAIP,
A lista acima serve apenas como orientação, pois não é completa. Não assumimos comprimento de onda entre 655 e 666 nanômetros. O ângulo de divergência do feixe é de
responsabilidade por sua totalidade e precisão de informações. Se você tiver dúvidas sobre 21 graus (no mínimo) e 29 graus (no máximo) no sentido vertical e 7 graus (no mínimo) e 11
a legalidade de cópias ou impressões de determinados itens, consulte seu advogado. graus (no máximo) no sentido horizontal, e os feixes de laser são gerados em onda contínua
(Continuous Wave ou CW). A potência máxima de saída da fonte de luz é de 10 miliwatts.
Cuidado
Português (Brasil)
O uso de controles, ajustes ou procedimentos diferentes daqueles especificados neste
manual pode resultar em exposição perigosa à radiação.
Para IM C400F/C400SRF
Regulamentações do CDRH (Center for Devices and Radiological Health, Centro

para Dispositivos e Saúde Radiológica)
Este equipamento está em conformidade com os requisitos do 21 CFR, Subcapítulo J,
para produtos a laser da classe I. Este equipamento contém quatro diodos laser AlGaInP,
comprimento de onda entre 650 e 666 nanômetros para cada emissor. O ângulo de
divergência do feixe é de 15 graus (no mínimo) e 25 graus (no máximo) no sentido vertical e
7 graus (no mínimo) e 13 graus (no máximo) no sentido horizontal, e os feixes de laser são
gerados em onda contínua (Continuous Wave ou CW). A potência máxima de saída da fonte
de luz é de 15 miliwatts.
Cuidado
O uso de controles, ajustes ou procedimentos diferentes daqueles especificados neste
manual pode resultar em exposição perigosa à radiação.
11
• IM C400F
Notas aos usuários nos EUA sobre os requisitos da FCC • IM C400SRF
Instalar o núcleo de ferrite

Um cabo de interface Ethernet conectado à porta do servidor de dispositivos opcional e
Parte 15 das normas FCC um cabo de linha de telefone com núcleo de ferrite devem ser usados para supressão de
interferência de RF.
Nota:
Este equipamento foi testado e considerado em conformidade com os limites para um Parte 68 das Regras da FCC para unidade de fax
dispositivo digital Classe B, nos termos da Parte 15 das normas da FCC. Esses limites
são formulados para fornecer proteção razoável contra interferência em uma instalação 1. Este equipamento está em conformidade com a Parte 68 das Regras da FCC. Há uma
residencial. Este equipamento gera, usa e pode irradiar energia de radiofrequência e, etiqueta na tampa deste equipamento que contém, entre outras informações, o número de
se não for instalado e usado de acordo com as instruções, poderá causar interferência registro da FCC e o número de equivalência de toque (REN, ringer equivalence number)
prejudicial a comunicações de rádio. No entanto, não há garantia de que tal interferência deste equipamento. Caso sejam solicitadas, estas informações devem ser fornecidas à
não ocorrerá em uma instalação em particular. Se este equipamento provocar empresa de telefonia.
interferência prejudicial à recepção de rádio ou televisão, o que pode ser determinado 2. E ste equipamento usa uma entrada RJ11C USOC.
desligando o equipamento e religando-o, recomendamos que o usuário tente corrigir a 3. A tomada e o conector usados para ligar este equipamento aos cabos e à rede telefônica
interferência através de uma ou mais das seguintes medidas: das instalações devem estar em conformidade com as normas aplicáveis da Parte 68
• Reoriente ou reposicione a antena receptora. da FCC e com os requisitos adotados pelo ACTA. Um cabo telefônico e uma tomada
• Aumente a distância entre o equipamento e o receptor. modular compatíveis são fornecidos com este produto. Ambos foram projetados para
• Conecte o equipamento a uma tomada em um circuito diferente daquele ao qual o receptor serem ligados a um conector modular também compatível. Consulte as instruções de
está conectado. instalação para obter informações.
• Consulte seu representante ou um técnico especializado em rádio/TV para obter ajuda. 4. O REN é utilizado para determinar o número de equipamentos que podem ser conectados
a uma linha telefônica. RENs excessivos em uma linha telefônica podem fazer com que os
Cuidado:
equipamentos não toquem ao receberem uma chamada. Na maior parte das áreas, a soma
Alterações ou modificações não aprovadas expressamente pela parte responsável pela dos RENs não deve exceder cinco (5,0). Para ter a certeza do número de equipamentos
conformidade podem anular a autoridade do usuário em operar o equipamento. que podem ser conectados a uma linha, conforme determinado pelo total de RENs, entre
Esse transmissor não deve ser colocado nem operado junto de outra antena ou em contato com a empresa telefônica local.
transmissor. 5. Se este equipamento provocar danos à rede telefônica, a empresa de telefonia irá notificá-
Este equipamento está em conformidade com os limites de exposição à radiação lo previamente de que talvez seja necessário interromper temporariamente o serviço. No
estabelecidos pela FCC para um ambiente não controlado e atende às Diretrizes de entanto, se a notificação prévia não for viável, a empresa de telefonia notificará o cliente
exposição à radiofrequência. Este equipamento apresenta níveis muito baixos de assim que possível Além disso, você será informado do seu direito de apresentar queixa
energia de radiofrequência, considerado em conformidade sem a avaliação de exposição à FCC caso considere necessário.
6. A empresa telefônica pode fazer alterações em suas instalações, equipamentos,
máxima permitida (MPE). No entanto, recomenda-se que o equipamento seja instalado e
operações ou procedimentos, que poderão afetar o funcionamento do equipamento. Se
operado a uma distância da fonte irradiadora de pelo menos 20 cm ou mais em relação
isso acontecer, a empresa de telefonia fornecerá uma notificação prévia para que você
ao corpo da pessoa (com exceção de extremidades: mãos, punhos, pés e tornozelos). faça as modificações necessárias e o serviço não seja interrompido.
Declaração de Conformidade do Fornecedor 7. Se este equipamento apresentar problemas, entre em contato com o Departamento de
Este dispositivo está em conformidade com a Parte 15 das normas da FCC. Suporte ao Cliente da Ricoh USA, Inc. em 1-888-456-6457 para obter informações sobre
reparo ou garantia. Se este equipamento provocar problemas na sua linha telefônica, a
A operação está sujeita às duas condições a seguir:
empresa telefônica poderá solicitar que você o desligue até o problema ser resolvido.
(1) Este equipamento não pode provocar interferência prejudicial e
8. Na eventualidade de ocorrerem problemas operacionais (atolamento de documentos,
(2)
Este equipamento deve aceitar qualquer interferência recebida, incluindo atolamento de cópias, indicação de erro de comunicação), consulte o manual fornecido
interferência que possa provocar funcionamento não desejado. com este equipamento para obter instruções sobre como solucionar o problema.
Parte responsável: Ricoh USA, Inc. 9. A conexão com o serviço telefônico de terceiros está sujeita a tarifas. Para obter mais
Endereço: 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341 informações, entre em contato com as entidades competentes.
Telefone: 610-296-8000 10. Se houver em sua casa dispositivos de alarme conectados à linha telefônica, certifique-
Nome do produto: Periférico multifuncional se de que a instalação deste equipamento não desative o dispositivo de alarme. Se você
Número do modelo: tiver dúvidas sobre o que pode desativar dispositivos de alarme, consulte a sua empresa
• IM C300F de telefonia ou um técnico qualificado.
12
AO PROGRAMAR NÚMEROS DE EMERGÊNCIA E/OU FAZER CHAMADAS DE TESTE • Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de
PARA NÚMEROS DE EMERGÊNCIA: la fuite.
1. Permaneça na linha e explique resumidamente ao operador a razão da chamada antes Conserver ces instructions.
de desligar.
2. Siga esses procedimentos fora do horário de pico, como no início da manhã ou no fim da
noite.
Observações para usuários canadenses de dispositivos sem fio
A lei de proteção ao consumidor de telefonia de 1991 torna ilegal para qualquer pessoa
utilizar um computador ou outro dispositivo eletrônico, incluindo aparelhos de fax, para Este equipamento está em conformidade com os padrões RSS isentos de licença da
enviar qualquer mensagem, a menos que claramente contenha em uma margem na parte indústria do Canadá.
superior ou inferior de cada página transmitida ou na primeira página da transmissão a data (1) Este equipamento não pode causar interferência e
e hora do envio e uma identificação da empresa ou da outra entidade ou do outro indivíduo (2) Este dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferência, incluindo interferência que possa
que está fazendo o envio e o número de telefone do equipamento ou da empresa ou da outra causar operação não desejada do dispositivo.
entidade ou do indivíduo que está fazendo o envio. (O número de telefone fornecido não
Este equipamento está em conformidade com os limites de exposição à radiação
pode ser um número de emergência ou um número para o qual as tarifas excedam ao valor
estabelecidos pela IC para um ambiente não controlado e atende ao RSS-102 das normas
das tarifas de transmissão local ou de longa distância.)
Para programar essas informações em seu aparelho de fax, você deverá realizar as seguintes de exposição à radiofrequência (RF)estabelecidas pela IC. Este equipamento deve ser
etapas: siga o procedimento de programação de CABEÇALHO DE FAX no capítulo sobre instalado e operado mantendo-se uma distância mínima de 20 cm entre o radiador e o
corpo do usuário (exceto extremidades: mãos, punhos, pés e tornozelos).
Português (Brasil)
programação nas instruções operacionais para inserir a identificação da empresa e o
número de telefone do terminal ou da empresa. Essas informações são transmitidas com
o documento pelo recurso CABEÇALHO DE FAX. Além das informações, certifique-se de Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
programar a data e hora no equipamento.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence.
Informações de segurança importantes relativas à (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
unidade de fax (2) l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Ao usar seu equipamento telefônico, precauções básicas de segurança devem ser sempre Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
seguidas para reduzir o risco de incêndio, choque elétrico e ferimentos pessoais, incluindo: pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
• Não use este produto perto de água, por exemplo, banheira, pia, bancada de cozinha, radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
tanque de roupa, porão úmido ou piscina. une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
• Evite usar o telefone durante chuvas com relâmpagos. Há um risco remoto de choque
elétrico causado pelos raios.
• Não utilize o telefone perto de um local onde haja vazamento de gás para relatar esse
vazamento.
Guarde essas instruções.

13
Notas para usuários canadenses da unidade de fax Marcas comerciais
Este produto atende às especificações técnicas aplicáveis de inovação, ciência e SD é marca comercial da SD-3C, LLC.
desenvolvimento econômico do Canadá.
O número de equivalência de toque (REN) indica o número máximo de equipamentos que Os outros nomes de produtos aqui mencionados têm exclusivamente fins de identificação e
podem ser conectados a uma interface telefônica. A terminação de uma interface pode podem ser marcas comerciais de suas respectivas empresas. Isentamo-nos de quaisquer
consistir em qualquer combinação de dispositivos, sujeita apenas ao requisito de que a direitos sobre essas marcas.
soma dos RENs de todos os equipamentos não exceda a cinco.
Remarques à l’attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l’unité Fax

Reciclagem de baterias (para usuários nos EUA e no Canadá)
Baterias íon-lítio são recicláveis.

Você pode ajudar a preservar o ambiente ao devolver suas baterias recarregáveis usadas ao local
de coleta e reciclagem mais próximo.
Para obter mais informações sobre reciclagem de baterias recarregáveis, ligue gratuitamente para
1-800-822-8837 ou acesse http://www.call2recycle.org/
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver l'environnement en rapportant vos batteries usagées dans le
point de collecte et de recyclage le plus proche.
Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage des batteries, appelez le numéro gratuit 1-800-822-8837
(États-Unis et Canada uniquement) ou rendez-vous sur http://www.call2recycle.org/
14
15
Português (Brasil)
16
Français
Consignes de sécurité 1. Manuels fournis avec cet appareil
2. Informations de sécurité de cet appareil
3. Autres informations sur cet appareil
Pour les informations qui ne figurent pas

dans ce manuel, veuillez consulter les
manuels disponibles en ligne sur notre site
Internet (https://www.ricoh.com/) ou sur le
panneau de commande.
Veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel avant d'utiliser l'appareil et

conservez-le à portée de main pour référence ultérieure. Pour une
utilisation correcte et en toute sécurité, veillez à bien lire les
"Consignes de sécurité" avant d'utiliser l'appareil.
SOMMAIRE
Comment lire les manuels........................................................................................................ 3
1. Manuels fournis avec cet appareil

Manuels pour cet appareil........................................................................................................ 4
2. Informations de sécurité de cet appareil

Les définitions des symboles de sécurité utilisés avec cet appareil........................................ 5
Les définitions des étiquettes de sécurité................................................................................ 5
Consignes de sécurité à observer............................................................................................ 6
Étiquettes de sécurité de cet appareil.................................................................................... 10
3. Autres informations sur cet appareil

Lois et réglementations........................................................................................................... 11
Obligations légales................................................................................................................. 11
Marques commerciales.......................................................................................................... 14
2
Comment lire les manuels Avis de non-responsabilité
Dans le cadre prévu par la loi, en aucun cas le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout
Symboles utilisés dans les manuels dommage pouvant découler de pannes de cet appareil, de pertes de données enregistrées,
ou de l'utilisation ou de la non utilisation de ce produit et des manuels utilisateurs fournis
Le présent manuel utilise les symboles suivants :
avec celui-ci.
Assurez-vous d'avoir une copie ou une sauvegarde des données enregistrées sur l'appareil.
Il est possible que des documents ou des données soient effacés en raison d'erreurs
d'utilisation ou de dysfonctionnements de l'appareil.
Indique les points à observer lors de l'utilisation des fonctions. Ce symbole indique des points
En aucun cas le fabricant ne pourrait être tenu responsable des documents que vous aurez
qui pourraient rendre le produit ou le service inutilisable ou entraîner une perte de données si
créés à l'aide de cet appareil ou des résultats des données exécutées par vos soins.
les instructions ne sont pas suivies. Veillez à lire attentivement ces explications.
Remarques
Fournit des explications supplémentaires sur les fonctions de l'appareil et les instructions
Le contenu de ce manuel peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis.
pour éliminer les erreurs commises par l'utilisateur.
Le fabricant ne peut être tenu pour responsable des dommages ou frais résultant de
l'utilisation de pièces autres que les pièces du fabricant pour vos appareils bureautiques.
[]
Pour des documents de bonne qualité, le fournisseur recommande l'utilisation de son toner.
Indique les noms des touches ou des boutons sur l'appareil ou l'écran.
Certaines illustrations de ce manuel peuvent présenter de légères différences avec votre
appareil.
Français
(Principalement l'Europe et l'Asie), (Principalement l'Europe), ou (Principalement l'Asie)
Les couleurs des touches de couleur ou du cercle de couleur peuvent être légèrement
(principalement l'Amérique du Nord)
différentes des couleurs des copies.
Les fonctions qui diffèrent entre les modèles de la région A et de la région B sont indiquées
Les échantillons de couleurs de ce manuel peuvent être légèrement différentes des couleurs
par deux symboles. Lisez les informations indiquées par le symbole correspondant à la
des copies.
région du modèle utilisé. Pour plus d'informations sur la correspondance des symboles avec
Certaines options peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays. Pour plus de détails,
le modèle que vous utilisez, reportez-vous à Caractéristiques.
veuillez contacter votre distributeur local.
En fonction de votre pays, certaines unités peuvent être en option. Pour plus de détails,
veuillez contacter votre distributeur local.
3
1. Manuels fournis avec cet appareil • Vous pouvez télécharger des informations relatives à la certification de l'appareil,
évaluée dans le cadre d'un système de certification de sécurité informatique (la
certification Critères Communs) à partir de l'URL suivante :
Manuels pour cet appareil 2600.2™-2009).
Pour l'administrateur : https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/
Les manuels utilisateur de cet appareil se déclinent selon les formats ci-après : en/download_admin.html
Format Manuels Pour l'utilisateur : https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/im_c300_c400/en/
download_user.html
Manuel papier • Consignes de sécurité
Profil de protection pour les appareils de copie papier 1.0 datant du 10
CD-ROM • Manuel d'installation du pilote septembre 2015
Manuels affichés sur le panneau de • Guide utilisateur (version intégrale) (HTML) Pour l'administrateur : https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
commande im_c300_c400_c400SR/en/download_admin.html
Pour l'utilisateur : https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
Pages Web • Consignes de sécurité
im_c300_c400_c400SR/en/download_user.html
• Guide utilisateur (version condensée) (PDF)
• Guide utilisateur (version intégrale) (HTML) Ces informations expliquent comment installer l'appareil. Si vous avez fait l'acquisition
• Manuel d'installation du pilote d'un appareil certifié Critères Communs, assurez-vous de consulter ces informations
Consignes de sécurité avant d'utiliser l'appareil de manière à définir les paramètres adaptés au préalable.
Avant d'utiliser cet appareil, veillez à lire la section de ce manuel intitulée Consignes
de sécurité. Elle décrit également chaque réglementation et conformité liée à
l'environnement.
Guide utilisateur (version condensée)
Pour chaque guide utilisateur, des résumés concernant le fonctionnement de base
de l'appareil, la foire aux questions, la procédure de dépannage à effectuer lorsqu'un
message d'erreur apparaît, etc., sont fournis.
Guide utilisateur (version intégrale)
Décrit la configuration pour utiliser l'appareil, comment utiliser les fonctions pour copier,
télécopier, imprimer, numériser ou la maintenance, ainsi que les spécifications, la
résolution des problèmes, les paramètres système et les fonctions de sécurité.
Les manuels sont disponibles en anglais, allemand, français, italien, espagnol,
néerlandais et russe.
Pour les autres langues que celles mentionnées ci-dessus, les informations se trouvent
dans les manuels Guide utilisateur (version condensée) et Sécurité.
Manuel d'installation du pilote
Explique comment installer et configurer chaque pilote. Ce manuel est inclus sur le CD des pilotes.
• Avant de configurer les paramètres d'authentification et de sécurité avancés, reportez-

vous à Sécurité.
• La fonction de sécurité de l'appareil empêche les utilisations non autorisées de la
machine, la falsification de données ou la fuite d'informations. Pour une sécurité
optimale, nous vous recommandons de définir tout d'abord les paramètres suivants :
• Installez le certificat de périphérique.
• Activez le cryptage SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
• Modifiez le nom utilisateur et le mot de passe de l'administrateur.
4
2. Informations de sécurité de cet appareil Les définitions des étiquettes de sécurité
Les définitions des symboles de sécurité

AVERTISSEMENT
utilisés avec cet appareil
Indique une situation qui peut s’avérer dangereuse et causer des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si les instructions ne sont pas respectées.
Attention
ATTENTION
À conserver hors de portée des enfants. Indique une situation qui peut s’avérer dangereuse et causer des blessures superficielles ou
des dégâts matériels si les instructions ne sont pas respectées.
Ne pas toucher
Ne pas jeter au feu
Français
Ne pas utiliser d'aspirateur
Avertissement : faisceau laser
Attention, surface chaude
Attention, bords coupants
5
Consignes de sécurité à observer Exigences pour utiliser les fiches et cordons d'alimentation
Exigences de déballage des produits

AVERTISSEMENT
• Évitez de prendre les mesures suivantes car elles pourraient entraîner un
AVERTISSEMENT incendie ou une électrocution :
• Utiliser une tension d'alimentation ou des fréquences autres que celles
• La section suivante explique les messages d'avertissement du sac des spécifications indiquées
plastique utilisé pour l'emballage du produit : • Utiliser des adaptateurs multiprise
• Ne laissez pas les éléments en polythène (sacs, etc.) fournis avec • Utiliser des rallonges électriques
l'appareil à la portée de bébés ou de jeunes enfants. Porter ces • Toucher les broches de la fiche du cordon d'alimentation avec un objet
matériaux en polyéthylène à la bouche ou au nez peut causer un métallique
étouffement.
• Évitez d'appliquer les mesures suivantes sur le cordon d'alimentation car
cela pourrait entraîner un incendie ou une électrocution :
Exigences pour localiser et installer les appareils • Les endommager
• Les emballer ensemble
• Les modifier
• Placer des objets lourds dessus
AVERTISSEMENT • Les tirer en forçant
• Les plier de force
• Évitez de prendre les mesures suivantes près de ou à l'intérieur de
• Ne manipulez pas la fiche du cordon d'alimentation avec les mains
l'appareil, car cela pourrait causer un incendie ou une électrocution :
mouillées. Cela risque de provoquer une électrocution.
• Utiliser des pulvérisateurs, des solvants ou autres produits inflammables
• Placer des pulvérisateurs, des solvants et autres produits inflammables • Le ou les cordons d'alimentations fournis sont destinés uniquement à cet
• Placer des conteneurs contenant des liquides ou de petits objets appareil. Ils ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour d'autres appareils que celui-
métalliques ci. N'utilisez pas non plus d'autres cordons d'alimentation que celui ou ceux
fournis avec cet appareil. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou une
électrocution.
ATTENTION • Pour éviter les incendies et les électrocutions, débranchez la fiche et le

cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale au moins une fois par an pour les
• Ne placez pas l'appareil dans un environnement humide et poussiéreux. inspecter. Si l'un des cas suivants se produit, n'utilisez pas la fiche et le
Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution. cordon d'alimentation en continu, et consultez votre revendeur ou le SAV.
• Il y a des marques de brûlures sur la prise
• Ne placez pas l’appareil sur une surface instable ou inclinée. L'appareil
• Les broches de la prise sont déformées
pourrait tomber ou basculer et vous risqueriez de vous blesser.
• Les fils internes du cordon d'alimentation sont à nu ou cassés
• N'obstruez pas les orifices de ventilation de l'appareil. Cela pourrait • Le revêtement du cordon d'alimentation est fissuré, entaillé ou
entraîner un incendie suite à la surchauffe des composants internes. endommagé
• Lorsque le cordon d'alimentation est courbé, l'alimentation se coupe
• Ne placez aucun objet lourd sur l'appareil. L'appareil pourrait tomber ou • Une partie du cordon d'alimentation devient chaude
basculer et vous risqueriez de vous blesser.
• Lors de l'utilisation continue de cet appareil dans une pièce étroite ou mal
ventilée pendant une longue période ou lors de l'impression d'un volume
élevé de documents, veillez à suffisamment aérer la pièce.
6
ATTENTION Exigences en cas d'urgence
• Lorsque vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale,
tirez toujours sur la fiche et non sur le câble. Ne forcez pas sur le cordon
d'alimentation en tirant. Cela pourrait endommager le cordon, entraînant
potentiellement un incendie ou une électrocution.
AVERTISSEMENT
• Vérifiez que la fiche du câble d'alimentation est entièrement enfoncée dans • Ne touchez pas cet appareil en cas de foudroiement à proximité. Cela
la prise murale Ne l'insérez pas non plus dans des prises murales lâches ou risque de provoquer une électrocution.
instables, ce qui pourrait causer un faux contact. Cela pourrait générer de la • Assurez-vous d'installer l'appareil le plus près possible d'une prise murale pour
chaleur. pouvoir débrancher le cordon d'alimentation facilement en cas d'urgence.
• Connectez toujours la borne de terre de l'appareil à la borne de terre d'une • Si l'appareil agit de façon inhabituelle, mettez-le immédiatement hors tension.
prise murale. Après avoir mis l'alimentation hors tension, veillez à débrancher la fiche du
cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis contactez votre SAV pour
• Au moins une fois par an, débranchez la prise de la prise murale et nettoyez
expliquer le problème. L'utilisation continue du cordon d'alimentation risque de
les broches ainsi que la zone qui les entoure. L’accumulation de poussière provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution.
sur la prise constitue un risque d’incendie. • L'appareil émet de la fumée
• L'appareil émet des odeurs
• Si vous n'utilisez pas l'appareil pendant une longue période comme des
• Des objets métalliques ou d'autres corps étrangers sont tombés dans
vacances, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation de la prise
l'appareil
murale pour des raisons de sécurité.
• De l'eau ou d'autres liquides ont coulé dans l'appareil
• Lors de toute opération de maintenance sur l'appareil, débranchez le
• Si l'appareil bascule ou un capot ou une autre pièce est endommagé,
cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale pour des raisons de sécurité.
Français
coupez immédiatement l'alimentation. Après avoir débranché la fiche du
• Source d'alimentation cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, contactez votre SAV. Utiliser
l'appareil en continu risque de causer un incendie ou une électrocution.
• IM C300F
120–127 V, 10 A ou plus, 60 Hz
• IM C400F/C400SRF Exigences pour déplacer les appareils
120–127 V, 12 A ou plus, 60 Hz
Veillez à raccorder le câble d’alimentation à une source d’alimentation du
type décrit ci-dessus.
ATTENTION
• Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil, ne le tenez pas par le panneau de
commande. Vous pourriez endommager le panneau de commande et
provoquer un dysfonctionnement ou vous blesser.
• Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil avec le magasin papier en option attaché,

ne forcez pas sur la partie supérieure de l'unité principale en la poussant.
Cela pourrait détacher l'unité principale de l'unité de magasin papier en
option et vous risqueriez de vous blesser.
• Lorsque vous transportez ou déplacez l'appareil en le soulevant pour le

placer à un autre étage, contactez votre SAV. Faire tomber ou basculer
l'appareil risque de causer des blessures ou un dysfonctionnement.
• Une fois que vous avez déplacé l'appareil, utilisez le système de blocage
des roulettes pour le maintenir en place. Dans le cas contraire, l'appareil est
susceptible de se déplacer ou de basculer et d'entraîner une blessure.
7
ATTENTION Exigences pour manipuler l'intérieur de l'appareil
• Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil, veillez à débrancher le cordon
d'alimentation de la prise murale et vérifiez que les cordons de ligne
téléphonique et autres câbles de connexion ont été retirés. Dans le cas AVERTISSEMENT
contraire, le cordon d'alimentation sera endommagé, ce qui peut entraîner
un incendie ou une électrocution. • Enlevez uniquement les capots ou vis explicitement indiqués dans ce
manuel. Il y a des composants haute tension dans l'appareil susceptibles
de provoquer une électrocution. Il y a également des composants laser à
Exigences pour utiliser l'appareil l'intérieur de l'appareil qui peuvent entraîner une cécité. Contactez votre
revendeur ou le SAV si l'un des composants internes de l'appareil doit faire
l'objet d'une maintenance, un réglage ou une réparation.
• Ne démontez pas et ne modifiez pas cet appareil. Cela risque de provoquer
ATTENTION un incendie et une électrocution. Une exposition aux composants laser
internes de l'appareil peut également entraîner la cécité.
• Ne regardez pas directement dans la source lumineuse. Cela pourrait
endommager vos yeux.
• Si l'unité alimentation papier est installée, ne retirez pas plus d'un magasin ATTENTION
à la fois. Une pression excessive sur les surfaces supérieures de l’appareil
peut faire basculer l'appareil et entraîner des blessures. • Il y a des pièces très chaudes à l'intérieur de l'appareil. Lorsque vous
retirez le papier mal alimenté, ne touchez pas à d'autres zones que celles
• N'utilisez pas de feuilles agrafées, d'aluminium, de papier carbone ou tout spécifiées dans ce manuel. Si vous les touchez, vous pourriez vous brûler.
autre type de papier conducteur. Cela pourrait entraîner un incendie.
• Des pièces de l'appareil peuvent se casser si vous y touchez. Lorsque vous
• Conservez les cartes SD et clés USB hors de portée des enfants. En cas retirez le papier mal alimenté, ne touchez pas aux connecteurs, capteurs et
d'ingestion accidentelle d'une carte SD ou d'une clé USB par un enfant, LED. Les toucher peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement.
consultez immédiatement un médecin.
• Bien que l'appareil soit conçu pour qu'un dispositif de sécurité protège les
• Lorsque vous abaissez l'ADF, ne placez pas vos mains sur les charnières et utilisateurs des blessures, faites attention à ne pas toucher les rouleaux
la vitre d'exposition. Vos mains ou vos doigts pourraient se coincer, ce qui pendant l'opération. Les rouleaux peuvent pincer avant de s'arrêter
entraînerait des blessures. complètement.
• Contactez votre SAV ou revendeur pour nettoyer l'intérieur de l'appareil.

Si l'intérieur de l'appareil n'est pas nettoyé régulièrement alors que la
poussière s'accumule, il y a un risque d'incendie et de dysfonctionnement.
• Lors du remplacement du papier ou du retrait du papier coincé, assurez-

vous de ne pas vous coincer les doigts et de ne pas vous blesser.
• L'unité de fusion peut devenir chaude. Lorsque vous retirez l'unité de fusion,
patientez au minimum 20 secondes après avoir ouvert le capot, et vérifiez
qu'elle n'est pas plus chaude que la température ambiante, Sans quoi vous
pourriez vous brûler.
8
Exigences pour manipuler les fournitures ATTENTION
• Si du toner (neuf ou usagé) entre en contact avec votre peau ou vos
vêtements et que vous l'étalez, prenez les mesures suivantes :
AVERTISSEMENT • En cas de contact du toner avec la peau, lavez abondamment la zone
affectée avec de l'eau et du savon.
• Ne stockez pas de toner (neuf ou usagé) ou de conteneurs de toner avec • Si du toner entre en contact avec vos vêtements, lavez la zone tâchée
du toner à l'intérieur dans un endroit avec une flamme nue. Le toner peut à l'eau froide. Chauffer la zone tachée en appliquant de l'eau chaude
s'enflammer et entraîner un incendie ou des brûlures. fixera le toner dans le tissu et retirer la tache deviendrait impossible.
• Ne vous débarrassez pas des éléments suivants en les brûlant. Le toner • Lorsque vous remplacez un conteneur avec du toner (y compris du toner
s'enflammera au contact d'une flamme nue. usagé) ou des consommables avec du toner, veillez à ce que le toner
• Toner (neuf ou usagé) n'éclabousse pas. Après avoir retiré les consommables usagés et avoir
• Conteneurs de toner avec du toner à l'intérieur fermé le couvercle du conteneur si le couvercle est disponible, placez-les
• Pièces fixées au toner dans un sac.
• N'aspirez pas du toner renversé (même usagé) avec un aspirateur. Le

toner aspiré peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion en raison des
étincelles du contact électrique à l'intérieur de l'aspirateur. Cependant, vous
pouvez utiliser un aspirateur industriel compatible avec le toner. Lorsque le
toner est renversé, nettoyez soigneusement le toner déversé à l'aide d'un
chiffon humide afin de ne pas l'éparpiller.
Français
ATTENTION
• Ne forcez pas pour ouvrir les conteneurs de toner pendant que du toner est
à l'intérieur, ne les écrasez pas et ne les pressez pas. Le déversement de
toner peut entraîner une ingestion accidentelle ou des vêtements, mains,
planchers sales.
• Ne laissez pas les éléments suivants dans un endroit où des enfants y ont
accès :
• Toner (neuf ou usagé)
• Conteneurs de toner avec du toner à l'intérieur
• Pièces fixées au toner
• Lorsque vous retirez une feuille de papier coincée, que vous

réapprovisionnez en toner ou que vous remplacez le toner (neuf ou usagé),
veillez à ne pas l'inhaler.
• Lorsque ce qui suit se produit pendant la manipulation du toner, prenez

d'abord des mesures d'urgence puis consultez un médecin si nécessaire.
• Lorsque vous inhalez du toner, gargarisez-vous avec beaucoup d'eau et
allez respirer de l'air frais.
• Lorsque vous avalez du toner, diluez le contenu gastrique avec
beaucoup d'eau.
• Lorsque vous avez du toner dans les yeux, rincez-les à grandes eaux.
• Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, que vous remplissez ou que vous
remplacez du toner (neuf ou usagé), veillez à ne pas répandre de poussière
de toner sur votre peau ou vos vêtements.
9
Étiquettes de sécurité de cet appareil IM C400SRF
Emplacements des étiquettes AVERTISSEMENT et ATTENTION

L'unité peut être brûlante. Patientez
au moins 20 secondes pour que
Cet appareil présente des étiquettes AVERTISSEMENT et PRÉCAUTION dans l'unité refroidisse.
les emplacement indiqués ci-dessous. Pour une sécurité maximale, veuillez suivre les
instructions et manipuler l'appareil comme indiqué.
IM C300/C300F/C400F
L'unité peut être brûlante. Patientez 20

secondes pour que l'unité refroidisse.
Des arêtes vives se trouvent à l'intérieur de l'appareil.

Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, ne touchez pas les
parties où figure cette étiquette afin d'éviter de vous blesser.
D0C9IA0002
Des arêtes tranchantes se Ne jetez pas dans le feu le toner renversé ou le toner usagé. La
trouvent dans l'appareil, à poussière de toner est inflammable et risque de s'enflammer en cas
proximité de cette étiquette. d'exposition à une flamme nue.
Des arêtes vives se trouvent à N'approchez pas les
N'utilisez pas d'aspirateur pour ramasser du toner. Le toner aspiré peut
mains du finisseur lorsque
l'intérieur de l'appareil. Lorsque vous provoquer un incendie ou une explosion en raison du vacillement du
vous retirez la cartouche
retirez du papier coincé, ne touchez contact électrique à l'intérieur de l'aspirateur.
d'agrafes. Dans le cas
pas les parties où figure cette contraire, vous risquez de Conservez le toner, usagé ou non, ainsi que les cartouches hors de
étiquette afin d'éviter de vous blesser. vous coincer les doigts. portée des enfants.
D0C9IA0001
Ne jetez pas dans le feu le toner renversé ou le toner usagé. La poussière de toner est
inflammable et risque de s'enflammer en cas d'exposition à une flamme nue.
Symboles de terre, d'isolation et d'interrupteur d'alimentation
N'utilisez pas d'aspirateur pour ramasser du toner. Le toner aspiré peut provoquer un
Les symboles de terre, d'isolation et d'interrupteur d'alimentation utilisés sur cet appareil sont
incendie ou une explosion en raison du vacillement du contact électrique à l'intérieur de
les suivants :
l'aspirateur.
Conservez le toner, usagé ou non, ainsi que les cartouches hors de portée des enfants. : SOUS TENSION
: VEILLE
10
3. Autres informations sur cet appareil Obligations légales
Lois et réglementations Sécurité laser
Pour IM C300F
Duplications et impressions interdites
Réglementations CDRH
Ne copiez ou n'imprimez pas des documents dont la reproduction est interdite par la loi.
Copier ou imprimer les éléments suivants est en règle générale interdit par les autorités Cet équipement est conforme aux exigences du CFR, Titre 21, Sous-chapitre J relatif aux
locales : produits laser de classe I. Cet appareil contient quatre diodes laser InGaAIP d’une longueur
billets de banques, timbres fiscaux, obligations, certificats d'actions, traites bancaires, d’onde de 655 à 666 nanomètres. L'angle de divergence du faisceau est de 21 degrés
chèques, passeports et permis de conduire. (minimum) et 29 degrés (maximum) dans la direction verticale, et de 7 degrés (minimum)
La liste précédente est donnée à titre d'exemple et n'est en aucun cas exhaustive. Nous et 11 degrés (maximum) dans la direction horizontale. Les faisceaux laser sont générés en
déclinons toute responsabilité en cas de liste incomplète ou inexacte. Si vous avez des mode Onde continue (CW). La puissance maximale de sortie de la source lumineuse est de
questions concernant le droit de copier ou d'imprimer certains éléments, consultez un 10 milliwatts.
conseiller juridique. Attention
Recourir à toute autre procédure en termes de commandes, réglages ou performances
que celles décrites dans ce manuel peut vous exposer dangereusement à des
radiations.
Français
IM C400F/C400SRF
Réglementations CDRH
Cet équipement est conforme aux exigences du CFR, Titre 21, Sous-chapitre J relatif aux
produits laser de classe I. Cet appareil contient quatre diodes laser AlGaInP, d’une longueur
d’onde de 650 à 666 nanomètres pour chaque émetteur. L'angle de divergence du faisceau
est de 15 degrés (minimum) et 25 degrés (maximum) dans la direction verticale, et de 7
degrés (minimum) et 13 degrés (maximum) dans la direction horizontale. Les faisceaux laser
sont générés en mode Onde continue (CW). La puissance maximale de la source lumineuse
est de 15 milliwatts.
Attention
Recourir à toute autre procédure en termes de commandes, réglages ou performances
que celles décrites dans ce manuel peut vous exposer dangereusement à des
radiations.
11
• IM C400F
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs aux États-Unis • IM C400SRF
concernant les exigences de la FFC Installation du câble à noyau de ferrite

Un câble d'interface Ethernet raccordé au port Option serveur de périphérique et un câble de ligne
téléphonique avec un noyau de ferrite doivent être utilisés pour la suppression des interférences RF.
Partie 15 des règles FCC
Partie 68 des règles FCC concernant l'unité Fax
Remarque :
1. Cet appareil est conforme à la section 68 de la réglementation FCC. Le capot de cet
Cet équipement a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites pour un appareil numérique
équipement est doté d'une étiquette qui comprend, entre autres informations, son numéro
de classe B, conformément aux Règles FCC, partie 15. Ces limites sont conçues
d'enregistrement FCC et son REN (numéro d'équivalence de sonnerie). Si elles sont
pour permettre une protection raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles dans le
demandées, vous devez donner ces informations à votre opérateur téléphonique.
cadre d'une installation résidentielle. Cet équipement génère, utilise et peut rayonner
2. C et appareil utilise la prise jack RJ11C USOC.
de l'énergie radiofréquence et peut engendrer des interférences nuisibles aux
3. La fiche et le connecteur jack utilisés pour connecter l'appareil au réseau de câbles et au
communications radio s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions.
réseau téléphonique des locaux doivent être conformes à la réglementation de la section
Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie d'absence totale d'interférences pour une
68 applicable de la FCC et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. Un câble téléphonique
installation en particulier. Si cet équipement cause effectivement des interférences
et une prise modulaire conformes sont fournis avec ce produit. Ils sont conçus pour être
nuisibles à la réception radio ou télévision, chose qui peut être déterminée en éteignant
connectés à un connecteur modulaire compatible, lui-même conforme. Reportez-vous aux
puis allumant l'équipement, il est conseillé à l'utilisateur de supprimer l'interférence en
instructions d'installation pour plus de détails.
prenant l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :
4. Le REN détermine le nombre d'appareils pouvant être connectés à une ligne téléphonique.
• Réorienter ou déplacer l'antenne réceptrice.
S'il y a trop de REN sur une ligne téléphonique, il est possible que les appareils ne sonnent
• Accroître la distance entre l'équipement et le récepteur.
• Raccorder l'équipement à une prise d'un circuit différent de celui du récepteur.
pas pour un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des zones (mais pas dans toutes les zones), la
• Contacter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/TV confirmé.
somme des REN ne doit pas être supérieure à cinq (5,0). Pour vous assurer du nombre de
périphériques pouvant être connectés à une ligne (déterminé par le nombre total de REN),
Attention : veuillez contacter l'opérateur téléphonique local.
Toute modification non autorisée par les autorités responsables de la conformité peut 5. Si l'équipement cause des dommages au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur téléphonique
entraîner la révocation du droit d’utilisation de ce produit. vous prévient qu'une interruption temporaire du service est requise. Mais si la notification
Cet émetteur ne doit pas être placé près de ou être utilisé avec une autre antenne ou un préalable n'est pas réalisable, l'opérateur préviendra le client dès que possible. De la
autre émetteur. même manière, vous serez informé de votre droit de déposer une plainte auprès de la
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux radiofréquences de la FCC si vous pensez que cela est nécessaire.
FCC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé et se conforme aux exigences 6. Il est possible que l'opérateur téléphonique modifie ses installations, son équipement, ses
de conformité pour l'exposition aux RF de la FCC. Cet équipement présente de très opérations ou ses procédures, ce qui pourrait affecter le fonctionnement de l’appareil. Le
faibles niveaux d'énergie RF jugés conformes sans évaluation de l'exposition permise cas échéant, l'opérateur vous préviendra à l'avance afin de vous permettre de réaliser les
maximale (MPE). Cependant, il est préférable de l'installer et de l'utiliser en maintenant modifications nécessaires à la continuité du service.
le radiateur à au moins 20 cm ou plus du corps de la personne (à l'exclusion des 7. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec cet appareil, veuillez contacter Ricoh USA, Inc.
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). Customer Support Department au 1-888-456-6457 pour obtenir des informations sur
la réparation et la garantie. Si cet appareil provoque des problèmes sur votre réseau
Déclaration de conformité du fournisseur
téléphonique, il est possible que votre opérateur vous demande de le débrancher jusqu'à
Cet appareil est conforme à la partie 15 des Règles FCC. ce que le problème soit résolu.
L'utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : 8. Dans le cas de problèmes de fonctionnement (bourrage de document, bourrage de copie,
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences nuisibles. indication d'erreur de communication), reportez-vous au manuel fourni avec l'appareil pour
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences reçues, y compris celles connaître les instructions de résolution des problèmes.
susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable. 9. La connexion à un service de ligne partagée est sujette à des tarifs d'état. Veuillez
Partie responsable : Ricoh USA, Inc. contacter la commission du service public de l'état ou la commission de la société pour
Adresse : 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341 plus d'information.
Numéro de téléphone : 610-296-8000 10. Si votre domicile comporte un dispositif d'alarme connecté à la ligne téléphonique,
Nom de produit : Périphérique multifonction assurez-vous que l'installation de cet appareil ne désactive pas cette alarme. Si vous
Numéro de modèle : avez des questions sur ce qui est susceptible de désactiver votre dispositif d'alarme,
• IM C300F veuillez consulter votre opérateur téléphonique ou un installateur qualifié.
12
LORS DE LA PROGRAMMATION DE NUMÉROS D'URGENCE ET/OU LORS DES • Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de
APPELS TESTS AUX NUMÉROS D'URGENCE : la fuite.
1. Restez en ligne et expliquez brièvement au répartiteur la raison de votre appel avant de Conserver ces instructions.
raccrocher.
2. Procédez à ces opérations pendant les heures creuses, par exemple, très tôt le matin ou
tard le soir.
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens
Le Telephone Consumer Protection Act de 1991 définit comme illégal le fait qu'une personne d'appareils sans fil
utilise un ordinateur ou tout autre appareil électronique, y compris les fax, pour envoyer un
message à moins que ce message contienne dans une marge en haut ou en bas de chaque page Le présent appareil est conforme aux normes CNR d'Industry Canada applicables aux
transmise ou sur la première page de la transmission la date et l'heure à laquelle il a été envoyé, appareils radio exempts de licence.
l'identité de l'entreprise, organisme ou personne envoyant ce message, ainsi que le numéro de (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage ; et
téléphone de l'appareil émetteur, de l'entreprise, de l'organisme ou de la personne. (Le numéro (2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences, y compris celles susceptibles de
de téléphone fourni ne peut pas être un numéro 900 ou tout autre numéro pouvant entraîner une provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable de l'appareil.
tarification supérieure à la tarification locale ou des frais de transmission longue distance). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux radiofréquences de l'IC
Pour programmer ces informations dans votre fax, vous devez exécuter les étapes suivantes : établies pour un environnement non contrôlé et se conforme aux règles d'exposition
Suivez la procédure de programmation de l'en-tête de fax dans le chapitre Programmation du aux radiofréquences (RF) RSS-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
manuel utilisateur afin de saisir l'identifiant de l'entreprise et le numéro de fax du terminal ou de en mettant le radiateur à une distance d'au moins 20 cm du corps (à l'exclusion des
l'entreprise. Ces informations sont transmises avec votre document par la fonction En-tête de extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
fax. En plus de ces informations, assurez-vous de bien programmer la date et l'heure sur votre
appareil. Remarques à l’attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
Français
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
Instructions de sécurité importantes pour le télécopieur radio exempts de licence.
Lorsque vous utilisez votre équipement téléphonique, vous devez toujours respecter les (2) L'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
règles de sécurité élémentaires afin de réduire les risques d’incendie, d'électrocution et de susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
blessure, notamment : Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
• N'utilisez pas ce produit à proximité de l'eau, par exemple, près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
d'un évier ou d'une cuve de lessivage, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine. radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en
• Évitez d'utiliser un téléphone pendant un orage. Il peut exister un risque d'électrocution à gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception
distance dû à la foudre. des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
• N'utilisez pas un téléphone pour signaler une fuite de gaz lorsque vous vous trouvez à
proximité de cette dernière.
Veuillez conserver ces instructions.

voici quelques-unes :
• Évitez d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un appareil sans fil) pendant un orage
électrique. Cela peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre.
13
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de
Marques commerciales
l'unité Fax SD est une marque commerciale de SD-3C, LLC.
Ce produit correspond aux caractéristiques techniques de « Innovation, Sciences et D'autres désignations de produit sont utilisées ci-après uniquement à des fins d'identification
Développement économique Canada ». et peuvent être des marques de leur société respective. Nous renonçons à tout droit relatif
Le numéro d'équivalence de sonnerie (REN) indique le nombre maximum d'appareils à ces marques.
pouvant être connectés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
être constituée de n'importe quelle combinaison d'appareils, à la seule condition que la
somme des REN de tous ces appareils ne dépasse pas cinq.
Remarques à l’attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l’unité Fax

Recyclage des batteries (À l'attention des utilisateurs

aux États-Unis et au Canada)

Vous pouvez aider à préserver notre environnement en renvoyant les batteries rechargeables
usagées à votre point de collecte et de recyclage.
Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage des batteries rechargeables, appelez gratuitement
le 1-800-822-8837, ou visitez le site Web http://www.call2recycle.org/
14
15
Français
EN US ES ES PT BR FR FR
D0C9-7107
16
© 2019
EN US ES ES PT BR FR FR
D0C9-7107
User Guide Getting Started
Selected Version Copy
Fax
Print
Scan
Document Server
Web Image Monitor
Adding Paper and Toner
Troubleshooting
Specifications for the Machine
Legal and Contact Information
For information not found in this manual,

see the online manuals available on our
web site (https://www.ricoh.com/).
For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before
using the machine.
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals
Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that may result in
the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the instructions are not obeyed.
Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
[]
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 1
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................1
1. Getting Started
Turning On and Off the Power.......................................................................................................................... 9
Turning On the Main Power.......................................................................................................................... 9
Turning Off the Main Power........................................................................................................................10
Energy Saving Mode...................................................................................................................................10
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................13
Front and Right View....................................................................................................................................13
Front and Left View...................................................................................................................................... 17
Rear and Left View.......................................................................................................................................19
Names and Functions of the Control Panel....................................................................................................21
Touch Panel/Interface.................................................................................................................................21
LED Indicators...............................................................................................................................................22
Changing the Display Language.................................................................................................................... 24
Confirming the Functions that Are Added in RICOH Always Current Technology.....................................25
Confirming the Version of RICOH Always Current Technology Implemented on the Machine............25
How to Use the Home Screen.........................................................................................................................26
Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips.............................................................................................. 28
How to Use the Copy Screen..........................................................................................................................31
How to Use the Copy Screen (Standard).................................................................................................. 31
How to Use the Copy Screen (No Scrolling Screen)............................................................................... 33
Changing the Layout or Display of the Keys of the Copy Function......................................................... 34
How to Use the Fax Screen............................................................................................................................. 36
Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen.................................................................................................... 36
How to Use the Scanner Screen..................................................................................................................... 39
Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen.................................................................................................... 39
Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen..................................................... 42
Adding an Icon/Widget to the Home Screen.......................................................................................... 43
Creating a Folder to Organize Icons......................................................................................................... 43
Registering Frequently Used Settings as a Program...................................................................................... 45
Registering Settings as a Program.............................................................................................................. 46
Changing the Contents of the Program......................................................................................................47
2
Logging In from the Control Panel.................................................................................................................. 48
Logging In by Entering the User Name and Password.............................................................................49
Logging In Using an IC Card...................................................................................................................... 50
Logging In Using a Mobile Device.............................................................................................................50
Authenticating Using the User Code.......................................................................................................... 52
Changing the Login Password.................................................................................................................... 52
Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass................................................................................................... 54
Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF).............................................................................56
2. Copy
Basic Procedure for Copying Documents...................................................................................................... 59
Reserving a Copy Job While Executing Another Copy Job.....................................................................60
Specifying Original Sizes................................................................................................................................ 62
Using Paper Tray Settings........................................................................................................................... 62
Selecting a Regular Size for the Original.................................................................................................. 62
Specifying a Custom Size for the Original................................................................................................ 63
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies............................................................................................................65
Specifying a Copy Ratio or Size................................................................................................................ 65
Enlarging or Reducing According to the Paper Size................................................................................ 67
Reducing Slightly to Increase the Margins................................................................................................ 68
Duplex Copying............................................................................................................................................... 69
Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper.........................................71
Copying Onto Envelopes................................................................................................................................ 74
Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number...................................................................................... 76
3. Fax
Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes..........................................................................................................79
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book..............................................................................................82
Registering a Fax Number and Send Conditions......................................................................................82
Changing/Deleting the Registered Data Such as Fax Number.............................................................. 84
Displaying a Preview before Sending a Fax..................................................................................................85
Viewing the Transmission Result of Sent Faxes.............................................................................................. 87
Confirming the Information on the Fax Screen.......................................................................................... 87
Checking the Result in Communication Result Report............................................................................... 88
Checking the Result in Immediate TX Result Report...................................................................................89
3
Checking the Result in Communication Failure Report............................................................................. 89
Checking the Result in Error Report............................................................................................................ 89
Viewing Memory Storage Report...............................................................................................................89
Checking by E-mail......................................................................................................................................90
Confirming the Information in Web Image Monitor................................................................................. 91
4. Print
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer...................................................93
Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM......................................................................... 93
Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File............................................................ 96
Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (Windows)................................................................. 99
Installing the PCL 6 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM............................................................................... 99
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM................................................................... 102
Installing the PCL 6/PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the Downloaded File..........................................104
Installing the Printer Driver for Windows................................................................................................. 105
If the Machine Cannot Be Found............................................................................................................. 106
Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)..................................................................110
Installing the PPD file................................................................................................................................. 110
Registering the Machine in [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners]...................................................... 111
Specifying the Option Settings................................................................................................................. 114
Basic Procedure for Printing Documents...................................................................................................... 116
Printing a Document in Windows.............................................................................................................116
Printing a Document in macOS................................................................................................................ 118
Printing on Both Sides of Paper.................................................................................................................... 121
Specifying 2-sided Print (Windows)........................................................................................................ 121
Specifying 2-sided Print (macOS)............................................................................................................121
Combining and Printing Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet of Paper........................................................ 123
Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (Windows).................................................................... 123
Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (macOS)........................................................................123
Printing on Envelopes.................................................................................................................................... 125
Printing Documents Stored in the Printer from the Control Panel............................................................... 128
Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card Directly............................................................... 129
Printable File Formats................................................................................................................................ 129
Printing from a Memory Storage Device or Scan Application.............................................................. 130
4
5. Scan
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data by E-mail..............................................................133
Basic Procedure for Sending an E-mail................................................................................................... 133
Registering the E-mail Destination Specified When Sending an E-mail in the Address Book.............135
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder........................................................... 138
Printing the Check Sheet........................................................................................................................... 138
Confirming the Computer Information (Windows)................................................................................. 139
Creating a Shared Folder (Windows)..................................................................................................... 140
Confirming the Computer Information (macOS).....................................................................................143
Creating a Shared Folder (macOS)........................................................................................................ 144
Registering the Created Shared Folder in the Address Book................................................................ 146
Basic Procedure for Performing Send to Folder......................................................................................148
Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density...........................................................................150
Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document....................................................... 153
6. Document Server
Storing Documents in Document Server.......................................................................................................155
Printing Documents in Document Server...................................................................................................... 157
Printing a Document with the Settings Specified When Scanned..........................................................157
Changing the Print Settings to Print a Document.....................................................................................158
Specifying a Page to Print.........................................................................................................................159
7. Web Image Monitor
Using Web Image Monitor...........................................................................................................................161
What You Can Do on the Web Image Monitor..................................................................................... 162
Web Image Monitor Screen.................................................................................................................... 164
Specifying Web Image Monitor Help..................................................................................................... 164
8. Adding Paper and Toner
Loading Paper into the Paper Tray...............................................................................................................167
Loading Paper into Tray 1........................................................................................................................ 168
Loading Paper into Tray 2 to 4................................................................................................................ 172
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray........................................................................................................ 174
Specifying Regular Sizes Using the Control Panel................................................................................. 176
Specifying a Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel..................................................................... 178
Specifying Paper Type and Thickness Settings....................................................................................... 179
5
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types........................................................................................................182
Tray 1......................................................................................................................................................... 182
Paper Tray Unit (Trays 2-4)...................................................................................................................... 183
Bypass Tray................................................................................................................................................183
Notes on Special Paper............................................................................................................................185
Paper Thickness for Each Paper Weight..................................................................................................185
Unusable Paper......................................................................................................................................... 186
Paper Storage............................................................................................................................................187
Saving Printouts......................................................................................................................................... 187
Thick Paper Orientation and Recommended Status................................................................................... 188
Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status....................................................................................... 189
Using the Copy Function...........................................................................................................................190
Using the Printer Function..........................................................................................................................190
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper............................................................................... 191
Copying onto Letterhead Paper............................................................................................................... 191
Printing onto Letterhead Paper Using the Printer Driver..........................................................................192
Recommended Original Size and Weight.................................................................................................. 193
Replacing the Toner.......................................................................................................................................194
Precautions When Storing Toner..............................................................................................................195
Precautions When Replacing the Toner.................................................................................................. 195
Disposing Exhausted Toners.....................................................................................................................196
9. Troubleshooting
Alert Sounds................................................................................................................................................... 199
Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel.......................................................201
When an Icon Is Displayed with a Message.......................................................................................... 201
When the [Check Status] Indicator Is Lit or Flashing.............................................................................. 203
When the Machine Cannot Be Operated................................................................................................... 204
When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation on the Control Panel..................204
When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation from a Computer....................... 208
When a Message Appears and the Machine Cannot Be Operated........................................................210
When a Message Appears While Using the Copy Function.....................................................................213
When a Message Appears While Using Document Server...................................................................... 214
When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function........................................................................ 215
6
Messages that Appear During Operation or When Sending/Receiving a Fax Cannot Be Performed....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 215
Messages that Appear When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Network.....................................216
Messages that Appear When the Remote Fax Function Is Unavailable.............................................. 225
When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function....................................................................229
Messages that Appear without Error Codes........................................................................................... 229
Messages that Appear with Error Codes................................................................................................ 241
When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function................................................................ 243
Messages that Appear on the Control Panel.......................................................................................... 243
Messages that Appear on the Computer................................................................................................ 250
When Other Messages Appear...................................................................................................................256
Messages that Appear When Machine Login Fails............................................................................... 258
Messages that Appear When Logging in to the Machine Using an IC Card Fails............................. 265
Messages that Appear When the LDAP Server Is Unavailable............................................................ 266
Messages that Appear When There Is a Problem with the Certificate................................................. 267
Messages that Appear When an Application Site Cannot Be Used.................................................... 268
10. Specifications for The Machine
Model-Specific Information.......................................................................................................................... 271
List of Specifications.......................................................................................................................................273
Specifications for the Main Unit............................................................................................................... 273
Specifications for the Document Server...................................................................................................290
Specifications for Facsimile.......................................................................................................................291
Specifications for Printer........................................................................................................................... 296
Specifications for Scanner........................................................................................................................ 301
Specifications for Auto Document Feeder (ADF).................................................................................... 305
Specifications for Internal Finisher........................................................................................................... 305
Specifications for Internal Tray 2............................................................................................................. 306
Specifications for Paper Tray Unit (Trays 2-4)........................................................................................307
Specifications for Caster Table................................................................................................................ 308
Specifications for IEEE 1284 Interface Board........................................................................................ 308
Specifications for Wireless LAN Board................................................................................................... 308
Specifications for Device Server Option................................................................................................. 309
The Setting Values of the Transmission Function..........................................................................................310
7
Send Email................................................................................................................................................. 310
Send to Folder........................................................................................................................................... 311
Broadcast Transmission.............................................................................................................................312
Printable Area and Margin...........................................................................................................................313
Machine Options...........................................................................................................................................314
Guide to Functions of the Machine’s External Options..........................................................................314
Guide to Functions of the Machine’s Internal Options...........................................................................316
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations..............................................................................................318
Copy Function............................................................................................................................................318
Facsimile Functions.................................................................................................................................... 318
Printer Function.......................................................................................................................................... 319
Scanner Function....................................................................................................................................... 319
Others.........................................................................................................................................................319
Function Compatibility...................................................................................................................................321
11. Legal and Contact Information
Environmental Regulations............................................................................................................................ 323
ENERGY STAR Program........................................................................................................................... 323
Energy Saving Functions...........................................................................................................................323
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly Europe)...................... 325
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only) (mainly Europe)
.................................................................................................................................................................... 326
Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)............................................................... 326
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA) (mainly North America)....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 327
Trademarks (User Guide)..............................................................................................................................328
8
1. Getting Started
Turning On and Off the Power

To turn the machine on and off, press the main power switch on the front of the machine.
• When you are using the fax function on the machine, do not turn the power off under normal
operation. If the power is turned off, data stored in the fax memory will be lost in about one hour
after the machine is turned off. If you have to turn the power off or unplug the power cord for some
reason, make sure 100% is shown as available memory on the screen for the fax function.
Turning On the Main Power
• Do not press the main power switch soon after you press the main power of the machine. When
you turn the power on or off, wait at least 10 seconds after confirming that the main power
indicator on the control panel has turned on or off.
1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Push the main power switch.
D0C9IA5901
The main power indicator on the right side of the control panel turns on.
• When the power is turned on, the screen may show that the machine is performing an auto restart.
Do not turn off the main power while the machine is processing. It takes about 7 minutes until the
machine restarts.
• If a file was deleted from memory, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed as soon as the
power is restored. This report can be used to identify lost files.
9
1. Getting Started
Turning Off the Main Power
• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation. To turn the power off, confirm that the
operation is finished.
• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.
• Do not press the main power switch soon after pressing the main power switch on the machine.
When you turn the power on or off, wait at least 10 seconds after confirming that the main power
indicator on the control panel has turned on or off.
1. Push the main power switch.
D0C9IA5901
The main power indicator on the right side of the control panel turns off. The main power turns off
automatically after the machine has shut down properly.
Energy Saving Mode
When the machine is not operated for a specified period of time, the machine enters the "Energy Saving
mode" automatically. "Energy Saving mode" has two modes, "Fusing Unit Off mode" and "Sleep mode",
and the machine enters the Fusing Unit Off mode first. In the factory default, the machine is configured to
use both modes.
Fusing Unit Off Mode
In this mode, the main power indicator is lit. Because the heater of the fusing unit is turned off but
the screen of the control panel is still displayed, the power consumption decreases, but you can
start operation promptly. If you do not operate the machine for a specified period of time, the
machine emits a clicking sound and enters Fusing Unit Off mode.
• You can specify whether to enable the Fusing Unit Off mode and the time to wait before the
machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode under [Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off].
See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).
10
Turning On and Off the Power
• In this mode, you can scan documents, send faxes, receive faxes into memory, change the
machine settings on the control panel, and perform other operations that do not require
printing.
Sleep Mode
In this mode, the display of the control panel turns off and the main power indicator blinks slowly.
Power consumption is minimized. When you do not operate the machine for a specified period of
time or press [Energy Save] ( ), the machine enters Sleep mode.
• You can specify the amount of time that the machine waits before entering Sleep mode under
[Sleep Mode Timer].
See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).
• The machine recovers from Sleep mode when you perform one of the following:
• Lift the ADF.
• Place an original in the ADF.
• Touch the display of the control panel.
• The energy saving functions are disabled when an error occurs or while an operation is in
progress.
• The energy saving functions will not operate in the following cases:
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When operations are suspended during printing
• When a warning message appears (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode unless the
cover is open.)
• When paper is jammed (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode except when the cover is
open.)
• When the Data In indicator is lit or flashing (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode except
when the Data In indicator is lit or flashing due to receiving faxes or storing documents.)
• The machine does not enter Sleep mode in the following cases:
• During communication with external equipment
• When the hard disk is active
• When the service call message appears
• When the ADF, machine's cover, or ADF cover are opened
• When the "Add Toner" message appears
• When toner is being replenished
• When one of the following screens is displayed:
• System Settings
11
1. Getting Started
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book
• Tray/Paper Settings
• When data is being processed
• If a file is waiting to be transmitted within the next minute using the "Send Later" facsimile function
• When a recipient is being registered in the address list or group dial list
• When the sample print, locked print, hold print, or stored print screen is displayed
• When the screen of a document that was stored under the printer function appears
• When the internal cooling fan is active
• When accessing the machine using Web Image Monitor
12
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal components are
overheated.
ADF stands for Auto Document Feeder.
Front and Right View
IM C300/C300F/C400F
8
3
9
4
10
5 11
6 12
13
D0C9IA5902
1. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
3. Control panel
See page 21 "Names and Functions of the Control Panel".
13
1. Getting Started
4. Front cover
Open to replace the toner cartridge.
5. Paper tray
Load paper here.
6. Paper tray unit
Load paper here.
7. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, turn the switch on.
8. Right cover
Open this cover when a paper jam occurs.
9. Vents
Prevent overheating.
10. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
11. Bypass tray
Use to copy or print on OHP transparencies and label paper (adhesive labels).
12. Extender
Pull this extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger size paper in the bypass tray.
13. Lower right cover
14
IM C400SRF
1
2
3
10
4
11
5
6 12
13
7
14
8
15
D0C9IA0901
1. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

Lower the ADF over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
3. Control panel
See page 21 "Names and Functions of the Control Panel".
4. Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge for the finisher. Replace the cartridge when the staples run out.
5. Finisher cover
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge.
6. Front cover
Open to replace the toner cartridge.
7. Paper tray
Load paper here.
15
1. Getting Started
8. Paper tray unit

Load paper here.
9. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, turn the switch on.
10. Right cover
11. Vents
12. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
13. Bypass tray
Use to copy or print on OHP transparencies and label paper (adhesive labels).
14. Extender
Pull this extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11 or larger size paper in the bypass tray.
15. Lower right cover
16
Front and Left View
IM C300/C300F/C400F
81/2 x 14 size A4 or 81/2 x 11 size

1
2
2
5
D0C9IA0909
1. Internal tray 2 guide

Open out and raise the end fence to support large paper.
2. Internal tray guide
Open out and raise the end fence to support large paper.
• 81/2 × 14 size
Pull out the guide to position 1.
• A4 or 81/2 × 11 size
Pull out the guide to position 1, and then push it back to position 2.
3. Internal tray 2
If you select this as the output tray, copied/printed paper or fax messages are delivered here face down.
4. ADF's extenders
Raise these extenders to support large paper.
5. Internal tray
Copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here.
17
1. Getting Started
IM C400SRF
D0C9IA0902
1. Finisher shift tray guide

Open out the end fence to support large paper.
2. Finisher shift tray
Copied/printed/sorted/stapled paper and fax messages are delivered here.
3. ADF's extenders
Raise these extenders to support large paper.
18
Rear and Left View
IM C300/C300F/C400F
1
2
D0C9IA5904
1. Vents
2. Ethernet port
Use a network interface cable to connect the machine to a network.
IM C400SRF
1 2
D0C9IA0903
19
1. Getting Started
1. Vents
2. Ethernet port
Use a network interface cable to connect the machine to a network.
20
Names and Functions of the Control Panel

The touch panel (Smart Operation Panel) that displays the operation screen of the machine is referred to
as the "Control Panel".
• On both sides of the control panel, interfaces for connecting external devices and slots to insert an
SD card/USB flash memory device are provided.
• Even when the screen is turned off, the LED indicators on the frame of the control panel show the
status of the machine.
Touch Panel/Interface
1 2
DZB165
1. Media slots
Insert an SD card or USB flash memory device. You can store the scanned data or print the file stored on the
media.
• Use an SD memory card or SDHC memory card with a maximum capacity of 32 GB. You cannot use an
SDXC memory card.
• Use the media formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
• Certain types of USB flash memory devices cannot be used in the machine.
• A USB extension cable, hub, or card reader cannot be used.
• If the power of the machine is turned off or the media is removed from the machine while the machine is
reading the data in the media, check the data in the media.
• Before removing the media from the slot, press the icon displayed on the screen ( / ) to cancel the
connection.
21
1. Getting Started
DZW174
2. Touch Panel
Displays the Home screen, operation screen of applications, and messages. Operate with the fingertips.
page 26 "How to Use the Home Screen"
page 28 "Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips"
3. NFC tag
Used to connect the machine and a smart device with the RICOH Smart Device Connector.
See "Using the Machine Functions from a Mobile Device", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can adjust the angle of the control panel to improve visibility.
D0C9IA5931
LED Indicators
2 3 4
DZB164
22
1. Media access indicator

Flashes when data is being read from or written to an SD card.
While the machine is accessing the SD card or USB flash memory device, do not turn the power off or remove
the media.
• If the media access lamp does not light when an SD card is pushed into the media slot, do the following:
• Reinsert the SD card.
• The SD card may be broken. Contact the shop where you bought it.
2. Fax indicator
Indicates the status of the fax function.
• Flashing: transmitting and receiving data
• Lit: receiving data (Substitute RX File/Memory Lock Reception/Personal Box)
3. Data In indicator
Flashes when the machine is receiving data sent from the printer driver or LAN-Fax driver.
4. Status indicator
Indicates the status of the system. Stays lit when an error occurs or toner runs out.
page 201 "Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel"
5. Main power indicator
The main power indicator lights up when you turn on the main power switch. In Sleep mode, it flickers slowly.
23
1. Getting Started
Changing the Display Language

You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
1. On the Home screen, press the change language widget.
2. Select the language you want to display.
3. Press [OK].
24
Confirming the Functions that Are Added in RICOH Always Current Technology
Confirming the Functions that Are Added in

RICOH Always Current Technology
You can install the upgrade package for the machine's functions by RICOH Always Current Technology.
You can apply the latest functions developed after purchase and security updates.
To install the latest version of RICOH Always Current Technology, access the Application Site from the
control panel of the machine.
EDS004
• For details about installing RICOH Always Current Technology, see the Operating Instructions for
Application Site.
Confirming the Version of RICOH Always Current Technology Implemented on

the Machine
1. Press [Maintnc./Inquiry/Mach. Info] on the [Check Status] screen.

2. Press [Inquiry].
3. Check the version of the machine under the machine information.
25
1. Getting Started
How to Use the Home Screen

Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom center of the screen to display the Home screen on which icons for
each function are shown. On the Home screen, you can register frequently used shortcuts and widgets.
• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
• Touch the Home screen to operate it.
• You can add or delete icons and widgets, and change their order.
page 42 "Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen"
1 2 3 4 5
15 6
7
8
6 14 13 12 11 10 9
DZC140
1. Login icon
This icon is displayed when users are logged in. When you press the icon, the names of the users who are
currently logged in are displayed.
2. System message
Displays system and application messages. If there are two or more messages, they will be displayed
alternately.
If a message indicating that the toner has run out or an error has occurred is displayed, press the message to
display the system message list to check the contents.
26
3. Help
When the machine is connected to the Internet and Help is available for the screen that is displayed or the
error that has occurred, press this icon to display a Help screen.
When the machine is not connected to the Internet, you can see guidance regarding print quality and paper.
Specify [Cookie] in the control panel browser to [ON] to display Help properly.
4. [Login]/[Logout]
These keys are displayed when user authentication is enabled. Press the keys to log in to or log out from the
machine.
page 48 "Logging In from the Control Panel"
5. [Energy Save]
Press to enter or exit Sleep mode.
page 10 "Energy Saving Mode"
6. Switch Screens
Press to scroll the screens right and left. The Home screen has 5 screens.
DZC180
You can switch between the screens by flicking.

7. Application list
Press to display applications that are not displayed on the Home screen.
page 42 "Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen"
8. Current display position
Shows which of the five screens is currently displayed.
9. [Stop]
Press to stop scanning or printing.
You can change the setting to stop only a job in progress with [Stop Key to Suspend Print Job].
See "Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
10. [Menu]
Displayed if a menu is available in the currently selected application.
On the Home screen, press to restore the icons to their factory default positions.
11. [Home]
Press to display the Home screen.
27
1. Getting Started
12. [Back]
Press to return to the previous screen.
13. Date/Time and Toner remaining
The current date and time is displayed.
To display the information about Toner remaining, specify [Display Time/Remaining Toner] of [Screen
Features Settings] to [Remaining Toner].
14. [Check Status]
Press to check the following system statuses of the machine. This lights up in red when an error occurs.
• Machine's status
Indicates the error status and network status.
• Operational status of each function
Status of functions such as Copy or Scanner
• Current jobs
• Job history
• Machine's maintenance information
See "Checking the Machine Status from the Control Panel", User Guide (Full Version).
15. Icon display area
Displays the icons and widgets.
• You can change the screen displayed when the power is turned on under [Function Priority].
• See "Displaying Frequently Used Functions on the First Screen", User Guide (Full Version).
• When you press [Menu] [Reset Home Screen] with the Embedded Software Architecture
application being installed in the machine, the application icons are not deleted.
Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips
On the Home screen or application screen, you can perform the following operations by touching the
screen with your fingertips.
Flick (for switching between screens)
Touch and slide your finger on the screen quickly left or right to switch between the screens.
28
DZB181
Drag (for moving an icon)

Press and hold an icon, and then slide your finger while pressing on the screen to move the icon.
DZB182
Long tap (for displaying the available menu screen)

Press and hold on a blank area on the screen to display the menu screen.
On the Home screen you can add a folder or change the wallpaper from the menu.
DZB183
In some applications, you can also use the following actions to operate the screen:
Pinch-in (for zooming out the screen)
Touch the screen with your thumb and forefinger, and pinch them together. This feature is useful
when previewing files and images.
29
1. Getting Started
DZB185
Pinch-out (for zooming in the screen)

Touch the screen with your thumb and forefinger, and spread them apart. You can also zoom in the
screen by tapping the screen twice quickly. When you quickly tap the screen twice again, the
screen returns to full display. This feature is useful when previewing files and images.
DZB184
30
How to Use the Copy Screen

You can select from one of two types for the Copy screen:
Standard View
The basic functions that are used frequently are displayed with big keys. Scroll down the screen to
see the keys used to configure the functions for finishing or editing.
D0C9PA5242
Full View
You can see all the function keys on a single screen. You do not need to scroll through the screens
to select a function.
• To switch the screen type, press [Menu] ( ) [Screen Settings] [Switch Screen Type] on the
Copy screen.
• You can use the same functions on either screen.
• When the administrator has configured user authentication and User's Own Customization is
enabled, each login user can change the screen type.
How to Use the Copy Screen (Standard)
You can customize the layout and how the keys are displayed on the Copy screen in Standard. For
details, see page 34 "Changing the Layout or Display of the Keys of the Copy Function".
31
1. Getting Started
6
D0C9PA5243
1. Copy function keys

Press a key to select the function to assign to the key. Flick up and down on the screen to display the keys out
of the visible area. The keys with assigned functions are displayed in yellow or with in the upper left corner.
Depending on the assigned function, the display of the key changes according to the specified setting.
2. [Reset]
Reset the settings configured on the Copy screen.
3. Preview of the current setting status
Displays an image representing the settings configured on the Copy screen. Press the image to display the list
of the settings.
4. [Sample Copy]
Press to make a partial copy as a test before proceeding to copy the rest of the original.
See "Making a Partial Copy as a Test and Copying the Rest of the Original", User Guide (Full Version).
5. [Start]
Press to perform copying.
32
6. Other keys for Copy function

Press to select the functions whose keys are out of the visible area of the screen. The key of the function that is
currently configured is displayed with in the upper left corner.
7. Select One Touch Job
You can see the preset settings in the machine or the job history. When user authentication is configured,
display the history of the executed jobs for each login user. When selecting a job history, its settings are
displayed on the current Copy screen. You can use the same settings as a previous job by selecting the job
history.
How to Use the Copy Screen (No Scrolling Screen)
3
7
4
6
D0C9PA5244
1. Copy function keys

Press a key to select the function to assign to the key. The keys with assigned functions are displayed in yellow.
To see the display area in the illustration below, press or flick to the left or right.
2. [Reset]
Reset the settings configured on the Copy screen.
3. Preview of the current setting status
Displays an image representing the quantity and the settings configured on the Copy screen. Press [Qty] to
display the number keys. Press the image to display the list of the settings.
4. [Sample Copy]
Press to make a partial copy as a test before proceeding to copy the rest of the original.
See "Making a Partial Copy as a Test and Copying the Rest of the Original", User Guide (Full Version).
5. [Start]
Press to perform copying.
6. Other keys for Copy function
Press to select the functions whose keys are out of the visible area of the screen. The key of the function that is
currently configured is displayed with in the upper left corner.
33
1. Getting Started
7. Select One Touch Job

You can see the preset settings in the machine or the job history. When user authentication is configured,
display the history of the executed jobs for each authenticated user. When selecting a job history, its settings
are displayed on the current Copy screen. You can use the same settings as a previous job by selecting the job
history.
Changing the Layout or Display of the Keys of the Copy Function
You can customize the layout and how the Copy function keys are displayed on the Copy screen in
Standard mode (Arranging keys mode).
When the administrator has configured user authentication and User's Own Customization is enabled,
each login user can customize the layout.
Switching to change the key layout mode
On the Copy screen, press and hold one of the keys until the screen changes, and then press [OK]
to display the screen of the arranging keys mode.
Changing the key layout

Press and hold the key to move, drag it to the location to display, and then press [OK].
± ´ ²
³ µ
DZX026
Hiding a key
Press and hold the key to hide, drag it to "Hide the Keys", and then press [OK].
34
DZX027
Displaying a hidden key

Press "Hidden Key List" to display the hidden keys. Press and hold the key to display, drag it to the
location to display, and then press [OK].
DZX028
Confirming the initial placement of the keys

Press [Menu] ( ) [Screen Settings] [Temporarily Restore Initial Key Layout] on the Copy
screen. After confirming, press [Back].
Resetting the key layout to the default
Press [Menu] ( ) [Screen Settings] [Restore Initial Key Layout] [Yes] on the Copy
screen.
35
1. Getting Started
How to Use the Fax Screen

There are five kinds of functions and settings on the Fax screen.:
1 2
5 3
DZX895
1. Destination type selection

Switch the destination type between [Fax] (including IP-Fax) and [Internet Fax]. The items displayed in the
address book and destination entry screen for manual entry change also when you switch the destination type.
2. Transmission/reception information confirmation
Browse and print the received documents that are stored in the memory or on the hard disk drive of the
machine. You can also browse and print the transmission and reception history.
3. Transmission settings
You can specify the additional features to use when sending a fax, configure the scan settings appropriately
for the original to scan, and display a preview before sending the fax. You can also check the settings that are
currently specified and the remaining amount of memory.
4. Destination specification
You can select an address registered in the address book through one-touch operation. Press to specify a
destination by using various other methods such as by entering manually or selecting from the history. You can
also register a new destination in the address book.
5. Job history
Job history of the executed jobs is displayed. When user authentication is set, the job history of each
authenticated user is displayed. When you select a job history, the setting will be applied on the current Fax
screen. This feature is convenient when you are using the same setting repeatedly.
Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen
Press and hold a key on the [Send Settings] screen to customize the layout of the keys.
When the administrator has enabled user authentication and User's Own Customization, the screen can
be customized for each user.
36
How to Use the Fax Screen

Long-press any key and press [OK] on the screen below to switch to the key sorting mode and
enable changing of the key layout.

Long-press a key to change the layout, drag it to a new location, and then press [OK].
± ´ ²
³ µ
DZX026
Hiding a key
Long-press a key to hide, drag it to [Hide the Keys] (Trash icon), and then press [OK].
DZX027

37
1. Getting Started
DZX028

Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Check the key layout of the factory defaults] on
the Fax screen. After confirming, press [Back].
Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Reset Layout] [Restore] on the Fax screen.
38
How to Use the Scanner Screen

There are five kinds of functions and settings on the Scanner screen.
1 2
5 3
DZX898
1. Destination type selection

You can switch between [Scan to Email] and [Scan to Folder]. The items displayed in the address book and
destination entry screen for manual entry also change when you switch the destination type.
2. Scan Files Status
You can browse the transmission history of the sent documents and cancel sending of a document waiting in
the queue. The transmission file status may not be displayed depending on the security settings.
3. Transmission settings
You can specify the scan settings according to the type of document to scan and the purpose of the scanned
data, and display a preview before sending the data.
4. Destination specification
You can select a destination registered in the address book through one-touch operation. Press to specify a
destination by using various other methods such as by entering manually or selecting from the history. You can
also register a new destination in the address book.
5. One Touch Job Settings
You can see the preset settings in the machine or the job history. When user authentication is set, the job
history of each authenticated user is displayed. When you select a job history, the setting will be applied on
the current Scanner screen. This feature is convenient when you are using the same setting repeatedly.
Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen
Press and hold a key on the [Send Settings] screen to customize the layout of the keys.
When the administrator has enabled user authentication and User's Own Customization, the screen can
be customized for each user.
Long-press any key and press [OK] on the screen below to switch to the key sorting mode and
enable changing of the key layout.
39
1. Getting Started

Long-press a key to change the layout, drag it to a new location, and then press [OK].
± ´ ²
³ µ
DZX026
Hiding a key
Long-press a key to hide, drag it to [Hide the Keys] (Trash icon), and then press [OK].
DZX027

40
DZX028

Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Check the key layout of the factory defaults] on
the Scanner screen. After confirming, press [Back].
Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Reset Layout] [Restore] on the Scanner screen.
41
1. Getting Started
Adding a Frequently Used Application or

Widget to the Home Screen
You can use a frequently used icon or widget easily by adding it to the Home screen. You can organize
the icons on the Home screen as you like by changing their order or using folders.
• Add an icon or widget from the application list screen.
• Each page of the Home screen can display up to 12 icons, widgets or folders, for a total of 60
items. A folder can hold up to 80 icons.
• You can add the following items to the Home screen: shortcuts of bookmarks in the browser on the
screen and programs registered in the Copy, Fax or Scanner.
DZC186
• You cannot add a shortcut of a program registered by the document server function to the Home
screen.
• When you have set user authentication, log in and customize it. Each user can register their own
Home screen.
• A shortcut, folder, or widget cannot be created or moved if there is no space on the Home screen.
In this case, delete one of the registered items, and then perform the same operation.
• The names of icons and widgets are displayed up to 20 double-byte or 30 single-byte characters.
Names composed of 21 or more double-byte characters are displayed with "...", indicating the
20th and later characters.
42
Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen
Adding an Icon/Widget to the Home Screen
1. Press the application list icon on the Home screen.
DZC187
2. Press and hold the icon or widget to be added to the application list screen.
• Select the [WIDGET] tab to add a widget, or select the [PROGRAM] tab to add a program.
3. After the screen changes to the Home screen, move the icon or widget to the desired
position and release it.
To add a classic application or program, select the type of application or program from the
displayed menu.
Creating a Folder to Organize Icons
1. Press and hold a spot on the Home screen where you want to create a folder.
43
1. Getting Started
2. When the "Add to Home Screen" screen is displayed, press [Folder].
DZC188
3. Open the created folder, press and hold its title, and then change the folder name.
You can enter up to 30 characters for a folder name.
4. Drag the icon and release it over the folder.
44
Registering Frequently Used Settings as a Program
Registering Frequently Used Settings as a

Program
You can register a "program" made of a combination of the functions used in the Copy, Fax, or
Scanner, such as the scan setting, output setting, and address.
• You can load the registered program easily from the application screen.
DZX153
• When you press the icon of a program on the Home screen, the machine applies the settings and
performs the function registered in the program automatically.
• You can register the following number of items as programs.
• Copy: 25 items
• Fax: 100 items
• Scanner: 100 items
• You cannot register the following settings as a program:

• Copy
[2 Sided/Combine]
• Fax
[Subject], [Sender]
• Scanner
[Sender], [PDF Security Settings], [Start Number]
• You can register a destination on the program of the scanner function only when [Program Setting
for Destination] of [Scanner Settings] is set to [Include Destinations].
• See "Others (Scanner Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).
• When [Program Setting for Destination] of [Scanner Settings] is set to [Exclude Destinations], the
destination registered on the recalled program in the scanner function is not displayed.
• A folder destination with a destination protection code cannot be registered on a program of the
scanner function.
45
1. Getting Started
Registering Settings as a Program
First, configure the settings to be registered on the Copy, Fax, or Scanner screen, and then register them.
1. On the Home screen, press [Copy], [Fax], or [Scanner].
2. Specify scan and output settings to be registered as a program.
3. Press [Menu] ( ).
4. Press [Set Current Settings to Program].
DZX154
5. Press a program number to register the settings.

6. Enter a program name and select an icon, and then press [OK].
7. Press [Place].
The selected icon is displayed on the Home screen.
46
Registering Frequently Used Settings as a Program
8. Press [Exit].
Changing the Contents of the Program
You can change a part of the program and overwrite it or change the contents and register them as a
new program.
1. On the Home screen, press [Copy], [Fax], or [Scanner].
2. Press [Menu] ( ), and then press [Recall Program].
DZX153
3. Press the program number to be changed.

4. Change the scan and output settings.
5. Press [Menu] ( ), and then press [Set Current Settings to Program].
6. Select a program number to register the changed settings, and then press [Program].
• To overwrite the program, select the number of the loaded program.
• To register the contents as a new program, select a number that is not programmed.
7. Enter a program name and select an icon.
8. Press [OK].
• To change the icon or program name or to delete the program, press [Menu] ( ) and operate
from [Edit/Delete Program].
47
1. Getting Started
Logging In from the Control Panel

When the machine is configured by the administrator to restrict use by unauthorized users, you must
authenticate your login information before starting the operation.
The authentication methods are described below.
• When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is configured on the
machine, enter the user name and password for authentication to log in to the machine before
starting operation.
• Depending on the machine settings, you can use an IC card or mobile device for authentication.
• If user code authentication is specified, you may need to enter the user code to operate the
restricted application.
To prevent use of the machine by an unauthorized person, always log out when you have finished using
the machine. While a user is logged in, the name of the user is displayed in the system message.
48
• If the machine is not used for a specified period, the user is automatically logged out (Auto Logout).
The default setting for Auto Logout is 3 minutes. The period of Auto Logout can be changed by
[Auto Logout Timer] of [System Settings] or the Auto Logout setting can be disabled.
• See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).
• Ask the administrator for the login user name, login password, and user code.
• "Verifying Users to Operate the Machine (User Authentication)", Security
Logging In by Entering the User Name and Password
Enter the authentication information using the keyboard displayed on the control panel.
1. Press [Login] at the top right on the screen.
DZC190
2. Press [User Name].
DZC191
3. Enter the login user name, and then press [Done].

4. Press [Password].
5. Enter the login password, and then press [Done].
6. Press [Login].
49
1. Getting Started
• If an incorrect password is entered a specified number of times, login with the same name is
disabled (Lockout Function). The default setting for unsuccessful attempts before a user is locked out
is five. If the user is locked out, the administrator must release the lockout.
• To log out from the machine, press [Logout] at the top right on the screen, and then press [OK].
Logging In Using an IC Card
Hold an IC card over the card reader inside the control panel. If the card is not registered on the
machine, enter the authentication information and register the card.
1. Hold an IC card over the card reader.
DZB640
• When the card is registered on the machine, login operation finishes.

• When the card is not registered, the registration screen is displayed. Proceed to the next step
to register the card.
2. Enter the Login User Name and Login Password, and then press [Register].
3. Hold the IC card over the card reader again.
• To log out, hold the IC card over the card reader or press [Logout] at the top right on the screen.
• If another user holds the IC card over the card reader while you are still logged in, you are
automatically logged out and the new user logs in.
Logging In Using a Mobile Device
Log in to the machine using the RICOH Smart Device Connector app on your mobile device. You need a
mobile device that supports Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE).
1. Enable the Bluetooth function on your mobile device.
50
2. Start the RICOH Smart Device Connector application on the mobile device, and then flick
left or right to display the login screen.
3. Press [NEXT].
4. Display the login screen on the control panel of the machine, and hold the mobile device
over the Bluetooth label.
• To log out from the machine, hold the mobile device over the Bluetooth label on the control panel
or press [Logout] at the top right on the screen.
51
1. Getting Started
• If another user holds a mobile device over the card reader while you are still logged in, you are
automatically logged out and the new user logs in.
Authenticating Using the User Code
When User Code Authentication is specified as the authentication method on the machine, enter the user
code before operating an application.
1. Enter the user code, and then press [OK].
DZC193
• When you finish the operation of the application, press [Energy Save] ( ) or press and hold
[Reset] to release the authentication status.
Changing the Login Password
When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is configured on the

machine, change the password periodically to prevent use of the machine by an unauthorized person.
Passwords can contain the following characters. Make the password difficult to guess.
• Uppercase letters: A to Z (26 characters)
• Lowercase letters: a to z (26 characters)
• Numbers: 0 to 9 (10 characters)
• Symbols: (space) ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~ (33 characters)
1. Log in to the machine.

2. Press [Address Book] on the Home screen.
52
3. Select the login user from the address book, and then press [Edit].
EDN012
4. Press the [User Management / Others] tab [User Management].

5. Enter the new login password, and then press [OK] twice.
D0C9PA5256
You can enter up to 128 characters.

6. After completing the procedure, press [Home] ( ).
53
1. Getting Started
Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass

Use the exposure glass to scan originals that cannot be placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), such
as books and license cards.
• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure glass. Your
hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury.
• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. The cover of the ADF might open and cause injury. The ADF, or its
hinges may also become damaged.
1. Lift the ADF.

Lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees to detect the document size automatically when placing an
original on the exposure glass.
2. Place the original face down and aligned to the mark on the upper left corner of the scan
area.
D0C9IA5905
page 193 "Recommended Original Size and Weight"

See "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select", User Guide (Full Version).
3. Lower the ADF.
• You can set a book or object that is less than 20 mm (0.79 inches) thick. A book or object that is
thicker than 20 mm (0.79 inches) cannot be set.
• When you place a thick book or three-dimensional original on the exposure glass and lower the
ADF, the back side of the ADF rises up to accommodate the original.
54
Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass
D0C9IA5906
• Do not open or close the ADF with your hands placed in the space between the ADF and exposure
glass.
D0C9IA5907
55
1. Getting Started
Placing an Original in the Auto Document

Feeder (ADF)
The ADF automatically scans multiple sheets of originals or two-sided originals at one time.
• For details about the sizes of originals that you can place in the ADF, see the following:
page 193 "Recommended Original Size and Weight"
See "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select", User Guide (Full Version).
• If the originals described below are placed in the ADF, it may cause misfeeds, white lines, or black
lines, or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals on the exposure glass.
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with adhesive tape, glue or paste stuck to them
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon
paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin or highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as transparencies or translucent paper
See "Printing Documents in Order of Priority", User Guide (Full Version).
• When loading an original written by pencil on the ADF, the original may be dirty from by being
scraped.
• Correct an original that tends to curl before setting on the machine.
• Take care so that multiple originals do not stick to each other and are not fed at once.
• Do not set an original that is wet with correcting fluid or ink. The scanning glass will be stained and
the stain will be scanned with the original.
56
Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
1. Adjust the original guide to the original size.
D0C9IA5909
2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF).
Place the originals with the first page facing up.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple papers do not stick to each other and are not fed at
once.
Do not stack the originals beyond the limit mark.
D0C9IA0904
• To scan originals larger than A4 or 81/2 × 11 size, pull out the ADF's extender on the original
output tray, and then raise the stopper.
D0C9IA5911
57
1. Getting Started
58
2. Copy
Basic Procedure for Copying Documents

Set the original on the exposure glass or Auto Document Feeder (ADF) to make a copy.
• If the previous setting is still active, press [Reset] before copying.
1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.
2. Place the original.

See "Setting an Original on the Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).
3. Press [Original Size] on the Copy screen and specify the size of your original.
If the key is not found, select it from [Original Setting].

page 62 "Specifying Original Sizes"
4. Select the color mode.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] in [Quantity] to specify the number of copies.
DZC207
You can enter this using the keyboard after pressing [Quantity] or a number.
59
2. Copy
6. Press the paper tray select key to select a paper tray to use.
• When paper runs out, the machine selects another tray that is loaded with paper of the same
size as the setting of the current tray and resumes copying. If you do not want to use other
trays when paper runs out, set the machine so it does not automatically select other trays.
• To prevent the machine from selecting other trays automatically, disable auto tray switching.
See "Tray/Paper Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
7. Press [Start].
• When the [Check the orientation of the original every time after pressing [Start]] check box is
selected in [Select the original's orientation], the screen below is displayed. Select the original
orientation as necessary. If you do not need to select this each time, clear the check box.
• When you place the original on the ADF, the process of copying the original starts.
• When you place the original on the exposure glass, the copy process starts according to the
setting contents. To make a copy of the second page or back side of the original, place the
original accordingly on the exposure glass, and then press [Start]. Press [Finish Scn] after
scanning all originals if necessary according to the setting contents.
• Originals scanned when no paper is loaded or when an error has occurred will be copied
automatically when the machine is ready to execute copying.
Reserving a Copy Job While Executing Another Copy Job
When [Reserve] is displayed on the execution screen of the current copy job, you can scan the original
of another copy job to execute after the current job is completed (Job Preset).
You can make reservations for up to eight jobs each in the Copier and Document Server functions.
60
Basic Procedure for Copying Documents
1. Press [Reserve] on the execution screen of a copy job.
D0C9PA5324
2. Place a new original to scan on the machine.

See "Placing an Original on the Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).
3. Specify 2 sided, Combine, Sort, and other copy settings if necessary.
page 69 "Duplex Copying"
page 71 "Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper"
page 76 "Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number"
4. Press [Reserve Start].
The machine starts scanning the placed original.
After the current copy job is completed, the reserved copy job starts automatically.
• To delete the reserved job or preview its image on the screen, press [Job Confirmation].
61
2. Copy
Specifying Original Sizes

The size of originals can be specified by the following three methods:
• Using the paper tray settings
• Selecting regular sizes
• Specifying custom sizes
• If you do not specify the size of the originals, the machine determines that the size of the original is
the same as that of the paper loaded in the currently selected tray.
Using Paper Tray Settings
The machine scans the originals based on the size and orientation of the paper loaded in the selected
tray.
2. Press the paper tray select key on the Copy screen, and then select the tray loaded with
paper whose size and orientation is the same as the original.
3. Press [Original Size].

4. Press [Use Paper Tray Settings].
Selecting a Regular Size for the Original
To copy a regular size original, select the size of the originals from the regular sizes.
62
Specifying Original Sizes

3. Press [Regular Size].
4. Select the size of original.
Specifying a Custom Size for the Original
To copy a custom size original, specify the horizontal and vertical sizes of the original in numeric values.
1. Measure the vertical (Y) and horizontal (X) lengths of the original.
X
X
Y Y
DZB577

4. Press [Custom Size].
63
2. Copy
5. Enter the values of X and Y that you measured in Step 1.
64
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies

You can enlarge or reduce the original when copying with the following methods:
• Enlarging or reducing at a specified reduction ratio or into a specified size (Zoom/Reduce/
Enlarge/Size Magnification)
• Enlarging or reducing according to the paper size (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)
• Reducing slightly (Create Margin)
Specifying a Copy Ratio or Size

The base point of reduce/enlarge is different for the exposure glass and Auto Document Feeder
(ADF) as shown in the following table:
Setting position Base point Enlarge Reduce
Enlarged or reduced from the

top left.
Exposure glass
DZB222
Enlarged or reduced from the

bottom left
DZB224 DZB225
Auto Document
Feeder (ADF)
DZB223
65
2. Copy
When you place two-sided originals in the ADF, the top right corner of the original will be the base
point for the enlargement/reduction of the reverse side. To enlarge or reduce from the same point,
set the original on the exposure glass and perform 2-sided copy.

4. Press [Copy Ratio] and select a copy ratio or size.
To specify a copy ratio or size other than the displayed setting, press [Others] and perform the
following procedure.
Specifying a copy ratio (Zoom/Reduce/Enlarge)
Enter a value or select the copy ratio.
D0C9PA5320
Specifying a size (Size Magnification)

Press [Specify Copy Size] and enter the length of the original and copied image.
5. Press [Start].
• You can change the options of the copy ratio that is displayed on the Copy screen when pressing
[Copy Ratio]. You can also change the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear when [Copy
Ratio] [Others] is pressed on the Copy screen.
• See "Reduce / Enlarge", User Guide (Full Version).
66
Enlarging or Reducing According to the Paper Size
The original is enlarged or reduced to fit on the specified paper size (Scale to Paper Size)
DZB236


4. On the Copy screen, press [Copy Ratio], and then [Fit to Paper Size].
67
2. Copy
5. Select the tray loaded with the paper to use.

When the orientations of the original and paper in the paper tray do not match, the machine
rotates the copied image automatically. To reduce an original of A4 (81/2 × 11) size to A5 (51/2
× 81/2) size, for example, you can select either A5 (51/2 × 81/2) or A5 (51/2 × 81/2) .
DZB240
6. Press [Start].
Reducing Slightly to Increase the Margins
The original is reduced to 93% in size and printed in the center of the paper. This setting is useful if you
want to copy an original to a paper of the same size without the edges being slightly cropped when
copied in full size or to increase the margins.

3. On the Copy screen, press [Create Margin].
If the key is not displayed, register [Create Margin], by using [Customize Function: Copy (Standard
Mode)] or [Customize Function: Copy (All View Mode)].
See "Others (Copier / Document Server Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Start].
• You can change the copy ratio of [Create Margin] to a value other than 93%.
• See "Reduce / Enlarge", User Guide (Full Version).
68
Duplex Copying
Duplex Copying
You can copy two 1-sided pages or one 2-sided page onto the front and back sides of a single sheet of
paper.
DZB251
The size of the original that can be copied differs from that of the 1-sided copy.
page 273 "List of Specifications"
2. On the Copy screen, press [1 sided 2 sided] or [2 sided 2 sided].
Duplex Copying with the Settings Other Than Those Displayed on the Keys
1. On the Copy screen, press [2 Sided/Combine].
2. Press [2 Sided/Combine].
3. Specify the original and print side settings.
69
2. Copy
DZC252
• Original Direction: Specify the orientation to place the originals.

• Original Setting: Specify the condition of the originals to copy (1 sided/2 sided
(page opening direction)).
• Print Side Setting: Select the finish from [Open to Right/Left] or [Open to Top].
4. Press [OK].
4. Press [Start].
When placing the originals on the exposure glass, press [Finish Scn] after scanning all of the
originals if necessary according to the setting contents and number of originals.
• You can specify the margins when copying a 1-sided original onto both sides of paper.
• See "Edit / Stamp", User Guide (Full Version).
• You cannot use the duplex copy function when the following paper types are selected:
• Label Paper
• Envelope
• OHP (Transparency)
• Waterproof Paper
• Coated Paper
• You can change the setting contents of the two-sided copy key on the Copy screen.
• See "Others (Copier / Document Server Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).
• Use the [Series] function to copy the front and back sides of a two-sided original onto one side of a
sheet page by page.
• See "Copying Facing Pages of a Book Type Original or Two-sided Original", User Guide (Full
Version).
70
Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper
Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original

onto a Single Sheet of Paper
You can copy multiple sheets in an original onto one side or both sides of a sheet of paper to save
paper.
1 2 3
3
2 3
1 1
2 DZB253
The arrangement of copied pages and copy ratio varies depending on the original orientation and
combined pages.
Original Orientation Combine 2 pages Combine 4 pages Combine 8 pages
1
4
1 2
8
1
DZB256 DZB257 DZB258

DZB254
1
1
4
2
1
DZB255 8
DZB259 DZB260 DZB261
2. On the Copy screen, press [1sided Comb 2orig].
To combine with the settings other than those displayed on the keys
1. On the Copy screen, press [2 Sided/Combine].
2. Press [2 Sided/Combine].
71
2. Copy
3. Specify about the original, print side, and combining.
• Original Direction: Specify the orientation to place the originals.

• Original Setting: Specify the condition of the originals to copy (1 sided/2 sided
(page opening direction)).
• Print Side Setting: Specify the condition of the copied sheet (1 sided/2 sided (page
opening direction)).
• Combine Settings: Specify the number of pages to combine on one side of a sheet.
3. Press the paper tray select key and select the paper to use.
4. Place an original.
To position the right-page first and then the left page when copying an original written
longitudinally, place the original upside down in the ADF.
Example: Combining 2 Pages
Orientation Results
1
2
3
4
2 1
4 3
DZB263
DZB262
5. Press [Start].
When placing the originals on the exposure glass, press [Finish Scn] after scanning all of the
originals if necessary according to the number of originals.
72
Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper
• The minimum copy ratio in the Combine function is 25%. For example, if you copy an A4 (81/2 ×
11)-size original onto A5 (51/2 × 81/2)-size paper with [4 Pages], the copy ratio becomes less
than 25% and parts of the image might not be copied.
• You can configure the following settings in [Settings] [Copier / Document Server Settings] [2
Sided / Combine]:
• [Copy Order in Combine]: The order of combined images
• [Separation Line in Combine]: The separation line between combined pages
See "2 Sided / Combine", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can configure the following settings in [Settings] [Copier / Document Server Settings]
[Edit / Stamp]:
• [Erase Original Shadow in Combine]: Determine whether to erase the boundary margin
around each original to maintain the margin
See "Edit / Stamp", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can change the setting contents of the Combine key on the Copy screen.
• See "Others (Copier / Document Server Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).
73
2. Copy
Copying Onto Envelopes

To copy onto envelopes, load them in the bypass tray.
• The Duplex Copy function cannot be used for envelopes. If Duplex Copy is specified, press the key
to cancel the setting.
2. Place the envelope in the bypass tray with the copying side face down.
page 189 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
The [Bypass Tray Paper Settings] screen is displayed.
3. Press [Change Setting].

4. Select [Envelope], and then proceed to the next screen.
To change the envelope weight, press [ChngThickness] to specify the weight.

5. Select the size of the envelope that you have placed in the bypass tray, and then press
[OK].
When you select [Custom Size], enter the envelope size. Measure the size of the envelope with its
flap closed.
74
Copying Onto Envelopes
D0C9IA1201
6. Confirm the settings in the [Bypass Tray Paper Settings] screen, and then press [OK].
7. Place the original on the exposure glass.
page 189 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
8. Press [Start].
75
2. Copy
Copying in Page Order or for Each Page

Number
When copying two or more copies of multi-page originals, you can specify the page order as described
below.
Sort
Copies in the order of the original.
3 3
1 2 3 2 2
1 1
DZB241
Stack
Groups together copies of each page in a multi-page original. You can set the stack function only
when you are using IM C400SRF.
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
DZB242

3. Press [Sort/Stack] on the Copy screen.
If the key is not displayed, select it from [Finishing].

When you are using IM C300, IM C300F, or IM C400F, only [Sort] is displayed on the key.
76
Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number
4. Select the function to specify.
5. Press [Start].
When selecting [Sort] and placing an original on the exposure glass, a single set of copies is
made. After scanning all of the originals, press [Finish Scn] to copy the rest of the sets.
• When you are using IM C400SRF, the sets of printouts are shifted as they are output.
• You can change the action to perform when paper or memory runs out during sorting under
[Memory Full Auto Scan Restart].
• See "Finishing", User Guide (Full Version).
77
2. Copy
78
3. Fax
Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes

The machine scans an original to transmit it by fax into the machine's memory before establishing a
communication with the destination (Memory Transmission).
You can also transmit a fax while confirming the status of the fax destination.
See "Sending a Fax While Scanning the Original", User Guide (Full Version).
• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
1. Press [Fax] on the Home screen.
2. Check that [Fax] and [Memory Transmission] are displayed on the fax screen.
DZC300
3. Place the original in the ADF or on the exposure glass.

See "Setting an Original to Send by Fax on the Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Settings], and then specify the scan settings.
See "Sending a Fax at the Image Quality Suitable for the Original", User Guide (Full Version).
79
3. Fax
5. Specify the destination.
DZC301
• To enter the fax number manually, select the destination from the destination history, or search
for the destination in the address book, press , and specify the destination.
DZC302
You can select only the destination entered using the numeric keypad from the history.
• To specify the destination again, press .
DZC303
6. On the [Settings] screen, specify the [Sender] as necessary.

• When a login user is operating the machine, the login user becomes the sender.
To receive a transmission result by e-mail, select [Email Transmission Results]. The e-mail
address that you selected the [Register as both a destination and a sender] check box when
registering the address will be used as the e-mail address of the sender.
See "Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).
• To print the sender's name on the page received at the destination, select [Stamp Sender
Name].
80
Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes
• If the Auto Specify Sender Name function is enabled, the sender is automatically specified
and you can omit the procedure for specifying a sender.
7. Press [Start].
To cancel transmission after scanning the original, press [Stop] and operate in [Job Status]
[Transmission Standby File].
See "Confirming and Handling a Document in the Fax Queue", User Guide (Full Version).
• If the telephone line you are connected to requires time to connect to the public line after you dial
the external number, enter a [Pause] after entering the number to specify the time to wait before
dialing the number. The machine pauses for about two seconds for each single [Pause] entered.
• To use tone-dialing in a pulse-dialing environment, press [Tone]. A tone signal is generated for
every number you enter afterward.
• You can perform Immediate transmission only when the total number of destinations specified for
all documents exceeds the maximum value.
• The communication that has been initiated first is displayed on the screen when performing three
simultaneous communications.
81
3. Fax
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book

By registering the destinations to which you frequently send faxes together with the send conditions in the
address book, you can easily send faxes.
Registering a Fax Number and Send Conditions
2. Press [Register] on the Address Book screen.
EDN022
3. Enter the information of the destination on the [Name] tab, and then select a title to
classify it.
4. Press [Destinations] tab [Fax].
82
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book
5. Specify the Fax Destinations and send conditions.
• Select Line: Select the line to use.

• International Transmission Mode: Specify whether to reduce errors occurring when sending
abroad.
• Fax Header: Select the name of the sender printed on the reception sheet of the destination.
Register the fax header in advance.
See "Printing the Destination Name, Fax Header, and Standard Message on the Fax
Received at the Destination", User Guide (Full Version).
• Label Insertion: Specify the name (title + name) and fixed phrase printed on the reception
sheet of the destination.
See "Printing the Destination Name, Fax Header, and Standard Message on the Fax
Received at the Destination", User Guide (Full Version).
6. Press the [User Management / Others] tab, and specify the required settings.
• User Management: Enter the authentication information to login and use the machine.
• Registration Destination Group: Select a group to which this destination belongs as necessary.
Register the group in advance.
See "Registering Groups in the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).
• Display Priority: When the destinations are sorted in the order of priority, a destination with
higher priority is displayed prior to that with lower priority. The destinations with the same
priority are displayed in the order of registration.
• Destination Protection: Select this check box to require entering of the protection code to
select the destination.
See "Using the Protection Function to Prevent the Misuse of Addresses", User Guide (Full
Version).
7. Press [OK].
8. After completing the procedure, press [Home] ( ).
83
3. Fax
Changing/Deleting the Registered Data Such as Fax Number
If you delete the destination used for the personal box, file transmission will fail. Exclude the destination
from the personal box before deleting it.
2. Select the destination to change or delete on the Address Book screen.
EDN013
You can delete multiple destinations at one time.

3. Press [Edit] or [Delete] to change or delete the destination information.
4. When changing or deleting is complete, press [Home] ( ).
84
Displaying a Preview before Sending a Fax
Displaying a Preview before Sending a Fax

You can display the preview of the scanned document on the display of the machine to check if it is
scanned as specified.
This function cannot be used when sending a fax while using any of the following:
• Immediate Transmission
• On-hook dialing
• Manual dialing
To display the preview in the correct orientation, specify the [Original Orientation] in [Settings] correctly.
2. Place the original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure glass.
3. On the fax screen, press [Settings] [Original Orientation] to specify the orientation of
the original, and then press [Preview].
4. Configure the scan settings.

5. Specify the destination on the fax screen, and then press [Start].
6. Check the preview.
85
3. Fax
• Flick the image left or right to switch between the pages.

• Pinch in or out on the image to zoom in or out.
7. Press [Transmit].
To cancel transmission and perform the procedure from scanning the original again, press
[Cancel].
86
Viewing the Transmission Result of Sent Faxes

You can check the result of a fax transmission on the fax screen, in various reports, or on the screen of a
computer.
The following reports are printed according to the transmission result or the settings:
• Communication Result Report: The result of Memory Transmission is printed.
• Immediate TX Result Report: The result of Immediate Transmission is printed.
• Communication Failure Report: This report is printed when a fax could not be sent to all specified
destinations by Memory Transmission.
• Error Report: This report is printed when sending a fax by Immediate Transmission failed.
• Memory Storage Report: This report is printed when the scanned document could not be stored in
the memory.
• The fax transmission results can also be confirmed in Records.

• See "Viewing the History of Sent and Received Faxes", User Guide (Full Version).
• Specify [Notification of Results] when sending a fax to receive the transmission result by e-mail.
• See "Checking by E-mail", User Guide (Full Version).
Confirming the Information on the Fax Screen
Press [Job Status] [Transmission Result] on the fax screen to view the information.
2. Press [Job Status] on the fax screen.
DZC304
87
3. Fax
3. Press [Transmission Result], and select the transmission result to display.
• Display All
Displays the transmission results from among the total number of both transmission and
reception results, which cannot exceed 1,000.
• Display per User
Press this to display the result of transmissions performed by a specific user. Select the user to
display the results and press [Display].
• Display Specified Period
Press this to display the result of transmissions performed in the specified period. Specify the
period by entering the start and end dates or selecting from the calendar displayed on the
screen, and press [Display].
4. Check the transmission results and press [Exit].
• "--LAN-Fax -->" is shown as the result of transmission to the machine when you send a fax
from your computer. For the result of transmission to the destination, refer to the transmission
result of the same document number.
• The destination may be displayed as "*" depending on the security settings.
• In a field for an e-mail that was encrypted and distributed or forwarded, the encryption icon
( ) is displayed.
• To display the result of the transmission that is completed while displaying the transmission
results, close the transmission result screen and open it again.
• You cannot confirm or change an outgoing document in LAN-Fax, document waiting, or document
whose status is "Trnsmtg.".
Checking the Result in Communication Result Report
In the factory default setting, the machine is configured not to print the report automatically. Specify Auto
Print to print the report every time you send a document by Memory Transmission. When more than one
destination is specified, the report is printed after transmitting the fax to all destinations is completed.
88
To configure auto print, select bit number [0] under switch number [03], and change the current value to
"1".
See "Changing the Parameter Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
Checking the Result in Immediate TX Result Report
In the factory default setting, the machine is configured not to print the report automatically. Specify Auto
Print to print it every time you send a document by Immediate Transmission.
To configure Auto Print, select bit number [5] under switch number [03], and change the current value to
"1".
• If the page was sent successfully, the Page column gives the total number of pages sent
successfully.
Checking the Result in Communication Failure Report
This report is printed if the fax could not be sent to all specified destinations by Memory Transmission
when Fax is not set to Auto Print (the factory default setting).
Checking the Result in Error Report
This report is printed if a fax could not be sent by Immediate Transmission when Immediate Transmission
Result Report is not set to Auto Print (the factory default setting).
Viewing Memory Storage Report
Memory Storage Report is printed when the document to send by Memory Transmission could not be
stored in the memory. If you want to, print the report as a record, and print it even if the document was
stored correctly.
To print the Memory Storage Report every time a document is stored in the memory, select bit number
[2] under switch number [03], and change the current value to "1".
• Even if the machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an original could not be
stored.
89
3. Fax
• It is not printed when you are using Parallel Memory Transmission.
Checking by E-mail
You can check the fax transmission result on your computer by sending an e-mail to the sender or the e-
mail address specified when sending the fax. The image of the original sent by fax, along with the
destination, date and time, and transmission result is included in the e-mail.
• To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character width in your e-mail
application's settings.
2. Place the original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure glass.
3. To send a notification e-mail to the sender, press [Settings] [Sender], and then specify
the sender.
When a login user is operating the machine, the login user becomes the sender.
The e-mail address that you selected for the [Use as Sender] check box when registering the
address will be used as the e-mail address of the sender.
4. Select the [Notification of Result] check box.
DZX317
90
5. To send a notification e-mail to a destination other than the sender, press [Notification of
Result] on the [Settings] screen, and then specify the destination of the e-mail.
6. Configure the scan settings.

7. After configuring the send settings, specify the destination on the fax screen, and send the
fax.
page 79 "Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes"
See "Basic Procedure for Sending Internet Faxes", User Guide (Full Version).
See "Basic Procedure for Sending IP-Faxes", User Guide (Full Version).
Confirming the Information in Web Image Monitor
In Web Image Monitor, you can view up to 1,000 of the latest total results of the transmission and
reception history.
1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as the administrator.

See "Logging in to Web Image Monitor", User Guide (Full Version).
2. From the "Status/Information" menu, click [Job].
3. Click [Transmission] under [Fax History].
4. Confirm the transmission history.
• Click [Details] to view the details.
• To save the history as a list to a file in the CSV format, click [Download Transmission List].
5. Click [Logout] and then close the Web browser.
91
3. Fax
92
4. Print
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device

Software Manager Installer
Device Software Manager is a support utility for driver installation in Windows. Device Software
Manager helps you to detect the latest driver via the internet automatically according to the computer
you are using and install it with a simple procedure.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• Device Software Manager supports Windows OS only. To install the printer driver on Mac OS, see
the following sections:
• page 110 "Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)"
• See "Installing the Printer Driver for USB Connection (macOS)", User Guide (Full Version).
• Follow the instructions of the installer to connect the USB cable.
Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM
1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer.

If the installer does not start automatically, double-click [Setup.exe] in the root directory of the CD-
ROM.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].
93
4. Print
3. Click [Install Online].
DZX615
4. Click [Accept Agreement and Install] on the [License Agreement] screen.

5. On the [Quality Improvement Program] screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
6. On the [Driver Update Notification Setting] screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
7. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].
DZX730
• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.
94
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer
• USB: Following the instructions on the [Connection with device] screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
8. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].
DZC086
The installation of the driver starts.

• If "Could not verify publisher" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue the
installation. There is no problem with the started installer that is downloaded from the
manufacturer's website. Continue the installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.
If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.
95
4. Print
9. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.
• After completing the installation, Device Software Manager icon is created on the desktop screen.
• You can update the installed printer driver with Device Software Manager.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", User Guide (Full Version).
• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File
1. Double-click the downloaded file.

2. Select [I accept the agreement] on the [License Agreement] screen, and then click [Install].
3. On the [Quality Improvement Program] screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
4. On the [Driver Update Notification Setting] screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
5. After completing the installation, select the [Run Driver Installer] check box, and then click
[Finish].
The installation of Install Online is complete. Next, install the printer driver.
6. On the [End User License Agreement] screen, click [Agree and Go to Next].
96
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer
7. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].
DZX730
• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.

• USB: Following the instructions on the [Connection with device] screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
DZC086
The installation of the driver starts.

• If "The publisher could not be verified" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue
the installation. There is no problem with the started installer that is downloaded from the
manufacturer's website. Continue the installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.
97
4. Print
If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.
• Double-click the Device Software Manager icon created on the Finder of the computer to update
the printer driver.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", User Guide (Full Version).
98
Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (Windows)
Installing the Printer Driver for Network

Connection (Windows)
When the machine and the computer are connected to the same network, the installer searches for the
machine to install the printer driver. If the installer cannot find the machine, specify the IP address or
machine name to install the printer driver.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the [Windows Security] dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].
Installing the PCL 6 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM

ROM.
3. Click [Install from Disk].
DZC992
4. Click [Network Printer(s)].
99
4. Print
5. On the [License Agreement] screen, select [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
DZC081
6. Confirm the [Confirm Network Connection] screen, and then click [Next].
The search detects devices connected to the network.
7. Select this machine from among the devices, and then click [Install].
DZC080
8. If the [Set Port] screen is displayed, select the setting method of the port.
This screen is displayed when the computer cannot access the machine.
Specify the port to use for the connection between the computer and machine using one of the
following methods:
100
To specify the IP address

1. Enter the IP address of the machine, and then click [Next].
2. Proceed to Step 9.
To select from the port list
1. Select the port to use for the connection between the computer and machine, and then
click [Next].
2. Proceed to Step 9.
To create a new port
1. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next].
2. On the [Add Printer and Utility Wizard] screen, select [Standard TCP/IP Port] and click
[Next].
3. On the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] screen, click [Next].
4. On the [Add port] screen, enter the printer name or IP address of the machine, and then
click [Next].
The port name is automatically entered. You can change the port name.
5. When the [Additional port information required] screen is displayed, select [RICOH
Network Printer C model], and then click [Next].
6. Click [Finish].
9. Specify the name of the printer to install, and whether to use it as the default printer.
10. Click [Continue].

Printer driver installation starts.
101
4. Print
11. Click [Finish].

appear.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM

ROM.
3. Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
DZC990
4. On the [License Agreement] screen, select [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
DZC081
5. Click [Next].
102
6. Select a method to connect a port.
Specify the port to use for the connection between the computer and machine using one of the
following methods:
To specify the IP address
1. Enter the IP address of the machine, and then click [Next].
To select from the port list
1. Select the port to use for the connection between the computer and machine, and then
click [Next].
To create a new port
1. Select [Specify a new port], and then click [Next].
2. On the [Add Printer and Utility Wizard] screen, select [Standard TCP/IP Port] and click
[Next].
3. On the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] screen, click [Next].
4. On the [Add port] screen, enter the printer name or IP address of the machine, and then
click [Next].
The port name is automatically entered. You can change the port name.
5. When the [Additional port information required] screen is displayed, select [RICOH
Network Printer C model], and then click [Next].
6. Click [Finish].
103
4. Print
7. Select the [Printer Name] of the machine to open the menu tree, and then specify the
setting items.
8. Click [Continue].
9. On the [Install Printer Driver] screen, click [Open Printer Properties].
10. Specify the option configuration or authentication settings in each tab, and then click
[OK].
11. On the [Install Printer Driver] screen, click [Next].
12. Click [Finish].
appear.
Installing the PCL 6/PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the Downloaded File
1. Unzip the downloaded file, and then double-click [RV_SETUP.exe].

2. On the [End User License Agreement] screen, select [Agree], and then click [Next].
104
3. Select [Network], and then click [Next].
DZX731
• The search detects devices connected to the network.

• If the error screen is displayed, see page 106 "If the Machine Cannot Be Found".
DZC086

Installing the Printer Driver for Windows
1. Download the driver, and then unzip the file.
105
4. Print
2. Display the [Devices and Printers] screen.

Windows 10
1. While holding down the [Windows] key on the keyboard, press the [R] key.
2. On the [Run] screen, enter [control], and then click [OK].
3. Click [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8.1
1. While holding down the [Windows] key on the keyboard, press the [X] key.
2. Click [Control Panel].
3. Click [Devices and Printers].
Windows 7
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
3. Click [Add a printer].
4. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
5. Select [Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings], and then click [Next].
6. Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] on [Create a new port:], and then click [Next].
7. Enter the IP address of this machine in [Host Name or IP address].
8. Clear the [Query the printer and automatically select the driver to use] check box, and
then click [Next].
Searching for the TCP/IP port starts.
9. Click [Have Disk...] [Browse...] to specify the driver (INF file), and then click [OK].
The driver is stored in the [DISK1] folder in the folder that was created when unzipping the
downloaded file.
10. Select a printer driver to install, and then click [Next].
11. Enter the printer name as necessary, and then click [Next].
12. Specify the printer as a shared printer as necessary, and then click [Next] [Finish].
If the Machine Cannot Be Found
The [Network Connection Error] screen is displayed.
106
Confirm and perform to , and then click [OK]. If the machine still cannot be found, specify the IP
address or machine name to install the printer driver.
1. Click [Click if you cannot find the device].
DZC089
2. Select [Specify device IP address] or [Specify device name], and then click [Next].
When specify the machine IP address
1. Enter the IP address of the machine and click [Search].
107
4. Print
DZC091
2. When the machine is detected, click [Next].

When specify the machine name
1. Select the machine to use, and then click [Next].
DZC094
2. On the [Printer Preference] screen, select one of the port names from among "Port
Name", and then click [Next].
108
DZC950

For details about the procedure for specifying the IP address after installing the printer
driver, see the following section:
See "When You Cannot Print a Document even if the Printer Driver is Installed", User
Guide (Full Version).
109
4. Print
Installing the Printer Driver for Network

Connection (macOS)
Install the PPD file (printer driver) under macOS, and then register the machine on the computer from the
system preferences.
• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network
administrator.
• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see the "Readme.htm" file,
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
• Setting procedures using macOS 10.14 are shown as an example. The actual procedure may
differ depending on the OS version you are using.
Installing the PPD file
1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer, and click [macOS] (brand name) to display the
[macOS PPD Installer] folder.
To install the driver from the downloaded file, display the folder that is the location of the
downloaded file.
2. Double-click the package file.
DZX684
To install from the CD-ROM, double-click the package file in the [macOS] (brand name)
[macOS PPD Installer] folder.
3. On the [Introduction] screen, click [Continue].
4. On the [License] screen, click [Continue] and then click [Agree].
• When prompted to select where to install the driver, specify the install location, and click
[Continue].
5. Click [Install].
110
Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)
6. Enter the administrator's user name and password, and then click [Install Software].
The installation of the PPD file starts.

7. When the installation is complete, click [Close].
Registering the Machine in [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners]
Register the PPD file of the machine in the system preferences to enable printing.
1. Select [System Preferences...] from the Apple menu.

2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click [+].
DZX689
111
4. Print
4. Click [IP], and configure the information of the machine.
DZX690
• Address: Enter the IP address of the machine.

• Protocol: Select [Line Printer Daemon - LPD]. If the printer takes time to perform operations
when using the [Line Printer Daemon - LPD] protocol, change the protocol to [HP Jetdirect -
Socket].
• Use: Check that the machine name is displayed. If "Generic PostScript Printer" is displayed,
the entered IP address may not be correct.
When "Generic PostScript Printer" is displayed even though the IP address is correct
Perform the following procedure to select the PPD file of the machine:
1. Select [Select Software...] on "Use".
112
DZC098
2. Select the machine on the [Printer Software] screen, and then click [OK].
DZC099
5. Click [Add].
The progress screen is displayed.
• If the progress screen does not close after a while, click [Configure...] or [Settings] and
configure the option configuration of the printer. For the procedure of the option
configuration, see page 114 "Specifying the Option Settings".
113
4. Print
6. Check that the machine name is added to the [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners]
screen.
D0C9DA8351
7. Close the system preferences screen.
Specifying the Option Settings
If the option configuration of the machine is not automatically reflected, select the option installed on the
machine in [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
1. Select [System Preferences...] from the Apple menu.

2. Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the machine from the list, and then click [Options & Supplies...].
D0C9DA8352
114
4. Click [Driver] or [Options], select the option installed on the machine, and then click [OK].
• If the usable options are not displayed, the IP address has not been entered correctly or the
PPD file has not been registered properly. To enter the IP address or register the PPD file, see
page 111 "Registering the Machine in [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners]".
5. Close the system preferences screen.
• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
• Setting procedures using macOS 10.14 are shown as an example. The actual procedure may
differ depending on the OS version you are using.
• To specify an optional Adobe PostScript when using a PostScript 3 printer driver, select [Adobe
PostScript] in the "PostScript:" list on the [Options] tab.
115
4. Print
Basic Procedure for Printing Documents

Specify the printer driver and configure the Document Size, Paper Type, and other settings to print a
document.
• Duplex printing is selected as the default setting. If you want to print on only one side, select [Off]
for the two-sided printing setting.
• If you send a print job via USB 2.0 while the machine is in Sleep mode, an error message may
appear after the print job is completed. In this case, check whether the document was printed.
Printing a Document in Windows
1. Open a document to print on the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu in the application.
The procedure to display a document varies depending on the applications.
For example in Microsoft Word/Excel, click [Print] on the [File] menu, select the device to use, and
then click [Printer Properties].
DZC420
2. Specify the Document Size, Paper Type, Paper Tray, and other settings.
You can configure the basic settings just by using the [Basic] tab.
116
D0C9DA5643
• Job Type: Select [Normal Print] to execute printing immediately.

You can make a partial print as a test and proceed to print the rest of the document (Sample
Print).
See "Making a Partial Print as a Test and Proceeding to Print the Rest of the Document", User
You can store documents in the machine (Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print).
See "Storing Documents to Print in the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
• Document Size: Select the size of the document to print.
• Print On: Select the size of the paper to print on.
• Copies: Enter the print quantity.
• Orientation: Specify the orientation of the document. Select Portrait or Landscape.
• Input Tray: Select the tray loaded with the paper to use. When you select [Auto Tray Select], a
suitable paper tray is selected automatically according to the specified [Print On] and [Paper
Type].
• If you do not want to use particular trays when [Auto Tray Select] is specified, set the
machine so it does not automatically select those trays.
• To prevent the machine from selecting other trays automatically, disable auto tray
switching.
• Paper Type: Select the type of paper to use.
• Color Mode: Select the print color.
You can print in universal color by using the following settings:
117
4. Print
• [Image Quality] tab [Barrier-free Color Management:] [On]

You can configure some advanced settings using the [Input/Output] to [Image Quality] tabs.
D0C9DA5644
The caution icon ( ) indicates that there are disabled items. Click the icon to check the cause.
To set each function in details, click the detail settings button ( ).
3. After completing the configuration, click [OK] to print.
• On the [Devices and Printers] screen, right-click the printer icon of the machine, and then click
[Printing preferences] to change the default values of the printer settings.
• When you use the driver distributed from the print server, [Standard settings] specified in the print
server are displayed as the default.
Printing a Document in macOS
In the following example procedure, macOS 10.14 is used. The procedure may vary for different
versions.
1. Open a document to print on the computer, and click [Print] on the [File] menu.
2. Select the printer you use from [Printer:].
118
3. Specify Paper Size, Orientation, and other settings.
DZC405
• Copies: Enter the print quantity.

• Paper Size: Select the size of the document to print.
• Orientation: Specify the orientation of the document. Select [Portrait] or [Landscape].
4. Select a category from the pop-up menu, and then specify the paper tray and paper type.
D0C9DA8201
Paper Feed
• All Pages From: Select the tray loaded with the paper to use. When you select [Auto
Select], a suitable paper tray is selected automatically according to the specified paper
size and paper type.
When the paper of the specified size is not loaded on the machine, printing is performed
following the settings of the machine.
Printer Features
Select a category in [Feature Sets], and then specify the setting items.
• Basic
119
4. Print
• Color Mode: Select the print color.

• Paper
• Paper Type: Select the type of paper to use.
• Job Log
• Job Type: Select [Normal Print] to execute printing immediately.
You can make a partial print as a test and proceed to print the rest of the document
(Sample Print).
See "Making a Partial Print as a Test and Proceeding to Print the Rest of the
Document", User Guide (Full Version).
You can store documents in the machine (Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print).
5. After completing the configuration, click [Print] to print.
120
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Printing on Both Sides of Paper

Specify 2-sided Print in the printer driver.
Specifying 2-sided Print (Windows)
Specify 2-sided Print on the [Basic] tab.
2. Specify Paper Size, Paper Type, Orientation and others.
page 116 "Basic Procedure for Printing Documents"
3. In [2 sided] on the [Basic] tab, specify the binding side of and way to open the paper.
Orientation of the original and opening type

Orientation Open to left Open to top
Portrait
Landscape
Specifying 2-sided Print (macOS)
Specify 2-sided Print on the [Layout] menu.
2. Specify Paper Size, Orientation, Paper Type, and other settings.
121
4. Print
3. Select the [Two-Sided] check box, and then select [Layout] to specify the binding side and
opening type of the paper.
Orientation of the original and opening type
Long edge Short edge
DZC442
122
Combining and Printing Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet of Paper
Combining and Printing Multiple Pages on a

Single Sheet of Paper
You can print multiple pages on a single sheet at a reduced size (Combine 2 Originals).
For example, you can reduce an original of A4 size to A5 size and print two pages on an A4 sheet. You
can use the 2 Sided Print and Combine 2 Originals functions at the same time to economize on paper.
You can print up to 16 pages on a single sheet and specify the order to arrange the pages on the sheet.
1 2 3
3
2 3
1 1
2 DZB253
Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (Windows)
Specify the Combine 2 Originals function on the [Basic] tab.
2. Specify Paper Size, Paper Type, Orientation and other settings.
3. In [Layout] on the [Basic] tab, specify the number of pages to combine.
Click the detail settings button of [Layout] to do the following settings:
• Page Order: Select the order of the pages.
• Draw Frame Border: Select the check box to draw a line between pages.
When printing from an application that supports the same function as the machine, do not set the
function in the application. If the setting in the application is enabled, the print result may not be as
intended.
Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (macOS)
Specify the Combine 2 Originals function on the [Layout] menu.
123
4. Print
2. Specify Paper Size, Orientation, Paper Type, and other settings.
3. Select [Layout], and then specify the number of pages to combine and the order of the
pages.
Configure the following settings:
• Pages per Sheet: Select the number of pages to combine.
• Layout Direction: Select the order of the pages.
• Border: Select a type of border line to draw between the pages.
124
Printing on Envelopes
Load envelopes in the bypass tray and change the Tray Paper Settings on the Control Panel.
1. Load envelopes in the bypass tray.
D0C9IA7402
Orientation: landscape
Flap: close
Printing surface: lower side
2. On the Home screen, press [Settings].
3. On the Settings screen, press [Tray/Paper Settings].
D0C9PA5323
4. Press [Paper Size/Paper Type].
125
4. Print
5. Press [Bypass Tray] [Paper Size: Printer], and then select the size of the envelopes.
• If the size of the loaded envelope is not included in the list, select [Custom] and enter the
value.
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [Paper Type/Thickness], and then select [Envelope] from [Paper Type].
Also, select the thickness of the loaded envelopes from [Paper Thickness].
8. Press [OK] twice.

9. After completing the configuration, press [Home] ( ).
driver from the print menu application.
11. Specify the paper size and paper type.
Windows
On the [Basic] tab, configure the following settings:
• Document Size: Select the envelope size. If the envelope size is not included among the
options, enter the value in [Custom Paper Size...].
• Input Tray: [Bypass Tray]
• Paper Type: [Envelope]
You can specify a custom paper size, which is commonly used as the option of the Document
Sizes.
See "Printing on Custom-sized Paper Loaded on the Bypass Tray", User Guide (Full Version).
126
macOS
Configure the following settings:
• Paper Size: Select the envelope size. If the envelope size is not included among the
options, select [Manage Custom Sizes] and enter the value.
• Printer Features Paper Paper Type: [Envelope]
• Paper Feed All Pages From: [Bypass Tray]
12. Execute printing.
127
4. Print
Printing Documents Stored in the Printer from

the Control Panel
To print a document stored from the printer driver in the machine, perform the print operation on Quick
Print Release of the control panel. The file administrator also can delete unneeded documents and
unlock documents locked by entering an invalid password.
1. On the Home screen, press [Quick Print Release].
2. On the Quick Print Release screen, select the user ID used to store the document.
Enter the password when the Locked Print documents or the Stored Print documents protected by
passwords are stored. The screen shows the documents corresponding to the entered password
and the documents without passwords.
3. Select a document to print.
• Preview: The first page of the document is displayed. If you select multiple documents, the
preview cannot be displayed.
• Print Settings: Change the print settings for the selected document.
See "Print Settings Configured on the Control Panel", User Guide (Full Version).
• Manage Files: Change the print time of a Hold Print job or the password specified on the
document. If you select multiple documents, [Manage Files] is disabled.
4. Press [Print] twice.
128
Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card Directly
Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or

SD Card Directly
You can connect a memory storage device to the media slot of the machine and print the files stored on
it. Use this to print external data easily.
• Keep SD cards and USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.
• USB flash memory device and SD cards are supported for direct printing. However, certain types
of USB flash memory device and SD cards cannot be used.
• The machine cannot print a document over 1 GB.
• You can select up to 100 files within 1 GB total.
• If the print job of PDF file is canceled, execute printing from a PDF viewer such as Acrobat Reader
while using the printer driver.
Printable File Formats
File format Details
JPEG files Exif version 1.0 or later
Uncompressed TIFF files

TIFF files
TIFF files compressed using the MH, MR, or MMR method
PDF files PDF version 1.7 (Acrobat 8.0 compatible) or earlier*1
XPS files Possible for all XPS files
*1 The machine does not support the following functions: Crypt Filter, DeviceN Color Space (more than eight
components), watermark note, optional contents (version 1.6), AcroForm
• The PDF file of a custom size may not be printed.
129
4. Print
Printing from a Memory Storage Device or Scan Application
1. On the Home screen, press [Print/Scan (Memory Storage Device)]
2. On the Print/Scan (Memory Storage Device) screen, press [Print from Storage Device]
DZX460
3. Insert a memory storage device in the media slot on the side of the control panel.
DZW178
4. Press [USB] or [SD Card].

5. Select the file to print.
Files in the external media are displayed as icons or thumbnail images.
130
Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card Directly
6. Press [Print Settings] to specify the settings of 2-Sided Print or Finishing as necessary.
D0C9PA5646
• Full Color: Select whether to print in color. The machine may print a document that appears to
be black-and-white in color printing mode. To print a document in full black-and-white, select
[Black and White].
• Copy Ratio: Select whether to print in the original size or to reduce or enlarge to match the
paper size.
• Quantity: Enter the print quantity.
• Resolution: Select the resolution of the image to print.
• Select Paper Tray: Select the paper tray.
• 2 Sided: Select the opening direction of the printed sheet.
• Combine: Select whether to combine multiple pages into a sheet.
• Sort/Stack: Select whether to print in ordered sets or in a batch page by page.
• Book: Select the opening direction of the Magazine binding. You can specify the setting of
Magazine binding only when printing a file in the PDF/XPS format.
• Staple: Select the staple position.
7. Press [Start] to start printing.
131
4. Print
132
5. Scan
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned

Data by E-mail
Scan a document and attach the scanned data to an e-mail and send it from the machine.
• Configure the SMTP server and network settings in advance.
See "Configuring the Settings to Send E-mails from the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
• Register an e-mail address in the address book to select the address as the destination easily when
sending an e-mail.
Basic Procedure for Sending an E-mail
• This machine supports SMTPS (SMTP over SSL).

• This machine supports Web mail sending.
• To use Message Disposition Notification, log in to the machine as a user and specify the sender.
Note, however, that the [Reception Notice] notification e-mail may not be transmitted if the e-mail
software of the recipient does not support Message Disposition Notification.
• If you press [Preview] and then start scanning, the Preview screen appears. You can use this screen
to check how the originals are scanned and the scan setting used for scanning. After checking the
preview, you can specify whether to send the file or not.
• See "Displaying a Preview Before Sending the Scanned Document", User Guide (Full Version).
• After an e-mail is sent, the destination, sender, subject, text, and file name fields will be
automatically cleared. If you want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local
dealer.
1. Press [Scanner] on the Home screen.
133
5. Scan
2. Select [Scan to Email] on the scanner screen.
DZC504
3. Place the original on the scanner.

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen.
5. Press [Sender] and specify the sender.
• When a logged in user is operating the machine, the logged in user becomes the sender.
• When [On] is specified in [System Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email] [Auto
Specify Sender Name], you can send an e-mail even when the sender is not specified. The
administrator's e-mail address that is registered on the machine is used as the sender.
• Specify the sender to receive an opening confirmation.
6. Select the [Reception Notice] check box to receive an opening confirmation of the e-mail
from the destination.
7. Specify the destination on the scanner screen.
DZC505
• To enter the e-mail address manually, select the destination from the destination history, or
search for the destination in the address book, press , and specify the destination.
134
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data by E-mail
DZC506
• Press to specify the destination again or select [To], [Cc] or [Bcc].
DZC507
• You can specify multiple destinations.

• If the target destination does not appear, display the destination by selecting its initial letter
from the title.
• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.
8. Specify the scan settings according to the purpose of the scanned data.
page 150 "Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density"
page 153 "Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document"
9. Press [Start].
Registering the E-mail Destination Specified When Sending an E-mail in the

Address Book
When specifying an e-mail address by entering it manually or selecting it from the scanner records, you
can register the e-mail address in the address book before sending an e-mail.
135
5. Scan
2. Select [Scan to Email] on the scanner screen.
DZC504

4. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen and configure the scan settings according to
the purpose of the scanned data.
5. Specify the destination.
• When entering manually
1. Press and then select [Enter Using Keyboard].
DZC510
2. Enter the e-mail address, and press .
DZC511
3. Specify the e-mail address that was entered manually and press [Reg. to Add. Book].
136
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data by E-mail
DZC512
4. Enter the name and other additional information.

• When selecting from the transmission history
1. Press and then select [Select from History].
DZC513
2. Press [Register] of the destination to register.

3. Register the name and other additional information.
6. Press [OK] to close the address book screen after registering the information.
7. Press [Start] on the scanner screen.
137
5. Scan
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned

Data to a Folder
To send the data of a scanned original to a shared folder on a computer, create the shared folder on the
computer in advance and register the destination folder in the address book.
• You also need to configure the settings for connecting to the network from the machine.
See "Connecting to a Wired LAN", User Guide (Full Version).
See "Connecting to a Wireless LAN", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can add a folder destination in the address book easily using Scan to Folder Helper.
See "Specifying the Destination of Send to Folder Using the Scan to Folder Helper App", User
• Using the SMB 3.0 protocol, you can save a file in the folder that was configured individually to
apply encryption.
• The scanned file can be also saved to an FTP server.
• See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).
Printing the Check Sheet
Print the check sheet below to make a note of the setting values regarding the destination computer.
Check sheet
No. Items to check (example of the setting values) Setting entry column
Computer name
[1] DHCP server enable/disable setting
IP address
138
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder
Check sheet
No. Items to check (example of the setting values) Setting entry column
USERDNSDOMAIN:
Domain name/workgroup name

[2] USERDOMAIN:
Computer login user name
[3] Computer login password
[4] Shared folder name on computer
Confirming the Computer Information (Windows)
Confirm the name, IP address, and other information of the computer used to create a shared folder,
and write down the information on the check list.
1. Click [Start] on the computer and click [Windows System] [Command Prompt].
2. Enter "ipconfig/all" and press the [Enter] key.
3. Check the computer name, enable/disable status of the DHCP server and IP address, and
write down the information in [1] on the check sheet.
DZC501
When the screen shown above is displayed, fill in the sheet as follow:
139
5. Scan
Computer name LAPTOP-5955S09U
[1] DHCP server enable/disable setting No
IP address 192.168.0.152
DZC523
4. Enter "set user" and press the [Enter] key.

Enter a space between "set" and "user".
5. Check the domain name, workgroup name and login user name, and write down the
information in [2] on the check sheet.
CKX007
USERDNSDOMAIN
[ abcd-net.local ]
Domain name/workgroup name
[2] USERDOMAIN
[ ABCD-NET ]
Computer login user name TYamada

DZC524
"USERDNSDOMAIN" is not displayed when the login user who executed the command is a local
user.
6. Check the login password on the computer, and write down the information in [3] on the
check sheet.
The required information on the computer is confirmed. Now create a shared folder on your
computer and specify the access permissions of the folder.
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, it might be possible to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that for greater security you
select a user name that has a password.
Creating a Shared Folder (Windows)
Create a shared folder on the Windows Desktop and specify the access permissions of the folder.
140
• If you are creating a shared folder for the first time on this computer, you must enable the file
sharing function. For details, see Windows Help.
• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address or
computer name, and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the
shared folder.
1. Log on to Windows as a user with administrative privileges.

2. Create a new folder in Windows Explorer and write down the folder name in [4] on the
check sheet.
3. Right-click the created folder, and then click [Properties].
4. On the [Sharing] tab, click [Advanced Sharing].
DZC318
5. Select the [Share this folder] check box, and then click [Permissions].
After completing the procedure, remove Everyone (unspecified user), and then add a user allowed
access the folder. The user whose information is written down on the check sheet is used in the
example shown below.
6. Select [Everyone] under [Group or user names], and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add] [Advanced] [Object Types].
141
5. Scan
8. Select [Users], and then click [OK].
DZC319
9. Click [Locations], select the name of the domain or work group the user belongs to ([2] on
the check sheet) and then click [OK].
10. Click [Find Now].
11. From the Search results, select the login user name of the computer to be added ([2] on
the check sheet) and then click [OK].
When you cannot find a specific user, click [Columns], or right-click the [Search results] field, select
[Select Column], and then add [Logon Name] or [Logon Name (pre-Windows 2000)] from the
[Available columns] list.
12. Click [OK].
13. Select the added user, and then select the [Allow] check box under [Permissions].
DZC320
142
14. Click [OK] to close all windows.

The access permissions on the folder have been successfully configured. If you want to specify
access permissions for the folder to allow other users or groups to access the folder, configure the
folder as follows:
1. Right-click the created folder and then click [Properties].
2. Click [Edit...] on the [Security] tab.
3. Click [Add] [Advanced].
4. Select [Object Types] or [Locations] and click [Find Now].
5. Select the user or group to assign permissions and click [OK].
6. Click [OK].
7. Select the added user, and then select the [Allow] check box under [Permissions].
8. Click [OK] to close all windows.
Confirming the Computer Information (macOS)
Confirm the name of the computer used to create the shared folder, login user name and other settings
and write down the information on the check list.
1. Log on to macOS as a user with administrative privileges.

2. Click the Apple menu.
3. Click [About This Mac].
4. Click [System Report].
5. Click [Software] on the left pane and write down the displayed computer name in [1] and
the user name in [2] on the check sheet.
DZC525
143
5. Scan
[1] Computer name User's MacBook
[2] Computer login user name User

DZC526
6. Click the Apple menu and select [System Preferences].

7. In [Network], click [Ethernet] or [Wi-Fi] and write down the displayed IP address in [1]
on the check sheet.
The required information on the computer is configured. Now create a shared folder.
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, you might be able to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that you select a user name
that has a password.
Creating a Shared Folder (macOS)
Create a shared folder and specify the access permissions of the folder.
1. Create a new folder and write down the folder name in [4] on the check sheet.
2. Click the Apple menu and select [System Preferences].
3. Click [Sharing], select the [File Sharing] check box and then click [Options].
DZC527
144
4. Select the check boxes of [Share files and folders using SMB] and the user account to use
for file sharing and then click [Done].
DZC528
When the [Authentication] screen is displayed, enter the password of the selected account and
then click [Done].
5. Click [ ] below [Shared Folders] on the [Sharing] screen.
DZC529
6. Specify the folder created in Step 1 and click [Add].

7. Select the folder added in Step 6 and confirm that the permission of the user to access the
folder is set to "Read & Write".
DZC530
145
5. Scan
• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address,
and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the shared folder.
Registering the Created Shared Folder in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering a shared folder created in Windows using the
information on the check sheet as an example.
2. Press [Register] on the address book screen.
EDN022
The items displayed on the screen vary depending on the version of RICOH Always Current
Technology that is implemented on the machine.
3. Enter the information of the destination in the input boxes displayed on the [Name] tab,
and select the title to classify the destination.
4. Press the [Destinations] tab, and then press [Folder].

5. Select [SMB (Send to Shared Folder on PC)] in [Protocol].
146
6. Specify the network path to the shared folder in "Path".

Entering the path name manually
If the computer name is "YamadaPC" ([1] on the check sheet) and the shared folder name is
"shared_doc" ([4]), enter as follows:
\\YamadaPC\shared_doc
Selecting a folder from the list
Enter the IP address or host name of the computer on which to search for a shared folder,
press [Browse Network], and then select the destination folder.
7. Under [Folder Authentication Info], select [Specify Other Authentication Information] and
then enter the name and password of the login user who will access the shared folder.
8. Press [Connection Test] [Exit].
When no connection is established, check the message that appears.
page 243 "When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function"
9. Press [OK].
10. Press the [User Management / Others] tab and specify the settings as required.
DZC131
11. Press [OK].

12. Press [Home] ( ) after specifying the settings.
• The connection test may take time.

• Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not
have write privileges for the file or there is not enough free hard disk space.
• If the client computer has a fixed IP address assigned to it, you can specify the IP address manually
by including it in the path name of the destination folder. For example, if the IP address is
"192.168.1.191" and the shared folder name is "user", enter "\\192.168.1.191\user" as the
path.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
147
5. Scan
Basic Procedure for Performing Send to Folder
2. Select [To Folder] on the scanner screen.
DZC531

4. Press [Send Settings] and configure the scan settings according to the purpose of the
scanned data.
5. Press , select [Search Address Book] or [Specify by Reg. No.] and then specify the
shared folder that is registered in the address book.
DZC533
• To enter the information manually, press , and select [Manual Entry]. Select SMB as the
protocol and enter the required information.
• To specify the destination again, press .
6. Press [Start].
148
• If any of the machine's security functions are enabled, select the destination from the registered
folder only when you send files by Scan to Folder.
• If the firewall of an antivirus program is active, you may not be able to specify a shared folder on
the computer as a folder destination. If this is the case, see the antivirus program's Help.
• If Windows firewall is active and you cannot specify a shared folder on the computer as a folder
destination, the machine may be able to communicate with the computer by changing the
exceptions of the Windows firewall. For details, see Windows Help.
• After scan files are sent, the destination and file name fields will be automatically cleared. If you
want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.
149
5. Scan
Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality

and Density
Specify the quality and density to scan on the [Send Settings] screen.

3. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen and specify the original type (quality), density
and resolution.
When specifying the original type
Original Type Appropriate for
Black & White: Text A document mainly composed of text in black and white. The
original is scanned in two tones of black and white.
• Dropout Color
The machine scans the original while erasing the specified
color (Chromatic Color, Red, Green, Blue). To specify a
color to erase more precisely, move toward [Narrow]
in the color range to erase.
Black & White: Text / A document with text and photos in black and white. The original
Photo is scanned in two tones of black and white.
Black & White: Text / A document with text and figures in black and white. The original
Line Art is scanned in two tones of black and white.
Black & White: Photo A document with figures and photos in black and white. The
original is scanned in two tones of black and white.
150
Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density
Original Type Appropriate for
Gray Scale A document with figures and photos in black and white. The
original is scanned as an image comprising many shades of
gray.
Full Color: Text / Photo A document mainly comprising text in color.
Full Color: Glossy Photo An original in color such as silver-halide prints or pictures.
Full Color: Shiny A glossy original in color such as a precious metal or jewelry.
Materials
Auto Color Select The machine determines the type of the original automatically
while scanning. It may not be determined correctly depending
on the scan settings and original content.
• You can select only [Gray Scale], [Full Color: Text / Photo], [Full Color: Glossy Photo],
or [Full Color: Shiny Materials] when [High Compression PDF] is specified in [PDF Type]
under [File Type].
When adjusting the density
• Move to the left or right to adjust the density. The colors in the scanned image
darken as you move the slider to the right.
• Select the [Auto Density] check box to adjust the density automatically when scanning an
original with a non-white background such as newspaper or a document that has show-
through.
• You can specify the shading level of [Scanner Settings] [Scan] [Color/Density]
[Background Density of ADS (Full Color)].
When specifying the resolution
• Select the resolution to use for scanning the original. Image quality improves as the
resolution increases, but the size of the scanned data also increases.
151
5. Scan
• To ensure the quality of scanned data, [100 dpi] cannot be selected in the following
cases:
• [High Compression PDF] is specified in [PDF Type] under [File Type]
• [OCR] is selected in [PDF Detailed Settings] under [File Type]
See "Scanning an Original as a PDF File with Embedded Text Data", User Guide
(Full Version).
4. To send the scanned document to an e-mail address, press [Sender] and then specify the
sender.
5. Specify the destination, and press [Start].
152
Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document
Specifying the File Type or File Name When

Scanning a Document
Specify the settings in [Send Settings] on the scanner screen.

3. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen.
4. Press [File Type], and select the file type to save the scanned document.
Press [Others] to display the detailed settings screen.
• TIFF / JPEG (Single Page): A separate image file is created for each single page.
• When you specify Black & White in [Original Type], the scanned document will be sent
in TIFF format.
• When you specify Gray Scale or Full Color in [Original Type], the scanned document
will be sent in JPEG format.
• TIFF (Multi-page): Multiple pages are combined into a single image file.
• PDF (Single Page): A PDF file is created for each single page.
• PDF (Multi-page): Multiple pages are combined into a single PDF file.
In addition to the normal PDF format, you can also specify [High Compression PDF] which reduces
the file size while maintaining the legibility, or [PDF/A] which conforms to the international
standard and is suitable for long-term storage.
If [High Compression PDF] is selected as the file type, areas of uneven shade may appear in the
halftone sections in the document. If this happens, change the PDF File Setting to [PDF/A].
153
5. Scan
5. To specify the file name, press [File Name] and enter the file name.
The file name is generated by combining the following three items:
• File Name: Enter the string to use at the beginning of the file name.
• Start Number: Specify the starting number of a serial number that will be appended at the end
of each file name when specifying a file format comprising a single page per file.
• Add Date & Time: Select this check box to add the "year, month, day, hour, and minute" the
scanning is performed at the end of the file name.
6. Specify the scan settings according to the purpose of the scanned data.
7. Specify the destination to send the scanned document and then press [Start].
• You can also embed the security and digital signature settings, and text information in the PDF file.
• See "Scanning an Original as a PDF with Security Setting Specified", User Guide (Full Version).
• See "Scanning an Original as a PDF File with Embedded Text Data", User Guide (Full Version).
• There are requirements that must be met when scanning the original to create a file in the High
Compression PDF format.
• page 273 "List of Specifications"
• You can change the number of digits in [Scanner Settings] [Sending Settings] [File Name]
[Number of Digits for Single Page Files].
• The version of the created PDF files is 1.4/1.5.
154
6. Document Server
Storing Documents in Document Server

You can store documents scanned by the machine in the document server.
You can also store them using the printer driver.
• Documents stored in the document server are deleted after three days (72 hours) in the factory-
default configuration. Change the settings in [Auto Delete File in Document Server] to change the
period until documents are deleted or to specify not to delete documents automatically.
• See "Changing the Storage Period of Document Server or Specifying an Indefinite Period", User
1. On the Home screen, press [Document Server].
2. On the document server screen, press [To Scanning Screen].
DZX233
3. Specify the folder to store documents, the document name, and other settings.
D0C9PA5400
155
6. Document Server
• Target Fldr. to Store: Select the "Shared Folder" created in the factory default configuration or
a user folder created by a user to store the document. To select a user folder, create it in
advance.
See "Organizing Document Server Using Folders", User Guide (Full Version).
• User Name: Specify the user name displayed as the owner of the document. Select a user
from the address book or enter the name.
• File Name: Specify the name of the scanned document. If you do not specify the file name, a
name such as "COPY0001" or "COPY0002" is assigned automatically.
• Password: Specify the password required for printing the document.
Place the original in the same way as in the Copy function.
5. Specify the scanning conditions such as color or size.
6. Press [Start].
• When you place the original on the Auto Document Feeder (ADF), the folder list screen is
displayed after scanning the original.
• When you place the original on the exposure glass, press [Finish Scanning] after scanning all
originals to print to display the folder list screen.
• The machine stores the documents with the size and orientation specified for the tray you selected,
regardless of the actual size or orientation of the original.
• You can specify whether to allow other users to read or edit the stored document.
• See "Specifying Access Privileges for Documents Stored in Document Server", User Guide (Full
Version).
• When you do not want to delete stored documents, specify [Auto Delete File in Document Server]
to [Off], and then store the documents. When [Specify Days] or [Specify Hours] is selected after
documents have been stored, the documents will not be deleted. Only the documents stored after a
setting change are deleted automatically.
156
Printing Documents in Document Server

You can print the documents stored in the document server with the same settings, color mode, paper
size, and other settings specified when the documents were scanned. You can also change the print
settings or specify a page to print.
• You can print a document in the document server using Web Image Monitor.
• See "Accessing Documents in Document Server from a Web Browser", User Guide (Full Version).
Printing a Document with the Settings Specified When Scanned
• When printing two or more documents at a time, the print settings specified for the first document
are applied to all the remaining documents.
• Some of the selected documents may not be printed due to the difference in the size or resolution.
2. On the document server screen, select the desired folder.
DZX236
Press [Search by Folder No.] or [Search by Folder Name] to search for a folder.
157
6. Document Server
3. Select the document to print.
DZX239
• Press [User Name] or [File Name] on the left side of the screen to search for a document.
• If the document is password protected, enter the password and press [OK].
• To print two or more copies, enter the quantity using the number keys.
• To print multiple documents at once, select the documents to print in the printing order. You
can select up to 30 documents.
• After selecting the documents, you can confirm the selected documents by pressing [Order] to
list them in the printing order.
4. Press [Start].
• To stop printing, press [Stop] [Cancel Printing].

• You can change the number of sets during printing. This function can be used only when the Sort
function is selected in the printing conditions. To change the quantity while printing is in progress,
press [Stop], enter the quantity, and then press [Resume Printing]. The quantity you can enter differs
depending on when you press [Stop].
Changing the Print Settings to Print a Document
• When you select two or more documents to change the print settings, the first document keeps the
changed contents after printing. The second document and later documents do not keep the
changed contents and instead keep the settings of when they were stored.
158
3. Select the document to print.

4. Press [To Printing Screen].
5. Change the print settings.
• When specifying Sort, you can make a partial print as a test and proceed to print the rest of
the quantity by pressing [Sample Copy].
• Press [Back to File List] to return to the screen for selecting documents.
6. Press [Start].
Specifying a Page to Print

3. Select the document to print and press [Print Specified Page].
159
6. Document Server
4. Specify the page to print.
D0C9PA5401
• 1st Page: Select this to print the first page only. When you selected two or more documents,
the first page of each document is printed.
• Specified Page: Select this to print the specified page.
• Specify Range: Enter the page printing starts in [Start Number] and the page printing ends in
[End Number].
5. Press [Start].
160
Using Web Image Monitor

Web Image Monitor is a screen to confirm the machine status and settings on the computer.
When the machine and a computer can be connected to a network, you can access to Web Image
Monitor by entering the IP address of the machine on the address bar of the Web browser.
Accessing to Web Image Monitor
1. Enter the IP address of the machine in the address bar of the Web browser.
Example: when the IP address of the machine is "192.168.1.10"

• If SSL is specified
https://192.168.1.10/
• If SSL is not specified
http://192.168.1.10/
When you do not know whether SSL is specified on the machine, enter the address starting
with https. When you fail the connection, enter the address starting with http.
When entering the IPv4 address, do not enter "0" for each segment. If "192.168.001.010" is
entered, you cannot access the machine.
2. Confirming the machine status or settings on the top page of Web Image Monitor.
D0C9AA8089
The machine status and remaining amount of consumables are displayed.
161
You can access Web Image Monitor more quickly by registering the machine's URL as a
bookmark. Note that the URL you register must be the URL of the top page, which is the page
that appears before login. If you register the URL of a page that appears after login, Web
Image Monitor will not open properly from the bookmark.
To change the settings, click [Login] at the top right on the screen and enter the User Name
and Password.
Recommended Web Browser
Windows macOS
Internet Explorer 11 or later Safari 3.0 or later
Firefox 52 or later Firefox 52 or later
Google Chrome version 50 or later Google Chrome version 50 or later
Microsoft Edge 20 or later -
• You can use the screen reader software JAWS 7.0 or later on Internet Explorer.
• When you use a DNS server or WINS server, you can use Host Name instead of IP address to
connect the server.
• When the screen is distorted or the operation is unstable, confirm that "JavaScript" or "Use
Cookies" is specified to Active on the computer.
• When using Host Name under Windows Server 2008 or later in the IPv6 environment, resolve
Host Name in the external DNS server. You cannot use the host file.
• When specifying the settings from Web Image Monitor, do not log in to the machine from the
control panel. The setting value may not be reflected.
• If you are using a proxy server, change the web browser settings so that no data goes through the
proxy server to connect to this machine. Contact your administrator for information about the
settings.
• If you click your browser's back button but the previous page does not appear, click the browser's
refresh button and try again.
What You Can Do on the Web Image Monitor
Items displayed on the Web Image Monitor and settings depend whether the machine is logged in.
• When not logged in
162
The machine status, settings, and job status are displayed. You can browse the settings of the
machine but cannot change them.
• When logged in (as a user)
Log in as a user registered in the Address Book. The users can operate the jobs that they executed
and change a part of settings of the machine.
• When logged in (as an Administrator)
The administrator can change all settings of the machine.
What you can do

Function Not logged in User Administrator
Machine status
Machine settings *1 *1
Machine setting change - *1
Job list
Job history
Access to Address Book -
File operation in Document Server -
Network settings - *1
Network settings change - *1
Cancel printing - -
Security settings - -
: Available -: Not available

*1 Depending on the Administrator settings
163
Web Image Monitor Screen
D0C9AA8087
1. Menu
Menu items described below are displayed.
• Status/Information: Displays the machine status, option configuration, counter, and job status.
• Device Management: Manages the machine settings and Address Book.
• Print Job/Stored File: Operates the files stored in the printer driver or document server.
• Convenient Links: Displays the link to the Favorite URL.
2. Header
An icon to link to the Login screen is placed at the top right on the screen. The Help, Version Information, and
Keyword Search buttons are also displayed.
3. Refresh/Help
(Refresh): Update the information in the work area.
(Help): View or download Help file contents.
4. Main Area
The machine status and settings are displayed.
Specifying Web Image Monitor Help
Web Image Monitor has Help to describe the function of setting items. When you use Help for the first
time, you can select to read online Help or to download Help File.
View Online Help Now
You can view the latest Web Image Monitor Help on the Internet.
164
Download Help File

You can download Web Image Monitor Help to the computer and view it. When you store the
downloaded Help file in the Web server and assign to the Help button ( ), you can view the
Help without connecting to the Internet.
To assign the downloaded Help file to the Help button ( ), specify the path to the Help file
following the procedure below.
1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as an Administrator.

2. Click the Help button ( ) at the top right on the screen.
D0C9AA8088
3. Select the operating system and displayed language, and then click [Download].
4. Unzip the downloaded zip file and store it in the Web server.
5. Click [Configuration] on the "Device Management" menu on Web Image Monitor.
6. Click [Webpage] under the "Webpage" category.
7. Enter the path to the Help file stored in the Web server in "URL" under "Set Help URL
Target".
For example, when URL of the Help File is "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/JA/index.html", enter "http://
a.b.c.d/HELP/".
8. Click [OK].
9. After completing the procedure, log out and finish Web Image Monitor.
165
166
Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

The method of loading paper varies for each tray type.
• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
• If the first layer paper tray is installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time. Pressing
down forcefully on the machine's upper surface might cause the machine topple over, possibly
resulting in injury.
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
D0C9IA0905
• Before loading paper into a tray, check the paper size and type that can be loaded in the tray.
page 182 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
• To load thick paper or other special paper, specify the paper type or thickness in [Tray/Paper
Settings] of [Settings].
• Check the paper setting before printing. If the paper differs from the paper setting, a mismatch error
will occur when you print.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease or the paper may
misfeed.
167
• When loading paper on a tray which has a few sheets of paper, multiple sheets of paper may be
fed at once from the tray. Take out all sheets, fan the sheets, and then load them again.
• You may hear the sound of rubbing paper. This is not a malfunction.
• If the cut side of the paper is not flat, curls will occur on the edge. This curl is called a burr. If
double-feed occurs when you set the paper with burrs, set the burred side faced down.
D0C9IA5929
If a paper jam occurs when you set the paper with burrs, set the burred side facing up.
D0C9IA5928
If double-feed or paper jams still occur, set the burred side upside down.
Loading Paper into Tray 1
• Slide the side fences until they are aligned with the sides of the paper. If there is space between the
side fences and the paper, it may cause the image to be misaligned.
168
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
D0C9IA5913
2. Remove paper if loaded.

3. While pressing down the release lever of the side fence, slide the side fences outward.
D0C9IA5914
4. While pinching the release lever of the end fence, slide the end fence outward.
• IM C300 series
D0C9IA5915
• IM C400 series
169
D0C9IA0912
Rotate the fixing screw of the stopper 90 degrees counterclockwise with a coin or similar
object and remove the stopper.
1
2
D0C9IA0910
5. Square the paper and load it print side up.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
• IM C300 series
D0C9IA5916
• IM C400 series
170
D0C9IA0908
6. Align the end and side fences gently against the paper you loaded.
Make sure that there is no space between the paper and the side fences or end fence.
• IM C300 series
D0C9IA5917
• IM C400 series
D0C9IA0913
To fix the end fence, engage the two projections of the stopper with the holes on the end
fence, and then tighten the fixing screw by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise with a coin or
similar object.
• If you will not fix the end fence, put the stopper in the position as shown in the illustration,
and then rotate the fixing screw 90 degrees clockwise with a coin or similar object.
171
D0C9IA0911
7. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
Loading Paper into Tray 2 to 4
The paper size setting is changed in the same way for each paper tray.
In the following example procedure, the paper size setting for tray 2 is changed.
• Slide the side fences until they are aligned with the sides of the paper, and then re-lock the side
fences. If there is space between the side fences and the paper, it may cause the image to be
misaligned.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
D0C9IA5919
2. Remove paper if loaded.
172
3. Release the lock on the side fence.
D0C9IA5920
4. While pressing down the release lever of the side fence, slide the side fences outward.
D0C9IA5921
5. While pinching the release lever of the end fence, slide the end fence outward.
D0C9IA5922
6. Square the paper and load it print side up.

Do not stack paper over the limit mark. If you load paper over the limit mark, the printed images
may become slanted or a paper jam may occur.
173
D0C9IA5923
7. Align the back and side fences gently against the paper you loaded.
D0C9IA5924
8. Re-lock the side fences.
D0C9IA5930
9. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray
Use the bypass tray to load paper of a size that cannot be loaded into Tray 1 to 4, such as transparency
film and label paper (adhesive labels).
The maximum number of sheets you can load into the bypass tray depends on the paper type.
174
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark. If you load paper over the limit mark, the print image may
be slanted or the paper may be jammed.
D0C9IA0907
1. Open the bypass tray.
D0C9IA5926
When loading paper larger than A4 or 81/2 × 11 size, pull out the extender.
2. Load the paper with the print side down, and push it in lightly until you hear a beep.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple sheets of paper do not stick to each other and are not
fed at once.
When loading envelopes or letterhead paper, confirm the orientation, face and back, or location
of flaps.
• page 189 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
• page 191 "Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper"
175
3. Align the paper guides to the paper size.
D0C9IA5927
• To load paper on the bypass tray, it is better to orient it in the direction of .

• You can change the beeper setting under [Touch/Notification Sound] in [Settings] [System
Settings] [Sound].
Specifying Regular Sizes Using the Control Panel
1. Press [Settings] on the Home screen.
2. Press [Tray/Paper Settings].
D0C9PA5323
176
4. Press one tray to set.
5. Press [Paper Size].
D0C9PA5253
To specify for the bypass tray, press [Paper Size: Printer].
D0C9PA5254
6. Choose one paper size from the list shown, and then press [OK].
7. Press [OK].
177
Specifying a Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel
D0C9PA5323

5. Press [Paper Size].
D0C9PA5253
To specify for the bypass tray, press [Paper Size: Printer].
178
D0C9PA5254
6. Press [Custom] from the list shown.
7. Press the button to the right of "A" or "B".

Specify the values within the numbers of "< >", and then press [Done].
8. Press [OK] three times.
Specifying Paper Type and Thickness Settings
If the print settings and the loaded paper that are used for a print job do not match, a mismatch error
occurs.
Check and specify the paper settings before you start printing.
• Before you change the settings, confirm the priority of the paper settings for printing (priority to the
printer driver or to the control panel).
On the printer driver
Check the settings of paper tray and paper type on the printer driver and make sure the settings
match the loaded paper.
179
On the control panel
D0C9PA5323

5. Press [Paper Type/Thickness].
D0C9PA5255
180
6. Choose one paper type and paper thickness from the list shown, and then press
[OK].
7. Press [OK].
181
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

The recommended paper sizes and types for each tray are as described below.
• When performing multiple sheet feeding, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the
bypass tray.
• When you load the following types of paper, you may hear a buzzing sound. This does not affect
the performance.
• Transparency film
• Translucent paper
• Postcards
• The printing speed may be lower depending on the paper size or paper type.
Tray 1
Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity
60–163 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Select the paper size using • IM C300 series: 250 sheets
90 lb. Index) the Tray/Paper Settings menu: • IM C400 series: 550 sheets
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 2 A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 ×
11 , 51/2 × 81/2
60–163 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Custom size: • IM C300 series: 250 sheets
90 lb. Index) • IM C400 series: 550 sheets
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 2
Vertical: 139.5–216.0 mm
Horizontal: 210.0–297.0 mm
Vertical: 5.50–8.50 inches

Horizontal: 8.27–11.69 inches
182
Paper Tray Unit (Trays 2-4)
60–163 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Select the paper size using the 550 sheets
90 lb. Index) Tray/Paper Settings menu:
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 2 A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 ×
14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2 , 81/2 × 12
, 81/2 × 132/5
60–163 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Custom size: 550 sheets

90 lb. Index)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 2

Bypass Tray
60–220 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Select the paper size*1: • Plain Paper 1–Plain Paper
80 lb. Cover) A4 , A5 , A6 , B5 JIS , 2: 100 sheets
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 3 B6 JIS , 81/2 ×14 , 81/2 × • Middle Thick –Thick Paper
13 ,81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 3: *3
,81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 ×
10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 16K , 81/2 × 12
, 8 /2 × 132/5
1
183
60–220 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Custom size*2: • Plain Paper 1–Plain Paper
80 lb. Cover) 2: 100 sheets
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 3 • Middle Thick–Thick Paper
3:*3

OHP transparencies A4 , 81/2 × 11 10 sheets
Translucent paper A4 10 sheets
Label paper (adhesive labels) A4 , 81/2 × 11 1 sheets
Envelopes Select the paper size*1: *3
41/8 × 91/2 , 37/8 × 71/2

, C5 Env , C6 Env , DL Env
*1 Select the paper size.

• Using the Copy function.
page 59 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
• Using the Printer function.
*2 Enter the paper size.
• Using the Copy function.
page 59 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
• Using the Printer function.
*3 Do not stack over the limit mark. The number of sheets you can load in the paper tray varies depending on
the weight and condition of the paper.
184
Notes on Special Paper
Paper Type Note
Setting thick paper page 188 "Thick Paper Orientation and Recommended
Status"
Setting envelopes page 189 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended

Status"
Setting letterhead paper page 191 "Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided

Paper"
Setting label paper (adhesive labels) We recommend that you use specified label paper. If
paper other than the specified one is used, normal
operation and quality cannot be guaranteed.
Setting transparencies When using transparencies, check their print sides

carefully. Erroneous loading may cause problems. Remove
copied or printed sheets one by one.
Setting translucent paper • When loading translucent paper, always use long
grain paper.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.
Setting coated paper • Specify "Paper Type" to [Coated Paper] and an

appropriate item for "Paper Thickness" in paper type/
thickness setting for each tray under [Settings]
[Tray/Paper Settings] [Paper Size/Paper Type].
• If a paper jam occurs or if the machine makes a
strange noise, feed the coated paper from the bypass
tray one sheet at a time.
Paper Thickness for Each Paper Weight
Paper Thickness*1 Paper weight
Plain Paper 1 60–74 g/m2 (16–20 lb. Bond)
Plain Paper 2 75–81 g/m2 (20 lb. Bond)
Middle Thick 82–105 g/m2 (20–28 lb. Bond)
Thick Paper 1 106–130 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–35 lb. Index)
185
Paper Thickness*1 Paper weight
Thick Paper 2 131–163 g/m2 (35 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index)
Thick Paper 3 164–220 g/m2 (90 lb. Index–80 lb. Cover)
*1 Print quality will decrease if the paper you are using is close to the minimum or maximum weight. Change the
paper weight setting to thinner or thicker.
• When using paper of 60–65 g/m2 (16–17 lb. Bond), we recommend that you specify [Special
Paper 1] for paper type in order to get better output quality.
Unusable Paper
• Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of conductive
paper. Doing so can result in fire.
Paper causing faults

Do not use any of the following kinds of treated paper. Doing so may cause faults.
• Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Paper with perforated lines
• Hemmed-edge paper
• Window envelopes
• Tab stock
• Certain types of OHP transparencies for color printing
Do not copy or print onto sides that are already printed.
Paper causing paper jam
Do not use the following kinds of paper. It may cause a paper jam.
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Perforated paper
186
• Slippery paper
• Torn paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper with little stiffness
• Paper with a dusty surface
Do not use the copied or printed paper again. It may cause paper jam.
If you use paper curled by humidity or drying, the paper or staple may jam.
Do not load sheets that have already been printed onto by another machine. Doing so may
interfere with loading of paper because the powder for preventing offset may attach to the paper
roller.
• A paper jam may occur depending on the condition of the paper even when using the
recommended paper.
Paper Storage
When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:

• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Store paper in a dry environment (humidity: 70% or less).
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Once opened, store paper in a plastic bag.
Saving Printouts
• Prints will fade if exposed to strong light or dampness and humidity for extended periods of time.
Preserve the quality of your copies by storing them in a binder in a dark, dry place.
• When folding prints, toner in the folds will come off.
• If the prints are stored in the conditions described below, toner may melt:
• When a print and a half-dried print are put on top of each other
• When solvent-type adhesive agents are used for pasting prints
• When prints are placed on mats made of chlorinated plastic in locations of high temperature
for long periods of time
• When prints are placed in locations of extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater
187
Thick Paper Orientation and Recommended

Status
When using thick paper of 106–220 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover), keep in mind the paper
orientation or storage environment to prevent misfeeds and loss of image quality.
Paper Orientation
Thick paper has a paper direction according to its grain. Set the paper direction according to the
grain, as shown in the following diagram:
Direction of paper grain Paper trays Bypass Tray
Not recommended
Paper Storage
• Temperature: 20–25°C (68–77°F)
• Humidity: 30–65%
Do not use together paper that has been stored in different environments.
Minimum Number of Sheets
• 20 sheets or more (paper trays of the machine/optional paper tray unit used)
After loading paper, position the side fences flush against the paper stack.
• When printing on thick, smooth paper, be sure to fan the paper thoroughly before loading. If you
do not fan thick paper, jams and misfeeds can occur. If paper continues to become jammed or
feed in together even after they are fanned, load them one by one from the bypass tray.
• Proper performance and quality may not be achieved under the recommended conditions
depending on the paper.
• The printed sheet may curl. If the printed sheet curls, correct it.
188
Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status
Envelope Orientation and Recommended

Status
The way to place an original on the exposure glass and load envelopes varies depending on the shape
and orientation of the envelopes.
• Do not print on the following envelopes:

• Window envelopes
• Envelopes with moisture
• Fan the envelopes before loading them to separate them and prevent the glue on them from
causing them to stick together. If fanning does not prevent them sticking together, load them one by
one. Note that some types of envelopes cannot be used with this machine.
Before setting envelopes
Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air from inside and flatten out all
four edges. If they are bent or curled, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine)
by running a pencil or ruler across them.
• For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.

• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
• Copied or printed sheets are delivered to the internal tray 1 even if you specified a different tray.
• Set the margins on the top, bottom, left and right to be 15 mm or more so as to print with adequate
quality.
• An image may not be printed clearly on a sheet whose thickness is uneven. Print a few sheets and
check the result.
• The printing result may not be adequate or the envelope may become wrinkled when the
temperature or humidity is high.
• The printing result may not be adequate or output envelopes may become wrinkled depending on
the printing environment even when using the recommended envelopes.
• When printing onto paper other than an envelope after printing onto several envelopes, you may
have to wait about one minute until printing starts to allow the machine to make adjustments.
189
Using the Copy Function
Orientation of Envelopes Exposure Glass Bypass Tray
Side-opening envelopes
D0C9IA8601
DZW768
Flaps: closed
Flaps: closed Side to be printed: face down
Side to be scanned: face down
When loading envelopes, specify the envelope size and thickness.

page 74 "Copying Onto Envelopes"
Using the Printer Function
Orientation of Envelopes Bypass Tray
Side-opening envelopes *1
Flaps: closed
Side to be printed: face down
*1 To load envelopes with their flaps pointing towards the front, select the check box of [Rotate by 180
Degrees] on [Input/Output] tab, and then print.
190
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided

Paper
To print onto letterhead paper or business letter paper on which logos or patterns are printed, confirm
how to set the paper or the settings of this machine so that the original is printed onto the orientation-
fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper correctly.
Copying onto Letterhead Paper
Specify the settings of this machine as described below, and then place an original and load the paper.
[Settings] [Copier / Document Server Settings] [Paper/Paper Input] [Letterhead Setting]
[Yes]
Original Orientation
Exposure Glass ADF
DZB776 DZB777
Paper Orientation
Copy Side Paper trays Bypass Tray
One-sided originals
DZB779
DZB784
DZB785
191
Two-sided originals *1
DZB781
DZB787
*1 When printing the first page onto the letterhead side
Printing onto Letterhead Paper Using the Printer Driver
Specify the settings of this machine as described below.

[Settings] [Tray/Paper Settings] [Printer] [Letterhead Setting] [Auto Detect]
Paper Orientation
One-sided originals
DZB788
DZB784
DZB790
Two-sided originals
DZB789
DZB791
• When you specify [Letterhead Setting] to [On (Always)], you can print onto letterhead paper
without specifying the paper type in the printer driver’s settings to [Letterhead].
192
Recommended Original Size and Weight
Recommended Original Size and Weight

Original location Original size Original weight
Exposure glass Up to A4 , 81/2 × 14 -
ADF A4 –A6 52–128 g/m2 (14–34 lb.

81/2 × 14 –51/2 × 81/2 Bond)
• An original whose size is within the range of the maximum original scan area can be placed.
• See "Specifications for the Main Unit", User Guide (Full Version).
• Place originals in the ADF if they are 356 mm (14.0 inches) or more along the feed direction. If you
place them on the exposure glass, the machine will scan only within the maximum scanning size.
• On all sides of the original, there is a missing image area. Even if you place originals on the
exposure glass or in the ADF correctly, the missing image area on all four sides of the original
might not be copied.
• See "Specifications for the Main Unit", User Guide (Full Version).
193
Replacing the Toner

You can view the procedure to replace the toner by watching a movie that is displayed on the control
panel.
You can display the telephone number for ordering a replacement print cartridge.
See "Contact Information", User Guide (Full Version).
• Replace the toner after the message prompting replacement is displayed on the control panel.
• The machine may become damaged if you use toner of a different type.
• Do not turn off the power of the machine when replacing the toner. If you turn off the power when
replenishing the toner, the specified settings are canceled, and printing will not resume afterwards.
• Store the toner in a dry environment away from direct sunlight and generally under the temperature
below 35°C.
• Keep the toner horizontal when storing it.
• After removing the print cartridge from the machine, do not shake it while its opening is facing
downward. The remaining toner may spill out.
• Do not pull out and put back the toner cartridge repeatedly. The remaining toner may leak.
• Follow the procedure displayed on the screen to replenish the toner.
1. Press [Watch Video].
D0C9PA8225
To display this screen again, press [Confirm] in the system message widget, or press [Check Status]
and then press [Check] under "Mach. Status" on the [Mach./Applic. Stat] tab.
2. Press the play ( ) key.
3. Replace the toner by following the procedure shown in the video.
• You can transmit data in the fax or scanner function even after the toner runs out. However, you
cannot transmit a fax when the number of times of reception and transmission performed in the fax
function after the toner has run out and the number of times of communication not recorded in the
Records exceeds a total of 1000. Replace the toner earlier.
194
Replacing the Toner
• While the message prompting you to replace the toner is displayed, Memory Storage Report for
Memory Transmission will not be printed.
• If appears when there is a lot of toner, hold the cartridge with the opening upward, shake it
well, and then reinstall it.
Precautions When Storing Toner
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a place with an open
flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.
• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
Precautions When Replacing the Toner
• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame
and burns can result.
• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner. Absorbed toner may
cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However,
you can use a toner-compatible industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the
spilled toner using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging:
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine close to babies
and small children. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact
with the mouth or nose.
195
• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency measures first, and then
consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a fresh air
environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.
• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used), make sure not to
inhale toner.
• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used), be careful not to
have toner dirt your skin or clothes.
• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears them, take the
following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with cold water.
Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
removing the stain may become impossible.
• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables with toner, be
careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used consumables and shutting the lid of
the container if the lid is available, put them in a bag.
• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze them. Toner
spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes, hands, or floor.
Disposing Exhausted Toners
You cannot reuse exhausted toners.

When disposing a depleted print cartridge, place the cartridge in a box or plastic bag while paying
attention not to spill any toner powder.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you discard it
by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
196
Replacing the Toner
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you can
recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.
197
198
9. Troubleshooting
Alert Sounds
The machine notifies you with an alert sound when a paper jam occurs, the original is left on the
machine, or another problem occurs. Listen to the alert sound for one of the patterns described below,
and perform the required procedure accordingly.
Sound pattern*1 Condition Solution
A short beep [Touch/Notification Sound] -

[Login Sound]/[Logout Sound]
A short beep, followed by [Invalid Operation Sound] • If you entered an incorrect

long beep password, enter the correct
password.
• If you hear this sound when
touching an icon or key, you do
not have permission to use the
function or setting. Log in to the
machine as a user with
permission, or consult your user
administrator.
A long beep [Operation Completed Sound] Check the operation result.

[Copy: Job Done Sound]
[Fax Printing Ended Sound]
[Fax Transmission Ended Sound]
[Fax Reception Ended Sound]
Two long beeps [Warm-up Sound] The machine is ready for use after the
machine is turned on or recovers from
the sleep mode.
Five long beeps [Auto Reset Sound] The machine has been reset to the
default state after the specified period
of time has passed with the machine
unoperated. If you were performing
and paused an operation, perform
the operation from the beginning
again.
199
9. Troubleshooting
Sound pattern*1 Condition Solution
Five long beeps [Caution Sound] Check that an original is not left on
(repeating four times) [Copy: Forgot Original Sound] the exposure glass and that paper is
loaded in the paper tray.
[Scanner: Forgot Original
Sound]
[Fax: Forgot Original Sound]
Five short beeps [Warning Sound] Check the message displayed on the
(repeating five times) screen, and resolve the problem by
removing the jammed paper or
original, or replacing the toner.
12 short beeps [Blank Page Detected Sound] Check that the original is placed in
the ADF with the side to scan facing
up.
*1 The factory default sound pattern is used as an example in the table above.
• You cannot pause an alert sound that has started. The machine continues to emit the sound until the
preset sound pattern is completed.
• You can specify the volume and type of alert sound in [Settings] [System Settings] [Sound].
The type of sound can be specified for each condition described in the table above. You can also
specify the volume of the sound emitted when using On-hook or Immediate Transmission to send a
fax in [Settings] [Fax Settings] [Others] [Adjust Sound Volume]. Press [Home] ( ) after
specifying the settings.
• See "Setting the Sound Volume and Type", User Guide (Full Version).
200
Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel
Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages

on the Control Panel
The machine notifies you of the machine condition or status of an application with the [Check Status]
indicator or a message displayed on the control panel. Check the status and resolve the problem
accordingly.
Message
[Check Status] indicator

DZC702
• Message
Displays a message indicating the status of the machine or application. Press the message to
display it in full text. You can also view more than one message as a list.
• [Check Status] indicator
If there is a problem such as a paper jam, the [Check Status] indicator lights up or flashes along
with a message displayed on the screen. Press [Check Status] to check the status of the machine or
application, and resolve the problem accordingly.
When an Icon Is Displayed with a Message
When you need to resolve a problem such as a paper jam, an icon is displayed at the beginning of a
message. See the table below for the meaning of each icon.
Icon Condition Solution and reference
Maintenance or repair is required. Prepare for maintenance or consider

repairing the machine.
201
9. Troubleshooting
Icon Condition Solution and reference
Paper is jammed. See the animated illustration displayed on the

control panel, and remove the jammed
paper.
See "When Paper or an Original is Jammed",
User Guide (Full Version).
An original has jammed. See the animated illustration displayed on the

control panel, and remove the jammed
original.
See "When Paper or an Original is Jammed",
Paper has run out. Load paper into the paper tray.
page 167 "Loading Paper into the Paper
Tray"
Toner is almost depleted, or has run out. Prepare a replacement toner. Replace the
toner when it runs out.
If appears when there is a lot of toner, pull
out the print cartridge by following the toner
replacement procedure that is displayed on
the screen, and then set it back again.
page 194 "Replacing the Toner"
The waste toner bottle is full, or almost full. Contact your service representative.
Staples have run out. Prepare a cartridge for replacement, and

load it when the staples run out.
See "Replenishing the Staples", User Guide
(Full Version).
A cover is open. Check that all covers of the machine and

options are closed.
• For the names and the contact information of consumables, check [Settings] [Inquiry]. Press
[Home] ( ) after completing the operation to close [Settings].
• See "Contact Information", User Guide (Full Version).
202
Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel
When the [Check Status] Indicator Is Lit or Flashing
The [Check Status] indicator notifies the user when the machine requires immediate attention.
Flashing in red
The machine is unavailable for use. Press [Check Status] and resolve the problem as soon as
possible.
Flashing in yellow
Maintenance on the machine needs to be performed soon. Perform the required procedure
accordingly.
You can display the status confirmation screen with [Check Status]. On the screen, check the detailed
status of the machine or application.
1. Press [Check Status].
DZC703
2. Press [Check] to check the details, and perform the required procedure.
See page 201 "When an Icon Is Displayed with a Message" for details.
DZC704
: The machine cannot be used.

: Some of the functions cannot be used, or the toner is almost depleted.
• Depending on the machine condition, such as a paper jam or open cover, the status confirmation
screen may be displayed automatically without pressing [Check Status].
203
9. Troubleshooting
When the Machine Cannot Be Operated
• If a message is displayed on the screen, check the message.

• See "When a messages Is Displayed and the Machine Cannot Be Operated", User Guide (Full
Version).
• When confirming or changing the settings in [Settings], press [Home] ( ) after completing the
operation to close [Settings].
When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation on the

Control Panel
Condition Cause Solution and reference
The screen of the control The machine is in the sleep Touch the screen.
panel is not lit. mode.
Nothing is displayed The power of the machine is Check that the main power indicator is not
when you touch the turned off. lit, and then turn on the main power of the
screen. machine.
page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
The power of the The power cable is Connect the ground wire, and plug the
machine does not come unplugged from the wall power cable into the wall outlet.
on. outlet. See "Installation Requirements After
Moving the Machine", User Guide (Full
Version).
The machine is connected to You cannot use an extension cord.

an extension cord. After checking that the screen is not lit when
you touch it and the main power indicator
is unlit, remove the extension cord and plug
the power cable directly into the wall
outlet.
There may be a problem After checking that the screen is not lit when
with the wall outlet. you touch it and the main power indicator
is unlit, plug the power cord into a
confirmed operating wall outlet.
204
Only the copy icon is The functions other than the The time required for a function to start up
displayed when the copy function are starting varies depending on the function. Wait a
machine is turned on. up. while.
Only some of the menu The functions other than the The time required for a function to start up
items are displayed copy function are starting varies depending on the function. More
when you press up. items on the menu in [Settings] are
[Settings] after turning on displayed as the functions start up. Wait a
the power of the while.
machine.
The login screen is Basic Authentication, Enter the login user name and password,
displayed. Windows Authentication, or and then press [Login]. For the login user
LDAP Authentication is name and password, consult the user
specified. administrator.
page 48 "Logging In from the Control
Panel"
The User Code entry User Code authentication is Enter the User Code, and press [OK].
screen is displayed. specified. Consult the user administrator for the user
code.
A function is not Another function that cannot Wait for the function in progress to end,
executed, or you cannot be used with the specified and then perform the next operation. For
perform an operation. function at the same time is details about functions that cannot be used
being executed. at the same time, see the following section:
page 321 "Function Compatibility"
When a backup of the address book is
being created using Web Image Monitor
or another method, the next function is
executed after the backup is completed.
205
9. Troubleshooting
The key is unresponsive, A malfunction is temporarily Turn off the power of the machine, wait for
or another key is occurring on the machine. 10 seconds or more after confirming that
activated. There is a device or the main power indicator is turned off, and
equipment that is generating then turn on the power again.
Multi-touch, such as
noise in the vicinity. page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
pinch-in and pinch-out,
does not work properly.
You cannot interrupt A malfunction is temporarily

copying even after occurring on the machine.
pressing [Stop] while the
copy function is
operating.
You cannot interrupt Basic Authentication, Log in to the machine as the user who
copying or scanning Windows Authentication, or started the copying or scanning operation
even after pressing LDAP Authentication is or as the machine administrator, and press
[Stop], and the login specified, and the user who [Stop].
screen is displayed. started the copying or
scanning operation has
logged out.
Help is not displayed The application that is The help function cannot be used when
when you press [Help] currently in use does not is grayed out. Close the application or
( ). support the help function, or message, and then try again.
is grayed out because
"Paper Misfeed" or another
message is being displayed.
is grayed out because The help function cannot be used if the user
the user does not have does not have permission to use the
permission to use the browser function. If is always grayed
browser function. out, consult the user administrator to check
whether you have permission to use the
browser function. The user administrator
can change the access permissions in the
address book.
See "Confirming the Available Functions",
206
The screen changes to The machine is not Check if you can display a web page in
Web Browser when you connected to the network [Web Browser]. If a web page cannot be
press [Help] ( ), but correctly. displayed, check that the machine is
the help content is not connected to the network correctly.
displayed. See "Selecting the Network Connection
Method", User Guide (Full Version).
The browser is configured Check that [Web Browser] [Menu]

not to save cookies. ( ) [Settings] [Privacy & security]
[Accept cookies] check box is selected.
The screen remains The machine is in a Check the conditions in which the machine
turned on and the condition that does not does not enter the sleep mode.
machine does not enter allow the machine to enter page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
the sleep mode when the sleep mode.
you press [Energy
Saving] ( ).
The machine does not The shutdown operation Press the main power switch again.
shut down when more could not be performed
than six minutes have normally.
passed after you press
the main power switch.
The power of the [Main Power Off] is Check [Weekly Timer Easy Settings] and
machine is turned off specified in the weekly [Weekly Timer Detailed Settings] on
automatically. timer. [Settings] [System Settings] [Date/
Time/Timer] [Timer] .
207
9. Troubleshooting
When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation from a

Computer
When using the address A certificate is not installed Install the certificate on the computer.
book from Device on the computer when Consult your network administrator for the
Manager NX, an SSL/TLS is enabled on the certificate.
incorrect password error machine.
is displayed even when
you enter the correct An item other than [Simple Specify [Simple Encryption] in "Driver
login user name and Encryption] is specified in Encryption Key:Encryption Strength" in
password. [Extended Security Settings]. [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings
for Administrator] [Security]
[Extended Security Settings].
You cannot access the There is a problem with the Check the cable connecting the machine
machine using Web connection between the and the computer, and disconnect and then
Image Monitor. machine and the computer. connect the cable again. Also, check the
connection to the hub or router, and turn off
and on the power of the device if possible.
Next, turn off the power of the machine,
wait for 10 seconds or more after
confirming that the main power indicator is
turned off, and then turn on the power.
A proxy server is specified. In the proxy setting of the Web browser,

specify the IP address of the machine as an
exception. You can check the IP address in
[Check Status] "Network".
208
"There is a problem with [Permit SSL / TLS • Click [Continue to this website (not
this website's security Communication] is set to recommended).].
certificate." is displayed [Ciphertext Only]. • To specify not to display the message,
and you cannot connect log in to the machine in the
to the machine when administrator mode, and select
accessing the machine [Device Management]
using Web Image [Configuration] [SSL/TLS] under
Monitor. [Security], and then specify
[Ciphertext / Clear Text] in [Permit
SSL / TLS Communication].
"https" is entered at the Do not enter "s" after "http".

beginning of the URL.
209
9. Troubleshooting
When a Message Appears and the Machine

Cannot Be Operated
Message Condition Solution and reference
"Service Call" The machine needs to Consider repairing the machine.

SCxxx-xx be repaired.
Contact
Serial No. of Machine
"Functional Problems" A malfunction that Prepare for maintenance or consider repairing

SCxxx-xx requires maintenance or the machine.
repair has occurred. • If a message prompts you to turn the
Contact
power of the machine off and then on, the
Serial No. of Machine
problem may be resolved by turning off
the power, waiting for 10 seconds or
more after confirming that the main
power indicator is turned off, and then
turning on the power.
• When "Press [Cancel] to cancel
functions." is displayed, you can continue
using the machine except for the function
in which the malfunction is occurring after
pressing [Cancel].
"Please wait." The machine is Wait a while. Turn off the power of the
recovering from the machine if the message persists after five
sleep mode. minutes, wait for 10 seconds or more after
confirming that the main power indicator is
210
When a Message Appears and the Machine Cannot Be Operated
"Please wait." The machine is Wait a while and do not turn off the power of
preparing to perform a the machine.
function or executing the
image stabilization
process.
The ambient Check the room temperature and whether it

temperature is outside satisfies the operational requirements of the
the temperature range machine. If the machine has just been moved
specified for the to the current location, leave it be for some
machine operation. time and allow it to adapt to the environment
before use.
See "Installation Requirements After Moving
the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
If the message persists after five minutes even
when the room temperature is within the
specifications, wait for 10 seconds or more
after confirming that the main power indicator
is turned off, and then turn on the power.
"Please wait." A consumable or supply Wait a while and do not turn off the power of
such as the toner has the machine. Turn off the power of the machine
been replenished. if the message persists after five minutes, wait
for 10 seconds or more after confirming that
the main power indicator is turned off, and
then turn on the power.
"Shutting down... Please The power of the Wait until the power is turned off.
wait. Main power will be machine was turned off
turned off automatically. while the machine was
Maximum waiting time: 5 starting up or in the
minute(s)" standby mode.
• If the message persists even after you have performed the operations as instructed in the following
message, a malfunction may temporarily occur on the machine. Turn off the power of the machine,
wait for 10 seconds or more after confirming that the main power indicator is turned off, and then
turn on the power.
211
9. Troubleshooting
• page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"

• "Cover Open"
• "Add Toner" / "Add Staples"
• "Replace Waste Toner Bottle"
• "Original left on exposure glass."
• "No paper."
212
When a Message Appears While Using the Copy Function
When a Message Appears While Using the

Copy Function
"Cannot XXX paper of A paper size that is not Check the paper size supported in Duplex
this size." supported in Duplex copying and the specified finishing type and
"XXX is not available with copying or the specified load the supported paper.
this paper size." finishing type is page 273 "List of Specifications"
specified.
("2 Sided Copy" or the
name of specified
finishing appears in
place of XXX)
"Exceeded the maximum When the copy volume For details about the copy volume use
number of sheets that can use limitation is limitation, consult the user administrator. The
be used. Copying will be enabled, copying was user administrator can change the limit on the
stopped." canceled because the copy volume use.
copy volume of the user See "Specifying Maximum Print Volume Use of
exceeded the upper Each User", User Guide (Full Version).
limit allotted for the user.
"Set next original(s), then Duplex copying is When not copying onto both sides of paper,
press [Start]." specified. clear the [1 sided 2 sided] and [2 sided 2
sided] check boxes.
"Stapling capacity The number of sheets Check the number of sheets that can stapled
exceeded." that can be stapled together at a time, and reduce the number of
together is exceeded. sheets in the original placed on the machine.
213
9. Troubleshooting
When a Message Appears While Using

Document Server
For details about the messages that are displayed when printing a document, see the descriptions of the
messages that are displayed in the copy function.
page 213 "When a Message Appears While Using the Copy Function"
"Cannot delete the folder The folder contains a Request the file administrator to unlock the
because it contains locked document. document. The file administrator can unlock
locked files. Please documents.
contact the file See "Specifying Access Privileges for
administrator." Documents Stored in Document Server", User
"Cannot display preview The format of the image Press [Confirm] to display the preview screen
of this page." data is corrupted. without a thumbnail. If the image data
comprises multiple pages, press [Switch
Display Page] to display a different page.
"Magazine or Booklet A document scanned in You cannot specify [Booklet] or [Magazine] to

mode cannot be used for the copy function and a the document comprising data stored in the
data stored with mixed document stored in the different functions.
functions." printer function are
selected together, and
[Booklet] or [Magazine]
is specified.
"The selected folder is The wrong password Request the file administrator to unlock the
locked. Please contact was entered 10 times folder. The file administrator can unlock
the file administrator." while performing folders.
operation on a See "Managing Folders as a File
password-protected Administrator", User Guide (Full Version).
folder, and the folder is
locked.
214
When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

Fax Function
• When confirming or changing the settings in [Settings], press [Home] ( ) after closing [Settings].
Messages that Appear During Operation or When Sending/Receiving a Fax

Cannot Be Performed
"Cannot receive emails The machine is receiving Wait a while, and press [Manual Reception:
currently." a On-demand Email Email].
Notification (a query e-
mail from the
administrator), and
manual reception
cannot be performed.
"Error occurred, and An original had jammed Press [Confirm], remove the jammed original,
transmission was while sending a fax. and then send the fax again.
cancelled."
An error occurred Press [Confirm] and send the fax again.
temporarily in the
machine, or there was
interference on the line
such as excessive noise
or cross-talk.
"Functional problem The power of the Even if you turn on the power immediately, you
occurred. Stopped machine was lost while may not be able to resume reception until the
processing." receiving an Internet timeout duration has passed depending on the
Fax. settings of the e-mail server. Wait a while. To
receive the fax manually, wait until the
duration has passed and then operate the
machine to perform reception. For the timeout
duration, consult the administrator.
215
9. Troubleshooting
"Memory is full. Cannot The memory is full. Press [Confirm] to return to the stand-by state
scan more. Transmitting and start sending the pages that are already
only scanned pages." scanned and stored. Check the transmission
result report for unsent pages, and send those
pages later.
"Some invalid A folder destination is When sending a fax to a destination other than
destination(s) contained. included in the group. a folder destination, press [Select].
Do you want to select
only valid
destination(s)?"
• When the JPEG/PDF file that is attached to an e-mail is sent to the machine, check the message
and resolve the problem accordingly.
• page 229 "When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function"
Messages that Appear When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Network
For details about your network environment, consult the network administrator.
"Check whether there are The destination device • Check that the computer specified as the
any network did not respond. destination is operating normally and
problems."[14-01] connected to the network.
• Check that the machine is connected to
the network correctly.
"Check whether there are You do not have Check the access permission settings of the
any network permission to access the shared folder on the destination computer.
problems."[14-03] shared folder specified page 138 "Scanning Documents and Sending
as the destination. the Scanned Data to a Folder"
216
"Check whether there are The shared folder Creating a shared folder on the destination
any network specified as the transfer computer. To check the folder name, select the
problems."[14-07] destination cannot be destination in the address book, press [Edit],
found in Folder Transfer. and see "Path" in [Destination] tab [Folder].
See "Transferring a Received Fax Document to
E-mail Address or Folder", User Guide (Full
Version).
The amount of available Check that the computer specified as the

hard disk space on the transfer destination has enough free space.
destination computer is
insufficient to perform
Folder Transfer.
"Check whether there are The password Select the forwarding destination in the
any network registered in the address address book, press [Edit], and specify a
problems."[14-09] book is invalid when password in the [Destinations] tab [Folder]
performing Folder [Folder Authentication Info].
Transfer.
"Check whether there are [Fax Email Account] is Register email address, user name, and
any network not specified. password in [Settings] [Fax Settings]
problems."[14-33] [Detailed Initial Settings] [Fax Email
Account].
"Check whether there are The destination to which Register the destination folder to the address
any network to perform Folder book.
problems."[14-51] Transfer was deleted See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use
from the address book. for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).
"Check whether there are The POP3 (IMAP4) Check the settings in [Reception Protocol],
any network server could not be [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings] and [Email
problems."[15-11] found. Communication Port] on [Settings] [System
Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email].
The DNS server could Check the [DNS Configuration] setting on

not be found. [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].
The machine is not Check that the machine is connected to the

connected to the network correctly.
network.
217
9. Troubleshooting
"Network communication The SIP server could not Specify the correct "SIP Server IP Address" in
has failed. Cannot be accessed. [Settings] [Fax Settings] [Detailed Initial
access the SIP server. Settings] [IP-Fax Settings] [SIP Settings].
Please check the address See "Sending Documents by IP-Fax", User
setting of the SIP server Guide (Full Version).
or the SIP server
settings."
"Network communication The destination device is Sending a fax using the IP-Fax function is not
has failed. Cannot unable to connect with possible. Send the fax using the G3 line if
connect to the destination the IP-Fax function of possible.
normally because there the machine.
is no IP-FAX function
compatibility between
the destination and this
machine."
"Network communication The SIP server rejected Specify the correct "SIP Server IP Address" and
has failed. Cannot the registration of the "SIP User Name" in [Settings] [Fax Settings]
register this machine to user name. [Detailed Initial Settings] [IP-Fax
SIP server. Please check Settings] [SIP Settings].
the address setting of the See "Sending Documents by IP-Fax", User
SIP server or other Guide (Full Version).
settings of the SIP server."
"Network communication The POP3 (IMAP4) Check the settings in [Reception Protocol],
has failed. Failed to server could not be [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings] and [Email
connect to POP/IMAP found. Communication Port] on [Settings] [System
server. Please check Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email].
machine settings and the
status of server and The DNS server could Check the [DNS Configuration] setting on
network." not be found. [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].
The machine is not Check that the machine is connected to the

connected to the network correctly.
network.
218
"Network communication The SMTP server could Check [SMTP Server] on [Settings] [System
has failed. Failed to not be found. Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email].
connect to the
destination. Please check The DNS server could Check [DNS Configuration] on [Settings]
if the destination is not be found. [System Settings] [Network/Interface].
correct and destination The machine is not Check that the machine is connected to the
machine status." connected to the network correctly.
network.
Communication with the • Check that the computer specified as the

destination specified for transfer destination is operating normally
Folder Transfer could and connected to the network.
not be established • Check the transfer settings.
properly.
See "Transferring a Received Fax
Document to E-mail Address or Folder",
The destination could Check that the destination is specified correctly.

not be found when the See "Sending Internet Faxes without Using
fax was sent without SMTP Server", User Guide (Full Version).
using the SMTP server.
"Network communication The shared folder Specify the destination from the address book,
has failed. Failed to specified as the press [Edit], and check that the setting in the
connect to the destination destination of Folder [Destinations] tab [Folder] matches the
folder. Please check if the Transfer cannot be folder name or path of the shared folder on the
destination is correct and found. destination computer.
destination machine If the shared folder on the destination computer
settings." has been deleted, create the folder.
Version).
219
9. Troubleshooting
"Network communication A malfunction is Check that the SMTP server and the computer
has failed. Failed to occurring on the SMTP specified as the transfer destination are
send. Please check a server or the computer functioning normally.
destination machine specified as the
status and both destination when
authentication setting of sending an e-mail
destination machine and without using the SMTP
this machine." server.
"Network communication No free space is Check that free space is available on the SMTP
has failed. Failed to available on an SMTP server and the destination computer.
send. Please check server, the computer
destination machine specified as the
status and remaining destination for Folder
memory." Transfer, or the
computer specified as
the destination when
sending an e-mail
without using the SMTP
server.
"Network communication The specified Check the destination e-mail address, and
has failed. Failed to destination does not specify again if necessary.
send. Please check if the exist.
destination is correct."
The destination could Check that the destination is specified correctly.
not be found when the See "Sending Internet Faxes without Using
fax was sent without SMTP Server", User Guide (Full Version).
using the SMTP server.
"Network communication A malfunction is Check that the SMTP server and the destination
has failed. Failed to occurring on an SMTP computer are functioning normally.
send. Please check status server, the computer
and settings of the specified as the
destination machine." destination for Folder
Transfer, or the
sending an e-mail
server.
220
"Network communication A malfunction is Check that the SMTP server and the destination
has failed. Failed to occurring on an SMTP computers are functioning normally.
send. Please check the server, the computer
access privilege setting specified as the
of the destination." destination for Folder
Transfer, or the
sending an e-mail
server.
The shared folder Creating a shared folder on the destination

specified as the transfer computer. To check the folder name, select the
destination cannot be destination in the address book, press [Edit],
found in Folder Transfer. and see "Path" in [Destination] tab [Folder].
Version).
The user name and/or Select the forwarding destination in the

password registered in address book, press [Edit], and specify
the address book are [Destinations] tab [Folder] [Folder
invalid when performing Authentication Info] again.
Folder Transfer. See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use
for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).
"Network communication The administrator e-mail • Specify [Settings] [System Settings]

has failed. Failed to address is not registered [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email]
send. Please check the when the machine is [Administrator's Email Address].
administrator email configured to send • When configuring the machine to not
address setting." Records by e-mail. send Records by e-mail, change the
current value of bit number [4] under
switch number [21] in [Settings] [Fax
Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings]
[Parameter Setting] [Parameter
Setting].
See "Viewing the History of Sent and
Received Faxes", User Guide (Full
Version).
221
9. Troubleshooting
"Network communication The user name and/or Select the forwarding destination in the
has failed. Failed to password registered in address book, press [Edit], and specify
send. Please check user the address book are [Destinations] tab [Folder] [Folder
name and password." invalid when performing Authentication Info] again.
Folder Transfer. See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use
for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).
"Network communication Both the e-mail address Specify [Fax Email Account] on [Settings]
has failed. Failed to to use for sending and [Fax Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] or
send. The registration of receiving e-mails and [Administrator's Email Address] on [Settings]
fax email address or the administrator e-mail [System Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)]
administrator email address are not [Email].
address is required." registered when sending See "Sending Documents by Internet Fax",
an e-mail. User Guide (Full Version).
"Network communication A domain name was not • Specify a host name or IP address as the
has failed. Failed to specified when sending destination, and send the e-mail again.
send. The specified an e-mail without using • When you specified the destination from
address is invalid." the SMTP server. the address book, select the destination in
the address book, press [Edit], and then
check the settings in "Send via SMTP
Server" and "SMTP Authentication Info" in
[Destinations] tab [Email Address].
See "Sending Internet Faxes without Using
SMTP Server", User Guide (Full Version).
"Network communication [Fax Email Account] is Specify the settings in "User Name" and
has failed. Fax email not specified. "Password" in [Settings] [Fax Settings]
account is not registered. [Detailed Initial Settings] [Fax Email
Please check settings." Account].
"Network communication [Fax Email Account] is Register Email Address in [Settings] [Fax
has failed. Fax email not specified. Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] [Fax
address is not registered. Email Account].
Please check settings."
222
"Network communication The destination device • Check that the computer specified as the
has failed. No response did not respond. destination is operating normally and
from the destination. connected to the network.
Please check the cable • Check that the machine is connected to
connection and if the the network correctly.
network equipment is
turned on."
"Network communication A login attempt to the Check the [POP before SMTP] setting on
has failed. POP/IMAP POP3 (IMAP4) server [Settings] [System Settings] [Send
server authentication failed. (Email/Folder)] [Email] and the [Fax Email
error has occurred. Account] setting on [Settings] [Fax Settings]
Please check email [Detailed Initial Settings].
account and password."
"Network communication The POP3 (IMAP4) Specify the setting in [Settings] [System
has failed. POP/IMAP server address is not Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email]
server is not registered. registered. [POP3 / IMAP4 Settings].
Please check settings."
"Network communication A user certificate Install the correct user certificate.

has failed. S/MIME (destination certificate) "Encrypting Network Communication", Security
certificate error has is not registered or has
occurred. Please check expired.
the certificate of both
destination and this A device certificate Install the correct device certificate.
machine." (destination certificate) "Encrypting Network Communication", Security
is not registered or has
expired.
"Network communication The authentication Check that the password registered on the SIP
has failed. SIP digest password on the SIP server and "Password" in SIP Digest
authentication failed. server and the Authentication under [Settings] [Fax
Please check the SIP password registered on Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] [IP-
digest authentication user the machine do not Fax Settings] [SIP Settings] match.
name and password." match. See "Sending Documents by IP-Fax", User
223
9. Troubleshooting
"Network communication The user certificate Install a new user certificate.

has failed. The certificate (destination certificate) "Encrypting Network Communication", Security
of destination is not has expired.
currently valid. Please re-
issue it."
"Network communication A device certificate Install a new device certificate.

has failed. The certificate (destination certificate) "Encrypting Network Communication", Security
of this machine is not is not registered or has
currently valid. Please re- expired.
issue it."
"Network communication The user certificate Install a new user certificate and device
has failed. The certificate (destination certificate) certificate.
of this machine or and device certificate "Encrypting Network Communication", Security
destination machine is have expired.
not currently valid.
Please re-issue it."
"Network communication An IP-Fax was sent to a Sending a fax using the IP-Fax function is not
has failed. The destination that does not possible. Send the fax using the G3 line if
destination does not support IP-Fax. possible.
support IP-FAX."
"Network communication An invalid IP address is Specify the correct [Effective Protocol] and [IP
has failed. The IP registered. Address (IPv4)], or [IP Address (IPv6)] on
address is invalid. Please [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
check the network Interface].
settings." See "Connecting to a Wired LAN", User Guide
(Full Version).
224
"Network communication The settings in [SIP Check that SIP Server IP Address in [Settings]
has failed. The IP Server IP Address] and [Fax Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings]
address may be invalid. [Effective Protocol] do [IP-Fax Settings] [SIP Settings] and
Please check the network not match. [Effective Protocol] on [Settings] [System
settings." Settings] [Network/Interface] are correct.
An invalid IP address is Specify the correct [Effective Protocol] and [IP

registered. Address (IPv4)], or [IP Address (IPv6)] on
[Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].
See "Connecting to a Wired LAN", User Guide
(Full Version).
"Network communication The destination • Check that the destination is specified

has failed. The line has terminated the correctly.
been disconnected. communication. • If the destination refuses to receive a fax
Please check the with no sender information, enable
destination and caller ID notifying of the information and send the
notification setting." fax again.
"Network communication When a signature is Check that the authentication e-mail address
has failed. The mail specified, the SMTP matches the address specified in [Settings]
address for authentication e-mail [System Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)]
authentication does not address or POP before [Email] [Administrator's Email Address].
match with SMTP authentication e- See "Machine Status Notification by E-mail",
administrator's one. mail address does not User Guide (Full Version).
Please check the match the administrator
settings." e-mail address.
• Change the current value to [1] under switch number [21] and bit number [6] in [Settings] [Fax
Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] [Parameter Setting] [Parameter Setting] to disable
displaying the "Network communication has failed." message. Change the setting when you are
not using the IP-Fax or Internet Fax function.
• See "Changing the Parameter Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
Messages that Appear When the Remote Fax Function Is Unavailable
For details about your network environment, consult the network administrator.
225
9. Troubleshooting
When a message is displayed on the main-machine
"Check whether there are The machine is not • Check that the machine is
any network problems." connected to the network. connected to the network
[16-00] correctly.
• Press [Confirm] to use the G3
fax.
"Connection with the Another main-machine is Register the sub-machine in

remote machine has failed. registered in [Remote [Settings] [System Settings]
There is a problem with the Machine]. [Machine] [Others]
remote machine structure. [Register/Change/Delete Remote
Contact the administrator." Machine].
Another main-machine is Register the machine in [Settings]

registered in [Remote [System Settings] [Machine]
Machine] on the sub- [Others] [Register/Change/
machine. Delete Remote Machine] on the
sub-machine.
"Transfer error has A network error occurred • Check that the machine is
occurred. Check the status while transferring the data. connected to the network
of the remote machine." correctly.
• Check that the sub-machine is
connected to the network and
functioning normally.
• Check that the IP address or
host name of the main-machine
is specified correctly in
[Settings] [System Settings]
[Machine] [Others]
[Register/Change/Delete
Remote Machine] on the sub-
machine.
226
When a message is displayed on the sub-machine
"Authentication with remote Authentication failed when Specify the same user authentication
machine failed. Check user authentication is setting as the main-machine, and
remote machine's enabled on the main- register a user who has the
authentication settings." machine, or the user does permission to use the fax function.
not have permission to use "Verifying Users to Operate the
the fax function. Machine (User Authentication)",
Security
"Check whether there are The machine is not Check that the machine is
any network problems." connected to the network. connected to the network correctly.
[16-00]
"Connection with the The main-machine is turned Turn on the power of the main-
remote machine has failed. off, or not functioning machine. If the power is turned on,
Check the remote machine normally. check that the device is functioning
status." normally.
A network error occurred. Check that the machine and the

main-machine are connected to the
network correctly.
A timeout error occurred Check that the IP address or host

while connecting to the name of the main-machine is
main-machine. specified correctly in [Settings]
[System Settings] [Machine]
[Others] [Register/Change/
Delete Remote Machine] on the
sub-machine.
"Connection with the Another sub-machine is Register the main-machine in

remote machine has failed. registered in [Remote [Settings] [System Settings]
There is a problem with the Machine]. [Machine] [Others]
remote machine structure. [Register/Change/Delete Remote
Contact the administrator." Machine].
The machine is not Register the machine in [Settings]

registered in [Remote [System Settings] [Machine]
Machine] on the main- [Others] [Register/Change/
machine. Delete Remote Machine] on the
main-machine.
227
9. Troubleshooting
"Remote fax is not User Code authentication is User Code authentication is not
available because [User specified. supported on both the main-
Code Authentication] is machine and sub-machine.
active." Consider another method of user
authentication.
"Remote machine The main-machine could Check that the IP address or host
registration is incorrect. not be found. name of the main-machine is
Contact the administrator." specified correctly in [Settings]
[System Settings] [Machine]
[Others] [Register/Change/
Delete Remote Machine].
"Transfer error has A network error occurred • Check that the machine is
occurred. Check the status while transferring the data. connected to the network
of the remote machine." correctly.
• Check that the main-machine is
connected to the network and
functioning normally.
• Check that the IP address or
host name of the main-machine
is specified correctly in
[Settings] [System Settings]
[Machine] [Others]
[Register/Change/Delete
Remote Machine].
"Transfer error has There is no free space Delete files that are no longer
occurred. Check the status available on the hard disk needed on the main-machine.
of the remote machine." of the main-machine.
"The HDD of the remote
machine is full."
228
When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Printer Function
Messages that Appear without Error Codes
Message Cause Solution and reference
"Address Book is The address book Try again later.

currently in use by is in use by another
another function. function, and
Authentication has authentication
failed." query is not
possible.
"A job via the When the error job • Check that the machine is connected to the network
network that was storing function is correctly. For details about your network
not printed exists enabled, an error environment, consult the network administrator.
because an error occurred in the • The stored document can be printed.
occurred. It was print job sent via
page 128 "Printing Documents Stored in the Printer
stored as a job not the network and
from the Control Panel"
printed." the canceled job
was stored.
"All the remaining The job was All job slots are occupied by other devices. Check the
print volume has canceled because status of the client machine.
been allocated to the usage count
another central information could
managed client(s). not be obtained
The job has been from the Central
cancelled." Management
machine.
"An error occurred A size that is Specify a size smaller than 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) wide
while printing a job impossible to print and 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) long in "Print On:" in the
with Background was specified. printer driver. When [Same as Original Size] is specified
Numbering. The in "Print On:", reduce the size specified in "Print On:" or
job has been adjust the size in the application.
cancelled."
229
9. Troubleshooting
"An error occurred The settings in the Check the following in the printer driver:
while processing printer driver are • Is a value smaller than 600 dpi specified in
an Unauthorized incorrect. [Resolution]?
Copy Prevention
See "Applying Different Print Settings Depending on
job. The job was
the Document Type", User Guide (Full Version).
cancelled."
• Is only space(s) entered as the text to use for the
background pattern in the unauthorized copy
prevention function?
• Is Document Server specified as the print method?
See "Storing Documents to Print in the Machine",
Unauthorized Consult the device administrator for the settings of the

copy prevention is machine. The machine administrator can change the
given priority in setting in [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for
[Settings for Administrator] [Security Pattern/Stamp]
Administrator]. [Unauthorized Copy Prevention Printing: Printer].
See "Administrator Tools (System Settings)", User Guide
(Full Version).
"Auto-registration The maximum Delete a user that is no longer necessary from the address
of user information number of items book.
has failed." that can be
registered has
been exceeded
and the
authentication
information for
LDAP
authentication or
Windows
authentication
cannot be
registered
automatically.
230
"Cannot access the An SD card or • Check that the external media is formatted in FAT16
Memory Storage USB flash memory or FAT32, and write protection is not enabled on the
Device." device is media.
unavailable for • Check that the external media is not corrupted or
use. damaged.
"Cannot store data The paper size is Reduce the paper size of the document to send. The
of this size." too large. document to send cannot be stored at a custom size.
"Classification A classification Consult the machine administrator for the classification

Code is incorrect." code is not code, and enter the code in [Classification Code] in
specified. [Detailed Settings] on the [Basic] tab [Modify] under
[Job Type] in the printer driver.
The document was Request the machine administrator to change the setting of
printed in a printer the classification code. Machine administrator: Change
driver that does [Classification Code] to [Optional] in Web Image
not support the Monitor if necessary.
classification code. See "Managing the Number of Printed Sheets Using the
Classification Code", User Guide (Full Version).
"Collate has been The sort function Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds or
cancelled." was canceled. more after confirming that the main power indicator is
"Command Error" A problem Check that the machine can communicate with the
occurred in the computer properly.
data because of
the communication
status or another
reason.
A printer driver Use the printer driver for the machine. Obtain and install
that does not the latest version of the driver.
support the
machine was used.
The print command In the printer driver, specify [Edge Smoothing] on the
did not complete [Others] tab [Special Settings].
correctly.
231
9. Troubleshooting
"Communication The job was Check the status of the Central Management machine.
error with central canceled because
management a Central
server has Management
occurred. The job communication
has been error occurred.
cancelled."
"Compressed Data Compressed data • Check that the tool used for creating the compressed
Error." is corrupted. data is functioning properly.
• Check that the machine can communicate with the
computer properly.
"Connection with The machine is • Check whether a message is displayed on the

the machine has malfunctioning, control panel.
failed. Check the and [Printer] • Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10
machine structure." cannot be used. seconds or more after confirming that the main
power indicator is turned off, and then turn on the
power.
"Data storage Printing a If the message persists even after you have turned the
error." document as Test power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.
Print, Locked Print,
Hold Print, Store
Print, or storing the
document in
Document Server
failed. The hard
disk is
malfunctioning.
"Document Server Use of the Consult the user administrator.

is not available to Document Server
use. Cannot store." function is
restricted.
"Duplex has been The paper source Specify to use the paper tray for duplex printing in
cancelled." tray is not specified [Settings] [Tray/Paper Settings] [Paper Type] in
for duplex printing. [Paper Size/Paper Type].
232
"Error has An error such as a Check that the PDF file to print does not have an error.
occurred." syntactic error has
occurred.
"Exceeded max. The hard disk is • Reduce the size of the document to send.
capacity of almost full. • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
Document Server.
See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine",
Cannot store."
See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
"Exceeded max. The maximum Erase a Hold Print (Auto) document that is no longer
number of files. number of Store needed.
(Auto)" Print jobs or the See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine", User
maximum number Guide (Full Version).
of jobs that can be
managed for Hold
Print (Auto)
documents has
been exceeded
while storing a
document printed
by Normal Print as
a Hold Print job by
the error job
storing function.
"Exceeded max. The number of Erase documents that are no longer needed.
number of files of documents stored See "Erasing Documents from Document Server", User
Document Server. in the machine Guide (Full Version).
Cannot store." exceeds the
maximum number.
233
9. Troubleshooting
"Exceeded max. An "exceeded • Reduce the number of pages to print.

number of pages. max. number of • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
(Auto)" pages" error
occurred while
storing a document
printed by Normal See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
Print as a Hold User Guide (Full Version).
Print job by the
error job storing
function.
"Exceeded max. The number of • Reduce the number of pages in the document to
number of pages of pages stored in the send.
Document Server. machine exceeds • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
Cannot store." the maximum
number.
"Exceeded max. The maximum Reduce the number of pages to print.

pages. Collate is number of sheets
incomplete." that can be sorted
has been
exceeded.
"Exceeded the When the print For details about the print volume use limitation, consult
maximum unit volume is limited, the user administrator. The user administrator can clear the
count for Print printing was counter or change the limit on the print volume.
Volume Use. The canceled because See "Checking the Counter of the Machine for Each Color
job has been the print volume of Category", User Guide (Full Version).
cancelled." a user exceeded
See "Specifying Maximum Print Volume Use of Each
the upper limit
User", User Guide (Full Version).
allotted for the
user.
"File system is full." The file system is Erase documents that are no longer needed.
full, and the PDF See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine", User
file cannot be Guide (Full Version).
printed.
See "Erasing Documents from Document Server", User
234
"Hardware An error is Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds or
Problem: HDD" occurring on the more after confirming that the main power indicator is
hard disk of the turned off, and then turn on the power.
machine. page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
"Hardware An error has If the message persists even after you have turned the
Problem: USB" occurred on the power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.
USB interface.
"Hardware An error has

Problem: Ethernet" occurred in the
Ethernet interface.
"Hardware An error has Turn off the power of the machine, check that the Wireless
Problem: Wireless occurred in the LAN board is correctly installed in the machine, and then
Card" Wireless LAN turn on the power.
board. page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
If the message persists even after you have turned the
power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.
"HDD is full." The area reserved Delete a registered form or font that is no longer
for forms or fonts in necessary.
PostScript 3 is full.
"HDD is full. (Auto)" An overflow error • Reduce the size of the document to print.
occurred in the • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
hard disk while
storing a document
printed by Normal
Print as a Hold See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
Print job by the User Guide (Full Version).
error job storing
function.
"I/O buffer An overflow has • Reduce the transmission data.

overflow." occurred in the • Increase the value in [I/O Buffer] on [Settings]
receive buffer. [Printer Settings] [Host Interface].
235
9. Troubleshooting
"Information for In LDAP Consult the user administrator. User administrator: Delete
user authentication authentication, the the corresponding user from the address book, and
is already same name is register the user again after resolving the duplicate names
registered for registered under on different servers.
another user." different IDs on
different servers,
and duplicate
names (account
names) occurred
such as when
switching the
domain (server).
"Insufficient The amount of Decrease [Resolution] in the printer driver.

Memory" available memory See "Applying Different Print Settings Depending on the
is insufficient. Document Type", User Guide (Full Version).
"Load following The paper tray • To proceed with printing after changing the paper
paper in XXX. To specified in the setting, select a tray and press [Continue]. However,
force print, select printer driver has when Staple, Cover Sheet, Slip Sheet, Chaptering,
another tray and no paper loaded. or Designate is specified, or when Duplex printing is
press [Continue]." specified on a paper tray that does not support the
(XXX indicates the function, printing cannot be performed. When Sort is
tray name) specified, only one copy of the document is printed.
• To proceed with printing on the specified paper,
load the paper in the tray.
page 167 "Loading Paper into the Paper Tray"
"Memory The insufficient In the printer driver, specify [Edge Smoothing] on the
Overflow" memory error has [Others] tab [Special Settings].
occurred while
printing from the
printer driver (PCL
6).
"Memory Retrieval The data in the Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds or
Error" memory could not more after confirming that the main power indicator is
be retrieved. turned off, and then turn on the power.
236
"Memory storage An SD card or • Use an SD card with a maximum capacity of 32 GB

device not USB flash memory or a USB flash memory that supports USB 2.0.
detected. Insert the device is not • An SD card or USB flash memory may not be
device." recognized recognized in some situations such as if the media is
properly. inserted before the application starts. Insert the SD
card or USB flash memory after the application has
started.
• Do not use an SD card or USB flash memory that is
not secured or protected by a password.
• Use media that is formatted for FAT16 or FAT32.
• Try another SD card or USB flash memory.
• Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10
seconds or more after confirming that the main
power indicator is turned off, and then turn on the
power.
"No response from In LDAP or Consult the administrator of the authentication server.
the server. Windows
Authentication has authentication, a
failed." timeout error
occurred while
submitting an
authentication
query to the server.
"Output tray has The destination to Specify the correct destination to deliver the output paper.
been changed." deliver the output
paper was
changed because
of the paper size
limitation of the
output destination.
237
9. Troubleshooting
"Paper size and/or The paper size or Specify [Driver / Command] in [Settings] [Tray/Paper
type mismatched or paper type Settings] [Printer] [Tray Setting Priority] [Bypass
no ppr. in Bypass specified in the Tray].
Tray." printer driver does
not match the
paper settings, in
the machine, for
the bypass tray.
"Paper size and The paper tray • To proceed with printing after changing the paper
type are loaded with paper setting, select a tray and press [Continue]. When
mismatched. Select of the size or type Staple, Cover Sheet, Slip Sheet, Chaptering, or
another tray from specified in the Designate is specified, or when Duplex printing is
the following and printer driver is not specified on a paper tray that does not support the
press [Continue]. available. function, printing cannot be performed. When Sort is
To cancel job, specified, only one copy of the document is printed.
press [Job Reset]. • To proceed with printing on the specified paper,
Paper size and load the paper and then check that the paper size
type can also be and type are correctly specified in [Settings]
changed in User [Tray/Paper Settings].
Tools."
page 167 "Loading Paper into the Paper Tray"
"Parallel I/F board An error has Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds or
has a problem." occurred in the more after confirming that the main power indicator is
parallel interface. turned off, and then turn on the power.
If the message persists even after you have turned the
power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.
"Printer font error." There is a problem Consider repairing the machine.

in the font file of
the machine.
"Print overrun." A page image is Decrease [Resolution] in the printer driver.

discarded while See "Applying Different Print Settings Depending on the
printing the page. Document Type", User Guide (Full Version).
"Receiving data Transmission of Send the data again.

failed." data was
canceled.
238
"Sending data Transmission of Check that the computer is operating normally.

failed." data from the
printer driver was
canceled.
"Staple error The number of Check the number of sheets that can be stabled on the
occurred. The job sheets that can be finisher in use.
has been stapled was page 273 "List of Specifications"
cancelled." exceeded, and
printing was
canceled.
"Staple has been The Staple function Check the specification of the finisher in use, and specify
cancelled." was canceled the setting accordingly.
because too many • Number of sheets that can be stapled together
printed sheets
were specified to
be stapled. • Staple position that can be specified on different
paper orientation and print data orientation
See "Stapling Printed Pages", User Guide (Full
Version).
A malfunction Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds or
occurred more after confirming that the main power indicator is
temporarily on the turned off, and then turn on the power.
machine. page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
"The job was A condition in Check the binding condition.

cancelled because which binding
the specified cannot be
settings are not performed was
applicable for specified, and
Booklet." printing was
canceled.
"The print job has The amount of • Reduce the size of the document to send.
been cancelled available space on • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
because capture the hard disk
file(s) could not be became low while
stored: Exceeded saving the capture
max. memory." data. See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
239
9. Troubleshooting
"The print job has The number of Erase documents that are no longer needed.
been cancelled documents stored See "Erasing Documents from Document Server", User
because capture in the machine Guide (Full Version).
file(s) could not be exceeded the
stored: Exceeded maximum number
max. number of while saving the
files." capture data.
"The print job has The number of • Reduce the number of pages in the document to
been cancelled pages stored in the send.
because capture machine exceeded • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
file(s) could not be the maximum
stored: Exceeded number while
max. number of saving the capture
pages per file." data.
"The selected A paper size that Print the document on paper of a size that can be fed on
paper size is not cannot be fed on the machine.
supported. This job the machine was
has been specified and
cancelled." printing was
canceled by the
auto job cancel
function that was
activated.
"The selected A paper type that Print the document on paper of a type that can be fed on
paper type is not cannot be fed on the machine.
supported. This job the machine was
has been specified and
cancelled." printing was
canceled by the
auto job cancel
function that was
activated.
240
"You do not have a Authentication Specify the authentication information in the printer driver.
privilege to use this information is not For the authentication information, consult the user
function. This job registered administrator.
has been correctly in the See "Specifying Login Information in the Printer Driver",
cancelled." printer driver. User Guide (Full Version).
The user registered Consult the user administrator. The user administrator can
in the printer driver change the access permissions in the address book.
does not have See "Confirming the Available Functions", User Guide
permission to use (Full Version).
the printer function.
Messages that Appear with Error Codes
Check the system configuration list or print settings list. The details of the error may also be printed in the
list.
See "List/Test Print", User Guide (Full Version).
"84: Error" The amount of available Reduce the transmission data.

work area is insufficient for
processing images.
"86: Error" The parameter in the control Specify the correct parameter.
code is incorrect.
"91: Error" The auto job cancel function Check that the data is correct.
(displayed in the error was activated because an
history) unable-to-analyze-
command or illegal
command error occurred,
and printing was canceled.
"92: Error" Printing is canceled from the To perform printing, operate the control
(displayed in the error control panel. panel again.
history)
241
9. Troubleshooting
"98: Error" Accessing the hard disk Turn off the power of the machine, wait for
failed. 10 seconds or more after confirming that
the main power indicator is turned off, and
then turn on the power.
"99: Error" When printing a file from an Check the data to print.
SD card or USB flash
memory device, the file to
print is in an unsupported
format or corrupt.
242
When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function

Scanner Function
Messages that Appear on the Control Panel
"All the pages are The original was placed • When scanning on the exposure glass,
detected as blank. No with the wrong side place the original with the side to scan
file was created." facing down when facing down.
[Delete Blank Page] or • When scanning on the ADF, place the
[Delete Blank Page] in original with the side to scan facing up.
OCR is specified.
All pages in the scanned

original were
determined to be blank
when [Delete Blank
Page] is specified.
All pages in the scanned Change [Settings] [Scanner Settings]

original were [Scan] [Blank Page Detection] [OCR
determined to be blank Scanned PDF: Blank Page Sensitivity] to
when [Delete Blank [Sensitivity Level 1]. The machine detects a
Page] in OCR is blank page only when the original is
specified. completely white.
Decrease the value in [Settings] [Scanner

Settings] [Scan] [Blank Page Detection]
[Blank Page Detection Level].
243
9. Troubleshooting
"Authentication with the The user name/ Select the destination in the address book,
destination has failed. password of SMTP press [Edit], and check the setting in
Check settings. To check authentication specified [Destination] tab [Email Address].
the current status, press when sending the e-mail
[Scan Files Status]." are incorrect.
The user ID/password • Select the forwarding destination in the

specified on the address book, press [Edit], and check the
destination folder in information registered in [Destinations]
Send to Folder are tab [Folder] [Folder Authentication
incorrect. Info].
• Adding "@domain-name" behind the user
name may resolve the problem.
• When a login password is not specified
on your computer, specify a login
password on the computer and register it
to the machine.
"Cannot access the An SD card or USB flash • Check that the external media is
Memory Storage memory device is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32, and write
Device." unavailable for use. encryption or protection is not enabled
on the media.
• Check that the external media is not
corrupted or damaged.
244
"Cannot find the The machine or the Check that the machine or the computer is
specified path. Please computer is not connected to the network correctly. For details
check the settings." connected to the about your network environment, consult the
network correctly. network administrator.
The computer name or Register the computer name and folder name
folder name specified in again.
the path name is
incorrect.
The firewall function is In the firewall function on the computer,

enabled on the register the machine IP address and the port to
computer. use for sending files as exceptions.
You can check the IP address in [Check Status]
"Network". For details about the ports, see
the following:
"Check original's The original is placed in Depending on the combination of the specified
orientation." the wrong orientation. settings, the orientation to set the original
differs. Be sure to place the original in the
correct orientation.
See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide
(Full Version).
245
9. Troubleshooting
"Connection with PC has The machine or the Check that the machine or the computer is
failed. Check the computer is not connected to the network correctly. For details
settings." connected to the about your network environment, consult the
network correctly. network administrator.
The computer name or Register the computer name and folder name
folder name specified in again.
the path name is
incorrect.
The firewall function is In the firewall function on the computer,

enabled on the register the machine IP address and the port to
computer. use for sending files as exceptions.
You can check the IP address in [Check Status]
"Network". For details about the ports, see
the following:
"Connection with the The firewall function is Enable file and printer sharing in the firewall
destination has failed. enabled on the function on your computer.
Check the settings. computer.
Entered path name might
be incorrect, or firewall
and security settings
might be blocking
network connectivity."
"Exceeded max. data The data scanned by • Decrease [Send Settings] [Resolution].
capacity. Check the specifying [Scan Ratio] • Specify a smaller paper size in [Send
resolution or ratio, then [Specify Size] Settings] [Scan Ratio] [Specify
press [Start] again." exceeds the limit. Size].
"Exceeded max. data A large size original • Decrease [Send Settings] [Resolution].
capacity. Check the was scanned at a high • Specify a smaller size in [Send Settings]
scanning resolution, then resolution, and the [Scan Size].
XXX." resulting data size
(procedure described in exceeds the limit.
place of XXX)
246
"Exceeded max. email The file size per page • Specify a lower value in [Send Settings]
size. Sending email has has exceeded the [Resolution], or select a smaller paper
been cancelled. Check maximum e-mail size size in [Send Settings] [Scan Ratio]
[Max. Email Size] in specified in [Maximum [Specify Size].
Scanner Features." Email Size]. • You can change the [Maximum Email
Size] setting on [Settings] [Scanner
Settings] [Sending Settings] [Email
(Size)]. To divide an e-mail that exceeds
the maximum size, specify [Yes (per
Page)] or [Yes (per Max. Size)] in [Divide
& Send Email].
"Exceeded max. number The number of entered Check the maximum number of characters.
of alphanumeric characters has page 310 "The Setting Values of the
characters." exceeded the maximum. Transmission Function"
"Insufficient memory in There is no free space Change the external media. When scanning
the memory storage available on the SD an original in the divide-document or single-
device." card or USB flash page mode, the saved data may not contain
memory device, or the all pages in the original. Change the external
file could not be saved media and press [Retry] to resume saving the
due to insufficient space remaining data.
on the media.
247
9. Troubleshooting
"Memory storage device An SD card or USB flash • Use an SD card with a maximum
not detected. Insert the memory device is not capacity of 32 GB or a USB flash
device." recognized properly. memory that supports USB 2.0.
• An SD card or USB flash memory may
not be recognized in some situations such
as if the media is inserted before the
application starts. Insert the SD card or
USB flash memory after the application
has started.
• Do not use an SD card or USB flash
memory that is not secured or protected
by a password.
• Use media that is formatted for FAT16 or
FAT32.
• Try another SD card or USB flash
memory.
• Turn off the power of the machine, wait
for 10 seconds or more after confirming
that the main power indicator is turned
off, and then turn on the power.
"Not all of the image will The scaling factor Specify a smaller value in [Send Settings]
be scanned. Check the specified in [Scan Ratio] [Scan Ratio].
ratio and then press is too large.
[Start] again."
The paper size specified Specify a paper size for which a reduction
in [Scan Ratio] ratio greater than 25% is specified in [Send
[Specify Size] requires a Settings] [Scan Ratio] [Specify Size].
reduction value smaller
than 25%.
"Programmed. Cannot A folder specified by Register the destination in the address book of
program the Manual Entry is the machine, and then register it to a program.
destination(s) that is not included among the
programmed in the programmed
address book." destinations.
248
"Programmed. Cannot A destination specified • You cannot program a destination

program the folder with a protection code is specified with a protection code. Specify
destination(s) with included among the this destination individually.
protection code(s)." programmed • To program this destination, cancel the
destinations. protection code and then register the
destination to a program.
See "Using the Protection Function to
Prevent the Misuse of Addresses", User
"SMTP authentication The SMTP Register the SMTP authentication e-mail

email address and authentication e-mail address in [Settings] [System Settings]
administrator email address is not registered [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email]
address mismatch." in the administrator e- [Administrator's Email Address].
mail address.
"Some invalid The group contains an When sending data to a destination other than
destination(s) contained. e-mail address. an e-mail address, press [Select].
Do you want to select
only valid
destination(s)?"
"The program is recalled. A folder destination • You cannot recall a destination specified
Cannot recall the folder specified with a with a protection code in a program.
destination(s) with protection code is Specify this destination individually.
protection code(s)." included among the • To program this destination, cancel the
programmed protection code and then register the
destinations. destination to a program.
See "Using the Protection Function to
Prevent the Misuse of Addresses", User
"The size of the scanned The data scanned by • Increase [Send Settings] [Resolution].
data is too small. Check specifying [Scan Ratio] • Specify a larger paper size in [Send
the resolution and the [Specify Size] is too Settings] [Scan Ratio] [Specify
ratio and then press small. Size].
[Start] again."
249
9. Troubleshooting
"Transmission has failed. The amount of available Check that the amount of free space is
Insufficient memory in the hard disk space on the sufficient.
destination hard disk. To destination computer,
check the current status, SMTP server, or FTP
press [Scan Files Status]." server is insufficient.
"Transmission has failed. A network error If the same message is displayed after
To check the current occurred while scanning the original again, consult the
status, press [Scan Files transferring the data due administrator.
Status]." to a busy network or
another reason.
Messages that Appear on the Computer
"Any of Login User The login user name or Enter the correct login user name and
Name, Login Password password entered in password in [General User Authentication] that
or Driver Encryption Key [General User is displayed after clicking [Scan]. For the login
is incorrect." Authentication] is user name and password, consult the user
incorrect. administrator.
The driver encryption Register the driver encryption key on [Details]

key is not registered [Authenticate] tab in the TWAIN driver. For
correctly in the TWAIN the driver encryption key, consult the network
driver. administrator.
"The authentication The SNMPv3 Consult the network administrator for the
password and/or authentication SNMPv3 authentication information, and
authentication algorithm information registered in change the information registered in Network
may be incorrect, or the Network Connection Connection Tool.
machine does not Tool does not match the See "Installing the TWAIN Driver", User Guide
support the information of the (Full Version).
authentication algorithm. machine.
Please check."
"Authentication The logged-in user does Consult the user administrator. The user
succeeded. However, the not have access administrator can change the access
access privileges for privileges to use the permissions in the address book.
scanner function has scanner function. See "Confirming the Available Functions", User
been denied." Guide (Full Version).
250
"Cannot add any more The maximum number of Delete scanning modes that are no longer
scanning mode." scanning modes that necessary.
can be registered
exceeds the maximum
number (100).
"Cannot connect to the An access mask is Consult your administrator.

scanner. Check the specified.
network Access Mask
settings in User Tools."
"Cannot find the scanner. The firewall function is Configure the firewall function of the computer
Check if the scanner enabled on the to allow communication of the application
main power is on." computer. used, or disable the firewall function.
"Cannot specify any The maximum number of Delete scanning areas that are no longer
more scanning area." scanning areas that can necessary.
be registered exceeds
the maximum number
(100).
"Communication error A communication error Check that the settings for the communication
has occurred on the has occurred on the protocol (TCP/IP) are configured correctly on
network." network. the computer.
"Entered User Code is The correct user code is Register the User Code on [Details]
not registered or you do not registered in the [Authenticate] tab in the TWAIN driver. For the
not have access TWAIN drive when User Code, consult the user administrator.
privileges to use the User Code
scanner function, please authentication is
contact your specified on the
administrator." machine.
The User Code Consult the user administrator. The user

registered in the TWAIN administrator can change the access
driver is not assigned permissions in the address book.
with the privileges to use See "Confirming the Available Functions", User
the scanner function. Guide (Full Version).
251
9. Troubleshooting
"Error has occurred in the The scan condition Specify the scan condition within the range
scanner." specified in the that can be specified on the machine.
application exceeds the page 273 "List of Specifications"
range that can be
specified on the
machine.
A malfunction is • Restart the application, and perform

occurring in the driver. scanning again.
• Install the TWAIN driver again.
A malfunction is Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10

temporarily occurring seconds or more after confirming that the main
on the machine. power indicator is turned off, and then turn on
the power.
"Error has occurred in the An error is occurring in Restart the computer.

scanner driver." the driver or operating
system.
There is a problem with Check that the computer is connected to the

the network network correctly and in an environment
environment. where the TCP/IP protocol can be used.
"Fatal error has occurred An unrecoverable error Consider repairing the machine.
in the scanner." is occurring on the
machine.
"Insufficient memory. Other applications are • Close applications on the computer.

Close all other running on the • If the same message is displayed when
applications, then restart computer, and the no other applications are running after
scanning." amount of free memory starting the computer, uninstall the
is insufficient. TWAIN driver, restart the computer, and
then install the TWAIN driver again.
252
"Insufficient memory. The memory allocated • Reduce the scan size or resolution. You
Reduce the scanning for the scanner function may be able to resolve the error also by
area." is insufficient. reducing the brightness value when
Duotone (black and white) or a high
resolution is specified.
• Specify [No Compression] on [Initial
Settings] [Compression] tab in the
TWAIN driver.
"Invalid Winsock version. Winsock is corrupted. Restore Winsock on the computer.

Please use version 1.1 or
higher."
"Scanner is not available. The power of the Check that the machine is turned on, and
Check the scanner machine is not turned connected to the network correctly.
connection status." on, or the machine is not
connected to the
network correctly.
The firewall function is Configure the firewall function of the computer

enabled on the to allow communication of the application
computer. used, or disable the firewall function.
The IP address of the Check that the host name of the machine is
machine could not be configured in Network Connection Tool that is
resolved from the host installed with the TWAIN driver.
name. See "Installing the TWAIN Driver", User Guide
(Full Version).
The IPv6 address could Log in to Web Image Monitor in the

not be obtained when administrator mode, and select [Active] in
only IPv6 is enabled on [IPv4] "LLMNR" under [Device
the machine. Management] [Configuration]
"Network".
"Scanner is not available The TWAIN scanner The TWAIN scanner function cannot be used.
on the specified device." function is disabled on
the machine.
"Scanner is not ready. The ADF is open. Close the ADF.

Check the scanner and
the options."
253
9. Troubleshooting
"Scanning has been The amount of available • Clear the [Read-ahead] check box in the
aborted because space on the hard disk TWAIN driver.
memory in Mainframe of the machine is • Erase documents that are no longer
became full." insufficient when needed from the machine.
scanning is performed
with the [Read-ahead]
check box selected in
the TWAIN driver.
"The device's Authentication cannot • When User Code or Basic authentication

authentication service be performed because is specified, wait a while until processing
cannot be performed." the authentication the machine address is completed.
service is starting up or • When Windows or LDAP authentication is
busy. specified, wait a while until the server
becomes ready for processing. If
authentication is not possible even after
waiting for a while, consult your
administrator.
"There is no response The network is busy. Wait a while.

from the scanner. There
may be a number of The firewall function is Configure the firewall function of the computer
reasons for this, e.g. the enabled on the to allow communication of the application
data between the computer. used, or disable the firewall function.
computer and scanner The machine or the Check that the machine or the computer is
has been lost because of computer is not connected to the network correctly.
an increase in network connected to the
traffic, the firewall in the network correctly.
virus protection software
may be activated, or
there might be problems
with the hardware etc. If
you can not fix this
problem, please call
service."
254
"User Authentication in The authentication Register the SNMPv3 authentication

SNMPv3 connection has information is registered information in Network Connection Tool that is
failed." incorrectly in Network installed on the computer with the TWAIN
Connection Tool when driver. For the SNMPv3 authentication
SNMPv3 encrypted information, consult your network
communication is administrator.
enabled on the See "Installing the TWAIN Driver", User Guide
machine. (Full Version).
255
9. Troubleshooting
When Other Messages Appear
"Administrator The User When specifying Basic, Windows, or LDAP

Authentication for Management authentication, configure the User Management
User Management privilege is disabled privilege in [Settings] [System Settings]
must be set to on in the administrator [Settings for Administrator] [Authentication/
before this selection authentication Charge] [Administrator Authentication/User
can be made." management. Authentication/App Auth.] [Administrator
Authentication Management].
"Registering Administrators Before Using the
Machine", Security
"Destination list / A destination is being Wait until the message disappears and do not turn
machine settings are registered and off the power of the machine. You may not be able
updated. Selected devices are being to perform operations for a while depending on the
destinations or configured using number of destinations being registered.
function settings have Web Image Monitor.
been cleared. Please
re-select the settings."
"Failed to read the The user attempted to The Web browser of the machine supports the PDF
PDF file." display a PDF file that versions and encryption levels shown below. Other
is not supported by PDF files cannot be displayed.
the Web browser of • PDF version: 1.3-1.7
the machine.
• PDF encryption level: 128-bit AES, 256-bit
AES
"Firmware update will A firmware update is It is recommended to apply the update, but you can
start. Press [OK]. It will available, and the stop the updating process by pressing [Stop] within
start automatically machine is about to 30 seconds after the message is displayed.
after 30 seconds." perform an update. Do not turn off the power of the machine while the
updating process is in progress.
256
"Incompatible USB The machine • Clean the USB ports on the back side and the
device has been accidentally detected back left side of the machine after turning off
connected. Check the a USB cable as the power of the machine.
USB device." unusable because page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
dust accumulated in
• If the problem persists, consult your service
the USB port.
representative.
"Internal cooling fan is The fan installed in You may hear a rotating noise while the fan is
active." the vent for cooling active, but you can continue using the machine as
the interior of the usual.
machine became
active after a large
number of pages has
been printed.
"Output Tray is full. The output tray is full. Remove the paper from the output tray.
Remove paper."
"Problems with the The Wireless LAN Turn off the power of the machine, check that the
wireless board. Please board can be Wireless LAN board is correctly installed in the
call service." accessed, but an machine, and then turn on the power.
error has been page 9 "Turning On and Off the Power"
detected.
If the message persists even after you have turned
the power off and then on, consider repairing the
machine.
"Updating the A destination is being Wait until the message disappears and do not turn
destination list... registered using Web off the power of the machine. You may not be able
Please wait. Specified Image Monitor. to perform operations for a while depending on the
destination(s) or number of destinations being registered.
sender's name has
been cleared."
"Updating the A network error Check the connection between the machine and the
destination list has occurred. computer.
failed. Try again?"
Anti-virus software or Add the destination list program to the exception list
a firewall function is in the anti-virus software on the computer, or register
running on the the machine IP address to the exception list in the
computer. firewall function. You can check the IP address in
[Check Status] "Network".
257
9. Troubleshooting
"You do not have the The logged-in user Consult the user administrator. The user
privileges to use this does not have the administrator can change the access permissions in
function." privileges to use the the address book.
specified function. "Preventing Information Leaks", Security
Changing the setting Check the administrative privilege required for

is not allowed under changing the specified setting.
the administrative "Registering Administrators Before Using the
privileges granted to Machine", Security
the logged-in user.
Messages that Appear When Machine Login Fails
Check the error code displayed with the "Authentication has failed." message, and taken the necessary
action.
• The letter at the beginning of the error code indicates the type of authentication specified on the
machine.
• B: Basic authentication
• W: Windows authentication
• L: LDAP authentication
"Authentication has An operation in the Check whether another user is logged in to the
failed." TWAIN supporting machine, and then perform the operation.
B/W/L0103-000 application was
performed from the
computer while a user
was logged in to the
machine or performing
the login procedure.
258
"Authentication has An incorrect password Enter the correct password.

failed." was entered.
B/W/L0104-000
The Driver Encryption Consult the network administrator whether the
Key is not registered Driver Encryption Key is required, and
correctly in the TWAIN configure the driver accordingly.
driver. See "Specifying Login Information in the Printer
Driver", User Guide (Full Version).
See "Specifying Login Information in the LAN-
Fax Driver", User Guide (Full Version).
The network administrator can check the
setting of "Driver Encryption Key: Encryption
Strength" in [Settings] [System Settings]
[Settings for Administrator] [Security]
[Extended Security Settings].
"Authentication has An incorrect login user Enter the correct login user name and
failed." name or password was password.
B/W/L0206-002 entered.
A user has attempted to The user needs to log in from the application
log in to the functions login screen.
that can be accessed
only by the
administrator such as
[Settings] when
[Application
Authentication
Management] is
specified.
"Authentication has ":" or another character • Enter the correct login user name.
failed." that cannot be used in a • Change the user name if it contains a
B/W/L0206-003 login user name was space, ":" or other unusable characters.
entered.
"Authentication has Web Image Monitor or Wait a while.

failed." another method was
B/W/L0207-001 used to edit or create a
backup of the address
book.
259
9. Troubleshooting
"Authentication has The account is locked Request the user administrator to unlock the
failed." because the number of account.
B/W/L0208-000 failed login attempts has
exceeded the limit.
B/W/L0208-002
"Authentication has Web Image Monitor or Try again later.

L0307-001 used to edit or create a
book.
"Authentication has Kerberos authentication Check whether the server is operating

failed." has failed because the normally.
W0400-102 server was not
responsive.
"Authentication has Available resources are Try again later.

failed." insufficient due to too
W0400-200 many authentication
requests.
"Authentication has sAMAccountName was Use UserPrincipalName as the login user

failed." used as the login user name.
W0400-202 name when a user in the
child domain logged in
under a parent-child
domain environment,
and ldap_bind failed.
The SSL settings Check whether the SSL settings specified on

specified on the the authentication server and the device match.
authentication server
and the device do not
match.
"Authentication has The login name attribute Check whether [Login Name Attribute] is
failed." is not specified, or an specified correctly.
L0400-210 attribute on which the "Verifying Users to Operate the Machine (User
information cannot be Authentication)", Security
obtained is specified.
260
"Authentication has ":" or other characters • Enter the correct login user name.
failed." that cannot be used in a • Change the user name if it contains a
W/L0406-003 login user name was space, ":" or other unusable characters.
entered.
"Authentication has Too many requests for Try again later. If the problem persists, check
failed." authentication occurred whether the machine is under an authentication
W0406-101 at one time. attack. The attack status can be checked by the
screen message, in the system log, or in the e-
mail notification sent to the administrator.
"Authentication has A user group cannot be Check whether the group name registered on
failed." obtained. the machine is correct and whether the DC
W0406-107 settings are configured correctly.*1
Kerberos Authentication Check whether the realm name registered on

has failed. the clock at the KDC (key distribution center)
and the clock of the device are
synchronized.*3
No connection is Enter the server IP address in [Settings]

established to the [System Settings] [Network/Interface]
authentication server. [Ping Command] to check whether a
connection can be established to the server.
The domain name is Check whether the domain name registered on

incorrect or cannot be the machine is correct and whether the name
resolved. can be resolved.*2
The login user name or Check the login user name and/or password
password is incorrect. of the user registered on the server.
"Authentication has Too many requests for Try again later. If the problem persists, check
failed." authentication occurred whether the machine is under an authentication
L0406-200 at one time. attack. The attack status can be checked by the
screen message, in the system log, or in the e-
mail notification sent to the administrator.
261
9. Troubleshooting
"Authentication has [Off] is specified in the Select the server in [Settings] [System
failed." authentication settings of Settings] [Settings for Administrator]
L0406-201 the LDAP server. [Authentication/Charge] [Administrator
Authentication/User Authentication/App
Auth.] [Register/Change/Delete LDAP
Server], and then press [Register/Change]
and set [Authentication] to a setting other than
[Off].
"Authentication has The LDAP authentication Check whether the LDAP authentication
failed." settings or LDAP server settings or LDAP server settings are correctly
L0406-202 settings are incorrect. configured.*4
L0406-203 Check whether the SSL settings are supported

on the LDAP server.
The login user name or Enter the correct login user name and
password is incorrect. password. Change the login user name if it
exceeds 128 bytes in length or contains a
space, ":" or other unusable character.
The simplified Check whether the server name, login user

authentication mode is name, password, and information entered into
incorrectly used. the search filter are correct. Note that
authentication cannot be performed if
obtaining DN of the login user name under the
representative account fails in the simple
authentication mode.
"Authentication has Kerberos Authentication Check whether the realm name registered on
failed." has failed. the clock at the KDC (key distribution center)
L0406-204 and the clock of the device are
synchronized.*3
"Authentication has There was no response Check the status of the network and the server
failed." returned from the to use for authentication.
W/L0409-000 authentication server,
and an authentication
timeout error occurred.
262
"Authentication has The user registered on • Delete the older user that is redundant, or
failed." the machine has the change the login name.
W/L0511-000 same name as another • If the message is displayed after switching
user distinguished by the the authentication server, delete the user
W0517-000
unique attribute of the on the old server.
authentication server.
"Authentication has A user name that cannot Do not use "other", "admin", "supervisor", or
failed." be specified in the login "HIDE*" in user account names.
W/L0606-004 user name was
specified.

W/L0607-001 used to edit or create a
book.
"Authentication has The number of users Ask the user administrator to delete users that
failed." registered in the address are no longer needed from the address book.
W/L0612-005 book has reached the
upper limit, and auto-
registration failed.

W/L0707-001 used to edit or create a
book.
*1 When obtaining user groups, check the following:

• The user account that can obtain user groups is sAMAccountName (user). Do not use
UserPrincipalName (user@domain.xxx.co.jp) as the user name.
• Check whether the name in "Group" is correctly specified including the case-sensitivity in [Settings]
[System Settings] [Settings for Administrator] [Authentication/Charge] [Administrator
Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.] [User Authentication Management]
[Windows Authentication].
• Select the user in the address book, press [Edit], and then check that [Unavailable] is specified for
each function under the [User Management / Others] tab [User Management] [Available
Functions / Applications].
263
9. Troubleshooting
• Check whether "Global Scope" is specified as the scope of the group in a property for the user
group created in DC, and the group type specified in "Security". Also check whether an account is
registered to the user group that has been created. If more than one DC exists, check whether a
trust relationship between DCs is established.
*2 To resolve the domain name, see the following:
• Check whether [Domain Name Configuration] and [DNS Configuration] or [WINS Configuration]
is specified correctly in [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/Interface].
• Enter the IP address in [Domain Name Configuration] to check the connection. If authentication can
be performed using the IP address, check [DNS Configuration] or [WINS Configuration] again.
• If authentication by IP address is not possible, check whether LM/NTLM is set to be denied in the
domain controller security policy or domain security policy. Also check that the port is not closed in
the firewall between the device and the domain controller or in the firewall settings of the domain
controller. When the Windows firewall is enabled, create a new rule that allows communication on
port 137 and port 139 in "Advanced" of the Windows firewall. Open the TCP/IP properties from
the network connection properties, select the "Enable NetBIOS Over TCP/IP" check box on
[Advanced] [WINS] tab, and open port 137.
*3 For Kerberos authentication, check the following:
• Check that "Realm Name", "KDC Server Name", "Domain Name" are specified correctly in
[Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for Administrator] [Authentication/Charge]
[Administrator Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.] [Register/Change/Delete
Realm]. Enter "Realm Name" in upper case.
• Configure the setting so that the difference in time between the clocks on KDC and device is less
than five minutes. The clock on the machine can be adjusted in [Settings] [System Settings]
[Date/Time/Timer] [Date/Time] [Set Time].
• Kerberos authentication fails if auto-obtaining of KDC in Windows authentication fails. When auto-
obtaining cannot be activated, switch to manual.
*4 For LDAP settings, check the following:
• Check whether the LDAP server is correctly specified in [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings
for Administrator] [Authentication/Charge] [Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] [User Authentication Management] [LDAP Authentication] and
Login Name Attribute is registered correctly.
• Select the server in [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for Administrator]
[Authentication/Charge] [Administrator Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.]
[Register/Change/Delete LDAP Server], press [Register/Change] and set [Authentication] to
[Kerberos Authentication], and then execute [Connection Test].
• If the connection test fails, check whether [Domain Name Configuration] and [DNS Configuration]
or [WINS Configuration] is specified correctly on [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].
264
Messages that Appear When Logging in to the Machine Using an IC Card Fails
"Authentication has The card is locked Unlock the card.

failed." because the number of
*0150-401 times an incorrect PIN
code was entered
exceeds the limit.
"Authentication has An incorrect PIN code Enter the correct PIN.

failed." was entered.
*0151-401
"Authentication has The card authentication Connect the card authentication device again.
failed." device has been Connect the card authentication device to the
*0153-402 removed or is not USB2.0 Interface Type A on the back left side
connected properly. of the machine.
"Authentication has Reading of an IC card Set the IC card on the authentication device
failed." has failed. correctly and for a longer duration.
*0154-402
"Authentication has An incorrect user name Enter the correct user name and password.
failed." or password was
*0156-401 entered.
"The card authentication The card authentication Connect the card authentication device again.
device is not connected." device has been Connect the card authentication device to the
removed or is not USB2.0 Interface Type A on the back left side
connected properly. of the machine.
A malfunction is Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10

temporarily occurring seconds or more after confirming that the main
on the machine. power indicator is turned off, and then turn on
the power.
265
9. Troubleshooting
Messages that Appear When the LDAP Server Is Unavailable
"Connection with LDAP The network is busy. Try again.

server has failed. Check
the server status." The setting information is Check the setting information of [Settings]
incorrect. [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [Authentication/Charge]
[Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] [Register/
Change/Delete LDAP Server].
See "Programming the LDAP Server", User
"Exceeded time limit for The network is busy. Try again.

LDAP server search.
Check the server status." The setting information is Check the setting information of [Settings]
incorrect. [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [Authentication/Charge]
[Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] [Register/
Change/Delete LDAP Server].
See "Programming the LDAP Server", User
"LDAP server The user name or Select the user in the address book, press
authentication has failed. password is incorrect. [Edit], and specify the correct user name and
Check the settings." password in [User Management / Others] tab
[User Management] [LDAP
Authentication Info].
See "Registering a User in the Address Book
and Specifying the Login Information", User
266
Messages that Appear When There Is a Problem with the Certificate
"The destination cannot The device certificate Install a new device certificate used for the S/
be selected because the used for the S/MIME MIME signature.
device certificate used signature is not currently "Encrypting Network Communication",
for the S/MIME valid. Security
signature is not currently
valid."
"Signature cannot be set

because there is a
problem with the Digital
Signature's device
certificate. Check the
device certificate."
"Signature cannot be set The device certificate Use a valid device certificate for the digital
because the Digital used for the digital signature in PDF or PDF/A.
Signature's device signature in PDF or See "Scanning an Original as a PDF with
certificate is not currently PDF/A is not currently Security Setting Specified", User Guide (Full
valid." valid. Version).
"The destination cannot The device certificate
be selected because used for the digital
there is a problem with signature in PDF or
the device certificate PDF/A is missing or
used for the S/MIME invalid.
signature. Check the
device certificate."
267
9. Troubleshooting
"The destination cannot The user certificate Install a new user certificate.
be selected because its (destination certificate) "Encrypting Network Communication",
encryption certificate is has expired. Security
not currently valid."
"The group destination

cannot be selected
because it contains a
destination with a
encryption certificate that
is not currently valid."
"Transmission cannot be
performed because the
encryption certificate is
not currently valid."
Messages that Appear When an Application Site Cannot Be Used
"A server error has An unexpected error • See the server maintenance information in
occurred." has occurred on the [Information].
server. • Check whether the network settings
([DNS Configuration], [Control Panel:
"Cannot connect to Cannot connect to the
Proxy Settings]) are correctly configured.
server which installs installation server.
applications. Check See "Installing an Application from
maintenance information Application Site", User Guide (Full
on Information screen or Version).
network settings."
"Could not update the

firmware."
"Failed to download the

application"
"Failed to install the

application because an
error has occurred."
268
"Could not restore the The firmware from The firmware cannot be recovered.
firmware because the Application Site has not
required data does not been updated.
exist."
"JavaTM Platform has not JavaVM is not running. Log in to Web Image Monitor in the
been started. Install the administrator mode, and enable "JavaTM
application after JavaTM Platform" in [Device Management]
Platform has been started [Configuration] [Extended Feature Settings].
from Web Image
Monitor."
"The specified page An error has occurred in See the server maintenance information in
cannot be found." Application Site. [Information].
"There is insufficient The remaining free Delete applications that are not necessary.
space to store internally, space on the hard disk
delete any unnecessary is insufficient.
applications."
269
9. Troubleshooting
270
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the back right side of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label
contains details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
D0C9IA3606
Region A and Region B symbols

(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols.
Read the information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are
using.
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27, -29
• 220–240 V
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17, -18
• 120–127 V
271
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -27" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Europe)" also.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -29" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Asia)" also.
272
List of Specifications
• We have licenses from the authors to use their software including open sources. Refer to the files in
the Licenses folder included in the supplied CD-ROM for statements requested from the authors.
Specifications for the Main Unit
Item Specifications
Configuration Desktop
Memory 2 GB
Hard disk size 320 GB
Color Full Color
Copy process Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Exposure glass Stationary original exposure type
• Exposure glass, ADF (front side): One-dimensional solid scanning

Scan method through CCD
• ADF (back side): CIS sensor
Warm-up time • IM C300 series

(23°C (73.4°F), rated • Normal mode: 48 seconds
voltage) • Quick mode: 19 seconds
• IM C400 series
• Normal mode: 48 seconds
• Quick mode: 17 seconds
273
Item Specifications
First copy time (mainly Europe)

• IM C300 series
Full color: 8.6 seconds / B&W: 7.2 seconds
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF
(mainly Asia)
• IM C300 series
• IM C400F
• IM C300F
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF
(A4/81/2 × 11 , Tray 1, exposure glass)
Copy/print speed (per • IM C300 series

minute) • A4 (60-105 g/m2): 30 sheets/minute
(mainly Europe)
• A4 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute
274
Item Specifications
Copy/print speed (per • IM C400F

(mainly Europe)
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2): 42 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute
Copy/print speed (per • IM C400SRF

minute) • A4 (60-81 g/m2), One-sided printing: 40 sheets/minute
(mainly Europe)
• A4 (60-81 g/m2), B&W, 2-sided printing: 40 sheets/
minute
• A4 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color, 2-sided printing: 38 sheets/
minute
• A4 (82-105 g/m2), One-sided printing: 30 sheets/minute
• A4 (82-105 g/m2), 2-sided printing: 27 sheets/minute
• A4 (106-220 g/m2), One-sided printing: 15 sheets/
minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), One-sided printing: 42 sheets/
minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), B&W, 2-sided printing: 42
sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color, 2-sided printing: 38
sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2), One-sided printing: 31
sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2), 2-sided printing: 27 sheets/
minute
sheets/minute
minute
275
Item Specifications
Copy/print speed (per • IM C300 series

(mainly Asia)
• 81/2 × 11 (60-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute

(mainly Asia)
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2): 42 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute

• 81/2 × 11 (60-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute

• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2): 42 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute
276
Item Specifications
Copy/print speed (per • IM C400SRF

minute) • A4 (60-81 g/m2), One-sided printing: 40 sheets/minute
minute
• A4 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color, 2-sided printing: 38 sheets/
minute
• A4 (82-105 g/m2), One-sided printing: 30 sheets/minute
minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), One-sided printing: 42 sheets/
minute
sheets/minute
sheets/minute
sheets/minute
minute
sheets/minute
minute
Maximum original size (mainly Europe and Asia)

A4
81/2 × 14
277
Item Specifications
Original scanning area • Exposure Glass
2
1
DZW788
1. Vertical: Up to 216 mm (8.6 inches)

2. Horizontal: Up to 356 mm (14. 1 inches)
• ADF
2
1
DZW789
1. Vertical: 105 to 216 mm (4.1 to 8.6 inches)

2. Horizontal
• 1-sided: 128 to 600 mm (5.0 to 23.7 inches)
• 2-sided: 128 to 356 mm (5.0 to 14.1 inches)
Originals Sheet, book, three-dimensional object
Copy size • Tray 1, Bypass Tray:

• Duplex:
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 81/2 × 12 , 81/2 × 132/5
• Duplex (Custom Size):
Vertical: 139.0–216.0 mm (5.48-8.50 inches), Horizontal:
210.0–356.6 mm (8.27 -14.03 inches)
278
Item Specifications
Paper weight • Tray 1, Bypass Tray:

• Duplex:
60–163 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index) *1, *2
Missing image area

(Copy)
1
Print area
Ðòéîô áòåá
4 3
DZX710
1. Leading edge: 4.2 ±1.5 mm (0.17 ±0.06 inches)

2. Trailing edge: 3.25 ± 2.75 mm (0.13 ± 0.11 inches) (3.0–6.0 mm
(0.11–0.24 inches) in Duplex mode)
3. Left edge: 2.25 ± 1.75 mm (0.09 ± 0.07 inches)
4. Right edge: 2.25 ± 1.75 mm (0.09 ± 0.07 inches)
Preset reproduction ratio (mainly Europe and Asia)

Preset reproduction ratios (%):
• Enlargement: 200, 141
• Full size: 100
• Reduction: 93, 71, 50
Preset reproduction ratios (%):
• Enlargement: 155, 129
• Full size: 100
• Reduction: 93, 78, 65
Reproduction ratio (zoom) From 25–400% in increments of 1%
279
Item Specifications
Resolution (scanning • Exposure glass: 600 × 600 dpi

originals) • ADF
• Front side:
600 × 300 dpi (Copy: reproduction ratio is 200% or less,
scanner/facsimile: resolution is 300 dpi or less)
600 × 600 dpi (Copy: reproduction ratio is 201% or more,
scanner/facsimile: resolution is 301 dpi or more)
• Back side:
300 × 600 dpi (Copy: reproduction ratio is 200% or less,
scanner/facsimile: resolution is 300 dpi or less)
600 × 600 dpi (Copy: reproduction ratio is 201% or more,
scanner/facsimile: resolution is 301 dpi or more)
Resolution (copying) • Copy: 600 × 600 dpi

• Printer:
1,200 × 1,200 dpi (1 bit), 600 × 600 dpi (4/2/1 bit)
Tone 256 tones
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, page 182 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
20 lb. Bond)
Continuous copy run 1–999 sheets
Duplex Standard
Power requirements (mainly Europe and Asia)

• IM C300 series
220–240 V, 5 A, 50/60 Hz
• IM C400 series
220–240 V, 7 A, 50/60 Hz
• IM C300F
120–127 V, 10 A, 60 Hz
• IM C400 series
120–127 V, 12 A, 60 Hz
280
Item Specifications
Power consumption (Main • IM C300 series

unit only) Ready: 50.6 W
(mainly Europe)
During printing: B&W: 427 W / Color: 502 W
Maximum: 1,200 W or less
• IM C400 series
Ready: 60.7 W
The power level when the main switch is turned off and the power cord
is plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less
Power consumption • IM C300 series

(Complete system) Maximum: 1,200 W or less
(mainly
• IM C400 series
Europe)
• The complete system of the IM C300 series/C400F consists of the
main unit, three paper tray units, and internal tray 2.
• The complete system of the IM C400SRF consists of the main unit
and three paper tray units.
Power consumption (Main Ready: 50.6 W

unit only) During printing: B&W: 427 W / Color: 502 W
(mainly Asia)
Power consumption Maximum: 1,200 W or less

(Complete system) • The complete system consists of the main unit, three paper tray
(mainly Asia) units, and internal tray 2.
281
Item Specifications
Power consumption (Main • IM C300F

unit only) Ready: 49.7 W
• IM C400 series
Ready: 59.8 W
Power consumption • IM C300F

(Complete system) Maximum: 1,300 W or less
(mainly North
• IM C400 series
America)
• The complete system of the IM C300F/C400F consists of the main
unit, three paper tray units, and internal tray 2.
282
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W × D × H up (mainly Europe)

to ADF) • IM C300 series:
498 × 561 × 510 mm (19.6 × 22.1 × 20.1 inches)
• IM C400F:
498 × 561 × 590 mm (19.6 × 22.1 × 23.2 inches)
• IM C400SRF:
615 × 561 × 706 mm (24.2 × 22.1 × 27.8 inches)
(mainly Asia)
• IM C300 series:
498 × 561 × 510 mm (19.6 × 22.1 × 20.1 inches)
• IM C400F:
498 × 561 × 590 mm (19.6 × 22.1 × 23.2 inches)
• IM C300F:
498 × 561 × 510 mm (19.6 × 22.1 × 20.1 inches)
• IM C400F:
498 × 561 × 590 mm (19.6 × 22.1 × 23.2 inches)
• IM C400SRF:
615 × 561 × 706 mm (24.2 × 22.1 × 27.8 inches)
283
Item Specifications
Space for main unit (W × • IM C300 series

D) (mainly 1,180 × 994 mm (46.5 × 39.1 inches) (when the control panel is
Europe) vertical)
1,180 × 1,038 mm (46.5 × 40.9 inches) (when the control panel
is horizontal)
• IM C400F
1,180 × 981 mm (46.5 × 38.6 inches) (when the control panel is
vertical)
is horizontal)
• IM C400SRF (including the finisher tray)
vertical)
is horizontal)
(including the bypass tray)
Space for main unit (W × • IM C300 series

Asia) vertical)
is horizontal)
• IM C400F
vertical)
is horizontal)
284
Item Specifications
Space for main unit (W × • IM C300F

North America) vertical)
is horizontal)
• IM C400F
vertical)
is horizontal)
• IM C400SRF (including the finisher tray)
vertical)
is horizontal)
Noise emission (Sound • IM C300 series

power level: Main unit Stand-by: 30.7 dB (A)
only) (mainly
Copying: B&W: 62.2 dB (A) / Color: 62.8 dB (A)
Europe)
• IM C400F
Stand-by: 30.8 dB (A)
• IM C400SRF
285
Item Specifications

power level: Complete Stand-by: 31.3 dB (A)
system)
(mainly Europe)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF

pressure level: Main unit Stand-by: 21.3 dB (A)
only) (mainly
Europe)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF

pressure level: Complete Stand-by: 21.2 dB (A)
system)
(mainly Europe)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF
286
Item Specifications
Noise emission (Sound

pressure level)
• Sound power levels and sound pressure levels are actual values
(mainly measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
Europe)
• Sound pressure levels are measured from the position of the
bystander.
• The complete system of the IM C300 series/C400F consists of the
main unit, three paper tray units, and internal tray 2.

only) (mainly
Asia)
• IM C400F

system)
(mainly Asia)
• IM C400F

only) (mainly
Asia)
• IM C400F
287
Item Specifications

system)
(mainly Asia)
• IM C400F

pressure level)
(mainly Asia)
measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
bystander.
• The complete system consists of the main unit, three paper tray
units, and internal tray 2.
Noise emission (Sound • IM C300F

only) (mainly
North America)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF

system) (mainly
North America)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF
288
Item Specifications

only) (mainly
North America)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF

system) (mainly
North America)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF

pressure level)
measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
bystander.
• The complete system of the IM C300F/C400F consists of the main
unit, three paper tray units, and internal tray 2.
289
Item Specifications
Weight (mainly Europe)

• IM C300 series: Approx. 47 kg (103.6 lb.)
• IM C400F: Approx. 50 kg (110.2 lb.)
• IM C400SRF: Approx. 60 kg (132.3 lb.)
(mainly Asia)
• IM C300 series: Approx. 47 kg (103.6 lb.)
• IM C400F: Approx. 50 kg (110.2 lb.)
• IM C300F: Approx. 47 kg (103.6 lb.)
• IM C400F: Approx. 50 kg (110.2 lb.)
• IM C400SRF: Approx. 60 kg (132.3 lb.)
*1 Paper type used for two-sided print: Plain Paper, Recycled paper, Special paper 1, Special paper 2, Special
paper 3, Color paper, Letterhead
*2 Paper thickness used for two-sided print: Plain 1, Plain 2, Middle thick, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2
Specifications for the Document Server
Item Specifications
HDD (Document Server) Approx. 73 GB

Maximum: 9,000 pages (Total number of pages that can be stored
with all functions combined.)
Copy/B&W/A4 original: Approx. 9,000 pages
Copy/Full Color/A4 original: Approx. 2,000 pages
Printer/Full Color/A4/600 dpi, 2 bits: Approx. 9,000 pages
Scanner/Full Color/A4/200 dpi, 8 bits/JPEG: Approx. 9,000 pages
(Under the printer and scanner modes, the number of the pages that
can be stored depends on the print image and original.)
Maximum number of stored 3,000 documents

documents
290
Item Specifications
Number of pages supported Maximum: 2,000 pages

by memory sorting Copy/B&W/A4 original: Approx. 2,000 pages
Printer/B&W/A4/600 dpi, 4 bits: Approx. 2,000 pages
(Under the printer mode, the number of pages that can be sorted
depends on the print image.)
• After the documents have been stored up to the maximum, no more document can be stored.
Delete unneeded documents.
Specifications for Facsimile
This function may not be used depending on the telephone line or area status.
• To connect the machine to the network, use a LAN cable supporting 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
and 10BASE-T. The length of the usable cable is up to 100 m.
Fax Transmissions and Reception

Item Specifications
Standard G3
Resolution 8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character), 8 × 7.7

lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character)
Transmission time 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution (JBIG transmission: 2

seconds)
Data compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG*1
Maximum original size Standard: A4 or 81/2 × 14

Custom: 216 × 600 mm (8.5 × 23.6 inches)
Maximum scanning size 216 × 600 mm (8.5 × 23.6 inches)
Print process Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Transmission speed 33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 /

19,200 / 16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 / 4,800 /
2,400 bps (auto shift down system)
291
*1 JBIG transmission cannot be performed if the JBIG reception and ECM functions are not available on the
destination fax. The ECM function is valid for communication over the G3 line.
Internet Fax Transmissions and Reception

Item Specifications
Network • Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
• Option:
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Transmit function E-mail
Scan line density 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character)*1, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail
character)
Original size: Scanning 210 mm (A4 )

width
Communication Protocols • Transmission:

SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
E-mail format Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion

Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR*1, MMR*1 compression)
Internet communication Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail address
Encryption method (for S/MIME

forwarding)
Internet Fax send functions Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and e-mail
transmission. Memory transmission only.
Internet Fax receive Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH) files and
functions ASCII text.
Memory reception only.
*1 Full mode
292
IP-Fax Transmissions and Reception

Item Specifications
• Option:
Scan line density 8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character), 8 × 7.7
lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character)

Custom: 216 × 600 mm (8.5 × 23.6 inches)
Transmission protocol Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP (RFC 3261
compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible machines IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission function Specify an IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax
through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a telephone
line via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception function Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
Validated Peripherals
Item Specifications
Gateway (T.38 compliant) • InnovaPhone VoIP-Gateway IP305

Software version: v7 hotfix (09-70300.17)
• Cisco VoIP-Gateway (Operation confirmed with H.323)
Software version: IOS12.3 (5)
Platform: Cisco2600XM, 3725, 847-4V, 26xx, 36xx, 37xx,
7200, AS5300, ICS 7750
• Siemens VoIP-Gateway RG8300 (Operation confirmed with SIP)
Software version: Version 5
293
Item Specifications
Gatekeeper • InnovaPhone VoIP-Gateway IP305

• Cisco Gatekeeper
Software version: IOS12.1 (2) T
Platform: Cisco2600XM, 3620, 3640, 3660, 3725, 3745,
7200, 7400
SIP server • Cisco SIP proxy server

Software version: Version 2.0
• Cisco VoIP-Gateway
Software version: IOS12.3 (17) a
Platform: Cisco3725 (256Mbyte RAM), Cisco2621XM
(128Mbyte RAM)
• Cisco unified CallManager
Software version: Ver6.2
• InnovaPhone VoIP-Gateway IP305
• Siemens HiPath8000 (Operation confirmed with SIP)
Software version: Voice redundant v4
• You can assign multiple addresses of the machine in the IPv6 environment, but only one address
can receive IP-fax.
• The SIP connection is specified to connect to either IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the environment of
the machine. To change the setting, contact your local dealer.
E-mail Transmission and Folder Transmission (Fax (Classic) only)

Item Specifications
• Option:
Scan line density 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character)*1, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail
character)
294
Item Specifications

Custom: 216 × 600 mm (8.5 × 23.6 inches)
E-mail transmission SMTP, TCP/IP

protocols
Protocols for sending files to SMB, FTP, TCP/IP

folders
File formats TIFF (MH, MR, MMR compression), PDF, PDF/A

When you select PDF or PDF/A for the file format, you can attach a
digital signature.
Authentication methods SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Encryption method S/MIME
E-mail sending functions Automatically converts documents to e-mail format and sends them as
e-mail.
Sending to folder functions Sends scanned files over the network to shared folders or FTP server
folders.
*1 When you send documents in TIFF format.
E-mail Reception
Item Specifications
• Option:
E-mail reception protocols POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP

(Mail to Print)
File formats (Mail to Print) JPEG (JFIF), PDF
295
Item Specifications
Authentication methods SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Encryption method S/MIME
E-mail receiving functions Automatically detects and outputs JPEG and PDF documents attached
to received e-mail.
Specifications for Printer
Item Specifications
Printing speed • IM C300 series

(mainly Europe) • A4 (60-105 g/m2): 30 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute
Printing speed • IM C400F

(mainly Europe) • A4 (60-81 g/m2), B&W: 43 sheets/minute
• A4 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color: 40 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), B&W: 45 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color: 42 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute
296
Item Specifications
Printing speed • IM C400SRF

(mainly Europe) • A4 (60-81 g/m2), B&W, One-sided printing: 43 sheets/
minute
minute
• A4 , Full Color (60-81 g/m2), One-sided printing: 40
sheets/minute
• A4 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color, 2-sided printing: 38
sheets/minute
minute
minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), B&W, One-sided printing: 45
sheets/minute
sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color, One-sided printing:
42 sheets/minute
sheets/minute
sheets/minute
minute
sheets/minute
minute
297
Item Specifications
Printing speed • IM C300 series

(mainly Asia) • A4 (60-105 g/m2): 30 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute

(mainly Asia) • A4 (60-81 g/m2), B&W: 43 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute

(mainly North America) • A4 (60-105 g/m2): 30 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute

(mainly North America) • A4 (60-81 g/m2), B&W: 43 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (82-105 g/m2): 31 sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (106-220 g/m2): 15 sheets/minute
298
Item Specifications
Printing speed • IM C400SRF

(mainly North America) • A4 (60-81 g/m2), B&W, One-sided printing: 43 sheets/
minute
minute
• A4 , Full Color (60-81 g/m2), One-sided printing: 40
sheets/minute
• A4 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color, 2-sided printing: 38
sheets/minute
minute
minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), B&W, One-sided printing: 45
sheets/minute
sheets/minute
• 81/2 × 11 (60-81 g/m2), Full Color, One-sided printing:
42 sheets/minute
sheets/minute
sheets/minute
minute
sheets/minute
minute
Resolution 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1,200 dpi
299
Item Specifications
Printer language • Standard:

PJL, PCL 5c/6, PostScript 3 Emulation, PDF Emulation, MediaPrint
(JPEG, TIFF)
• Option:
Genuine Adobe PostScript 3/PDF, PictBridge, XPS
Interface • Standard:
USB2.0 (Type B) port
USB2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
• Option:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
File format converter
Device Server option
Network protocol TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
USB interface • Transmission spec:

USB 2.0 Standard
• Connectable device:
Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard
Operating system • Windows 7/8.1/10

• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012
R2/2016/2019
• macOS 10.12 or later
Fonts • PostScript 3/PDF Emulation, PCL 5c/6: 93 fonts

• Genuine Adobe PostScript 3/PDF: 136 fonts
Store function Total number of documents that can be stored: Up to 100 documents
Number of pages for each document that can be stored: Up to 2,000
pages
Total number of pages of all documents that can be stored: Up to
9,000 pages
300
Item Specifications
Sort function Number of pages that can be sorted: Up to 2,000 pages

Number of copies that can be sorted: Up to 999 copies
• When you are using silent mode, the printing speed may be slower. Also, silent mode may shorten
the machine's life depending on the operating environment.
Specifications for Scanner
Scanning
Item Specifications
Type Full-color scanner
Scan method Flatbed scanning
Image sensor type • Exposure glass, ADF (front side): One-dimensional solid scanning
through CCD
• ADF (back side): CIS sensor
Scan type Sheet, book, three-dimensional object
Original sizes that can be • Length: 10–216 mm (0.4–8.5 inches)

scanned • Width: 10-356 mm (0.4–14.0 inches)
301
Item Specifications
Scan speed • When scanning one-sided originals (black and white, full color)
40 pages/minute
• When scanning two-sided originals (black and white, full color)
80 pages/minute
When using the E-mail, Scan to Folder, WSD (Push Type), or Scan to
Removable device (Original size: A4/81/2 × 11 , Resolution: 200
dpi)
• Black and white
Original Type: B & W two-value, Compression (MMR):
Compressed, ITU-T No1 Chart
• Full Color
Original type: Text/Photo, Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color):
Default, Original Chart
Scanning speed differs depending on the operating environment of the
machine and computer, scan settings, and the content of originals.
Tone • Black & White: 2 tones

• Full Color/Gray Scale: 256 tones
Basic scanning resolution 200 dpi
Image compression type for TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2)

black and white (two-value)
Image compression type for JPEG

gray scale/full color
Interface • Standard:
USB 2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
• Option:
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Network protocol TCP/IP
WSD Supported
DSM Supported*1
302
*1 The function can be used only in Scanner (Classic).
E-mail transmission
Item Specifications
Scanning resolution 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
Protocol*1 POP, SMTP*2, IMAP4
Output format TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, Searchable PDF*3
*1 Supporting Web mail transmission

*2 Supporting SMTP over SSL
*3 The number of characters that can be scanned optically is about 40,000 characters per page.
• When you select [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A] for the file format, you can attach a
digital signature. You can also specify the security settings for [PDF] or [High Compression PDF].
• To specify High Compression PDF for the PDF type, the following settings are required:
• Selecting [Gray Scale] or Full Color for [Original Type] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [100%] for [Scan Ratio] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] for [Resolution] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting other than [Preview]
• Specifying [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] under [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [File Management] to [Off]
Scan to Folder
Item Specifications
Scanning resolution 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
Protocol SMB, FTP

• You can use SMB protocol (139/TCP, 137/UDP) or CIFS
protocol (445/TCP) for sending folders with SMB.
• The Scan to Folder function with SMB protocol (139/TCP, 137/
UDP) is enabled under NetBIOS over TCP/IP environment only.
• You cannot use the Scan to Folder function with SMB under
NetBEUI.
Output format TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, Searchable PDF*1
303
*1 The number of characters that can be scanned optically is about 40,000 characters per page.
• When you select [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A] for the file format, you can attach a
digital signature. You can also specify the security settings for [PDF] or [High Compression PDF].
• To specify High Compression PDF for the PDF type, the following settings are required:
• Selecting [Gray Scale] or Full Color for [Original Type] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [100%] for [Scan Ratio] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] for [Resolution] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting other than [Preview]
• Specifying [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] under [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [File Management] to [Off]
Network TWAIN Scanner

Item Specifications
Scanning resolution • When using the exposure glass: 100–1,200 dpi*1

• When using the ADF: 100–600 dpi*1
Protocol TCP/IP

• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012
R2/2016/2019
(TWAIN scanner runs in 32-bit compatible mode on a 64-bit
operating system, so TWAIN scanner is not compatible with 64-bit
applications. Use 32-bit applications. IC card Authentication System is
not compatible with 64-bit operating system.)
*1 The maximum resolution depends on the scan size.
WIA scanner
Item Specifications
Scanning resolution 100–1,200 dpi*1

(Main scanning × Sub-
scanning)
Protocol TCP/IP
304
Item Specifications

• Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012
R2/2016/2019
(WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating
systems.)
*1 The maximum resolution depends on the scan size.
Specifications for Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
Item Specifications
Mode (mainly Europe and Asia)

Batch mode, SADF mode, Custom Size originals mode,
Original Orientation mode
Batch mode, SADF mode, LT/LG Mixed Sizes mode,
Custom Size originals mode, Original Orientation mode
Original Size A4 –A6 , 81/2 × 14 –51/2 × 81/2
Original weight 52-128 g/m2 (14-34 lb. Bond)
Number of originals to be set 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.
Specifications for Internal Finisher
Item Specifications
Paper size A4 , B5 JIS ,

81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 12 , 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size
Paper weight 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb. Bond)
305
Item Specifications
Paper sizes that can be A4 , B5 JIS ,

shifted 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 12 , 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size
Paper weight that can be 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb. Bond)

shifted
Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 250 sheets

20 lb. Bond)
Staple paper size A4 , B5 JIS ,

81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
81/2 × 12 , 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size
Staple paper weight 64-81 g/m2 (16-20 lb. Bond)
Staple capacity (80 g/m2, Without Mixed Size:

20 lb. Bond) • 30 sheets: 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 81/2 × 12 , 81/2 × 132/5
• 50 sheets: A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 , 71/4 × 101/2
With Mixed Size:
• 30 sheets: 81/2 × 14 /81/2 × 13 /81/2 × 11
Stack capacity after stapling • 2 sheets: 33 sets

(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) • 30 sheets: 7 sets
• 50 sheets: 4 sets
Staple position Top 1
Specifications for Internal Tray 2
Item Specifications
Number of bins: 1
306
Item Specifications
Paper size A4 , A5 , B5 JIS ,

81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
16K , 81/2 × 12 , 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size
Paper weight 60-105 g/m2 (16-28 lb. Bond)
Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 100 sheets

20 lb. Bond)
Maximum power 1 W or less

consumption
Dimensions 554 × 482 × 138.5 mm (21.8 × 19.0 × 5.5 inches)

(W × D × H) (when the tray is folded)
Weight Approx. 3 kg (6.7 lb.)
Specifications for Paper Tray Unit (Trays 2-4)
Item Specifications
Page size page 182 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, page 182 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
20 lb. Bond)
Paper weight page 182 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
Maximum power 17 W or less

consumption
Dimensions 498 × 552 × 150 mm (19.6 × 21.7 × 5.9 inches)

(W × D × H)
307
Specifications for Caster Table
Item Specifications
Dimensions 637 × 660 × 89 mm (25.1 × 26.0 × 3.5 inches) (except protruding

(W × D × H) parts)
Specifications for IEEE 1284 Interface Board
Item Specifications
Transmission spec IEEE 1284
Required cable Standard IEEE 1284 compliant Micro Centronics 36 pin cable
Specifications for Wireless LAN Board
• Note that the available channels (frequency ranges) and locations to use the wireless LAN are
subject to the regulations of the country or region where the printer is used. Be sure to use the
wireless LAN according to the applicable regulations.
Item Specifications
Transmission spec Based on IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (wireless LAN)
Protocol TCP/IP
Transmission rate • 2.4 GHz band: 1–130 Mbps

• 5 GHz band: 1–300 Mbps
Frequency range (Center • 2412–2472 MHz (1–13 channels)

Frequency) • 5180–5320 MHz (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, and 64
channels)
• 5500–5700 MHz (100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128,
132, 136, and 140 channels)
308
Item Specifications
Ad-hoc mode Channel • 2412–2462 MHz (1–11 channels)

Frequency range (Center • 5180–5240 MHz (36, 40, 44, and 48 channels)
Frequency)
Transmission mode • Ad-hoc mode

• Infrastructure mode
• Direct Connection Mode
• Direct Connection: Group Owner Mode
• Web Image Monitor is supported.

• The transmission rates of 300 Mbps in the 5 GHz band and 130 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band are
the theoretical values of the wireless LAN specification. The actual transmission rate may be lower,
depending on the operating environment.
• The maximum transmission rate in the ad-hoc mode is 54 Mbps for IEEE802.11a and 11 Mbps for
IEEE802.11b. The Ad-hoc communication is not supported in an IEEE802.11g/n environment.
• Channels other than 1–11 and 36–52 cannot be used because of the specifications and the
configuration of the access point.
• The channel in use might differ depending on the country.
Specifications for Device Server Option
Item Specifications
Interface • Gigabit Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
Operating systems • Windows 7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008

R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
• macOS 10.12 or later
Protocol • Port 9100, IPP, LPR

IPP does not support SPL.
• The device server option allows simultaneous connection of up to
eight sessions of printing protocols.
309
The Setting Values of the Transmission Function
• Depending on the type or settings of a document or original, you may not be able to specify or
enter the maximum number of destinations or characters.
Send Email
Item Value Remarks
Maximum number of characters 128 alphanumeric characters -

entered in a subject
Maximum number of characters • When selecting an item You cannot select an item from
entered in an e-mail message from the destination list in the destination list in the address
the address book: 396 book and enter the value
alphanumeric characters manually at the same time.
(79 alphanumeric
characters in each line 1 to
4, and 80 alphanumeric
characters in line 5)
• When entering manually:
80 alphanumeric
characters
Maximum number of characters 128 alphanumeric characters An e-mail; address that has
entered in an e-mail address been searched from the LDAP
server and exceeds 128
alphanumeric characters cannot
be specified correctly as the
destination.
Number of destinations that can 500 Up to 100 items can be

be specified at one time specified when entering an item
manually (including the items
specified by LDAP search). For
the rest, select up to 400 items
from the registered destinations.
Size of a document that can be Up to 2,000 MB per document -

sent
310
The Setting Values of the Transmission Function
Item Value Remarks
Number of pages that can be Up to 2,000 pages per -

sent document
Send to Folder
Item Value Remarks
Maximum number of characters 256 characters -

in a path name specified for the
SMB protocol

in a user name specified for the
SMB protocol

in a password specified for the
SMB protocol

in a server name specified for
the FTP protocol

in a path name specified for the
FTP protocol

in a user name specified for the
FTP protocol

in a password specified for the
FTP protocol
Number of destinations that can 50 Up to 50 items can be entered

be specified at one time also when entering the items
manually.
Size of a document that can be 2,000 MB per document -

sent
311
Broadcast Transmission
Item Value Remarks
Total number of destinations that 550 -

can be specified for Send Email
and Send to Folder
Number of destinations that can 500 Up to 100 items can be

be specified when sending a specified when entering an item
document by Send Email manually (including the items
specified by LDAP search)
Number of destinations that can 50 -

be specified when sending a
document by Send to Folder
312
Printable Area and Margin
Printable Area and Margin
Approx. 4.2 mm (0.17 inches)
Print area
Ðòéîô áòåá
Approx. 4.2 mm (0.17 inches)
Approx. 4.2 mm (0.17 inches) Approx. 4.2 mm (0.17 inches)

DZC463
• The machine does not support edge-to-edge printing. To minimize the margins, specify the
maximum printable area with the settings on the printer driver.
• See "Maximizing the Printable Area When Printing", User Guide (Full Version).
• The printable area may vary due to the paper size or settings of the printer driver.
• The outside of the printable area can be printed due to the settings of the printer driver or printing
condition; however, the print result may be different from the intended one or the paper may not be
fed correctly.
313
Machine Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine’s External Options
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
D0C9IA3601
(1) Options Mounted to the Scanner Unit

(mainly Europe)
D0C9IA3604
314
Machine Options
No. Option Description
ADF double-feed Detects a double feeding of the original when it is placed in the
1
detection kit ADF.
D0C9IA3604
ADF double-feed Detects a double feeding of the original when it is placed in the
1
detection kit ADF.
(2) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Paper Output Section
D0C9IA8612
Specify the output tray for the function, such as Copy or Fax,
1 Internal Tray 2*1 added to the Internal Tray 1. Copied/printed paper or fax
messages are delivered here face down.
*1 This cannot be mounted to IM C400SRF. ( (mainly Europe)/ (mainly North

America))
(3) Options Mounted on the Machine’s Side Panel
D0C9IA3605
315
Pass an IC card over the card reader to log in to the machine.

1 Card reader
page 48 "Logging In from the Control Panel"
(4) Options Mounted on the Machine’s Bottom
1 2 1
D0C9IA3602
Paper is loaded here. You can load up to 550 sheets of paper.
1 Paper Tray Unit You can attach up to three paper trays when your machine is
placed on the floor or a caster table and up to two paper trays
when placed on a table.
Caster Table for To use the paper tray unit, attach the caster table. Allows you to
2
Paper Tray Unit move the machine easily.
Guide to Functions of the Machine’s Internal Options
• Fax unit ( (mainly Europe and Asia))

Allows you to use the facsimile function.
• PostScript 3 unit
Allows you to output using Genuine Adobe PostScript 3.
• OCR unit
Recognizes the scanned originals optically, and creates a PDF with the text data embedded.
• XPS card ( (mainly Asia)/ (mainly North America))
Allows you to directly output XPS files.
• PictBridge card
Allows you to directly print photos taken with a PictBridge-compatible digital camera.
316
Machine Options
• Device server option

Allows you to add an Ethernet port to the printer. Allows you to print using the printer function via a
network other than that connected to the machine.
• IEEE 1284 interface board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1284 cable.
• Wireless LAN board
Allows you to communicate over wireless LAN.
• File format converter
Allows you to download documents that are stored in the Document Server to the computer.
• Enhanced Security HDD ( (mainly Europe)/ (mainly North America))
Allows you to enhance the security of the hard disk by using an encryption function that is
compliant with FIPS 140-2.
• Fax connection unit
Allows you to send and receive faxes via a different machine that has the fax unit installed.
• VM card
Allows you to install applications compatible with the "Embedded Software Architecture" platform.
To expand the function of this machine, various applications written in Java language can be
added.
• Only one of the following can be installed: IEEE 1284 interface board, wireless LAN board, file
format converter, or device server option.
• Only one of the following options can be installed on the machine at any one time: HDD and
Enhanced Security HDD.
• The Ethernet interface and wireless LAN board cannot be used simultaneously.
317
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

When options are installed, the functions and interface of this machine can be expanded.
• The options that can be installed differ depending on the models.
page 314 "Machine Options"
Copy Function
Function/Reference Option
(mainly North America) Paper tray unit

LT/LG Mixed Sizes mode
See "Copying Mixed-size Originals", User Guide
(Full Version).
Facsimile Functions

Fax functions require the optional fax unit when using IM C300.
Specify Tray for Lines Internal tray 2

See "Specifying the Output Tray to Deliver the
Received Page", User Guide (Full Version).
Remote Fax*1 Fax connection unit

See "Overview of the Remote Fax Function", User
*1 A sub-machine on which fax function is not included can send and receive faxes using the fax function of the
main-machine connected via network. This function is available when fax connection units are installed in the
main- and sub-machines.
318
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations
Printer Function
PictBridge PictBridge card

See "Printing Photos from a Digital Camera
Directly without Using a Computer (PictBridge)",
Genuine Adobe PostScript 3*1 PostScript 3 unit
(mainly Asia) XPS card

XPS
(mainly North America) XPS card

XPS
*1 If an optional Genuine Adobe PostScript 3 is installed, the built-in standard PostScript 3 cannot be used.
Scanner Function
Creating PDF files with OCR text information OCR unit

See "Scanning an Original as a PDF File with
Embedded Text Data", User Guide (Full Version).
Others
Wireless LAN communication Wireless LAN board

See "Connecting to a Wireless LAN", User Guide
(Full Version).
Parallel Interface Connection IEEE 1284 interface board

See "Connecting an IEEE 1284 cable", User
319
Extra Ethernet Interface (for Printer) Device server option

See "Connecting a LAN Cable", User Guide (Full
Version).
Quick Card Authentication NFC card reader
(mainly Europe) Enhanced Security HDD

Specifying the HDD authentication code
(mainly North America) Enhanced Security HDD

Specifying the HDD authentication code
320
Function Compatibility
The chart shows Function Compatibility when [Interleave Priority] is set to [Switch Every Specified No.].
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed and remote switching (of the scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
: Simultaneous operations are not possible. The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends.
Mode after you select Copy Fax Printer Scanner TWAIN Document Server Web Document Server
Transmission Reception Print
Scanning a Document to Store in

Scanning an Original for Memory
Operations for Document Server
Printing from Document Server

Printing Received Data*8
Immediate Transmission
Operations for Scanning

Transmission Operation
Operations for Copying
Memory Transmission
Memory Reception
Document Server
Data Reception
Transmission
Scanning
Scanning
Copying
Stapling
Stapling
Printing
Printing
Mode before you select
Operations for Copying
Copy Stapling *1 *1 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *4
Copying *1 *1 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Transmission Operation
Reception Transmission
Scanning an Original for Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission *3 *3 *3 *6
Fax *3 *3
Immediate Transmission
Memory Reception *3 *3 *3 *6
Printing Received Data *6 *6 *7
Data Reception
Printer Printing *9
Print
Stapling *9 *4 *4
Operations for Scanning
Scanner
Scanning *2 *2 *2 *2
TWAIN Scanning
Operations for Document Server
Document Server Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server
Printing from Document Server *9 *5 *5 *5
Web Document Server Printing *4 *9
*1 Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all scanned and [Reserve] appears.
*2 You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
*3 Simultaneous operations can be performed when a different line is used.
*4 During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
*5 Simultaneous operation becomes possible after you press [New Job].
*6 During parallel reception, any subsequent job is suspended until the reception is completed.
*7 If an attempt is made to manually print a received document while automatically printing a different received document, the document printed manually will be printed first.
*8 This includes the printing of data sent via LAN-Fax driver.
*9 If the previous print job does not finish within the time specified in the reprinting time of stored documents in memory that could not be printed using LAN-Fax Driver when printing from the LAN-Fax Driver, printing
will stop.
D0C9IA3607
• The scanning speed may become slower when scanning an original with another function while
executing printing.
321
Copy Function Compatibility

Blank: These modes can be used together.
Ɣ : These modes cannot be used together. The second mode selected will be the mode you are working in.
× : These modes cannot be used together. The ¿rst mode selected will be the mode you are working in.
Function selected second
Image Repeat (Specified Area)
Unauthorized Copy Prevention

Image Density (Manual)
Background Numbering
Auto Reduce / Enlarge
Regular Size Originals
Custom Size Originals
Auto Image Density

Original Orientation
Book Type Original
Margin Adjustment
LT/LG Mixed Sizes
Document Server
Auto Color Select
Reduce / Enlarge
2 Sided Original
Create Margin
Image Repeat
Convert Color
Black & White
Color Overlay
ID Card Copy
Erase Border
Erase Center
Paper Select
Bypass Tray
Erase Color
Slip Sheet
Designate
Centering
Magazine
Full Color
Combine
Stamp*1
2 Sided
Booklet
Covers
Poster
Staple
Stack
Sort
LT/LG Mixed Sizes × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Regular Size Originals × Ɣ
Custom Size Originals × Ɣ ×
Original Orientation *2 *3
Auto Image Density Ɣ Ɣ
Image Density (Manual)
Full Color Ɣ Ɣ
Black & White Ɣ Ɣ ×
Auto Color Select Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × ×
Paper Select Ɣ
Bypass Tray Ɣ × × × × × × ×
Auto Reduce / Enlarge × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Reduce / Enlarge × Ɣ Ɣ
Create Margin × × × × ×
2 Sided Original Ɣ Ɣ ×
Book Type Original × *2 Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × ×
Poster × × × × × × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ ×
Function selected first
2 Sided ×
Combine × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × ×
Booklet × × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × × × ×
Magazine × × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × ×
ID Card Copy × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Image Repeat × × × × × × × Ɣ × × × ×
Image Repeat (Specified Area) × × × × × × × × × × Ɣ × × × × × × × ×
Margin Adjustment × ×
Centering × × × ×
Erase Center × × ×
Erase Border × × ×
Erase Color × ×
Convert Color × ×
Color Overlay ×
Background Numbering × ×
Stamp*1 × ×
Unauthorized Copy Prevention
Covers × × × × × × × Ɣ
Slip Sheet × × × × × × × × × Ɣ Ɣ × ×
Designate × × × × × × × × Ɣ
Sort × Ɣ
Stack Ɣ Ɣ
Staple *3 × × × × × Ɣ
Document Server × × × ×
*1 Stamps include Preset Stamp, User Stamp, Date Stamp, Page Numbering, and Stamp Text.
*2 [90 Degrees Counterclockwise] or [90 Degrees Clockwise], and [Open Book 2 Sided] cannot be selected simultaneously. The function selected ¿rst has priority.
*3 [Readable Direction] and Staple or [180 Degrees] and Staple cannot be selected simultaneously. The function selected ¿rst has priority. However, they can be selected simultaneously
when [Fit to Paper Size] is selected.
D0C9IA3608
322
Environmental Regulations
ENERGY STAR Program
ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment

This company is a participant in the ENERGY STAR® Program.
This machine is compliant with the regulations specified by the
ENERGY STAR® Program.
The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multi-function
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.
Energy Saving Functions
If this machine remains idle for a specified period of time or when [Energy Save] ( ) is pressed, it
enters Sleep mode to further reduce its electrical consumption. This is called "Sleep Mode".
• The default delay time the machine waits before entering Sleep mode is one minute.
• The machine can print jobs from computers and receive faxes while in Sleep mode.
• The time it takes to recover from the energy saving functions and low power consumption in Sleep
Mode may differ depending on the machine.
(mainly Europe)
323
Time to Recover from

Model Name Power Consumption Duplex Function*1
Sleep Mode
IM C300 0.65 W 7.7 seconds Standard
IM C300F 0.66 W 7.7 seconds Standard
IM C400SRF 0.65 W 8.2 seconds Standard
(mainly Asia)

Sleep Mode
IM C300 0.65 W 7.7 seconds Standard

Sleep Mode
IM C400SRF 0.65 W 8.3 seconds Standard
*1 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used with) a
duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
• You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before entering Sleep mode under
[Sleep Mode Timer].
• See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).
• It may take longer than the specified time to enter Sleep mode according to the type of Embedded
Software Architecture application installed in the machine.
324
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly

Europe)
Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste
Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.
The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
All Other Users
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
For Turkey only
325
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
(mainly Europe)
In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Contact your sales or service representative to change the battery.
Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)
Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway

Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.
https://www.ricoh-return.com/
326
Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate
327
Trademarks (User Guide)

Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox is registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dropbox is a registered trademark or trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
Google, Android, Google Drive, and Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
macOS, Bonjour, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Edge, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The proper name of Edge is Microsoft® Edge™.
The proper name of Internet Explorer 11 is Internet Explorer® 11.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
328
Trademarks (User Guide)
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 MultiPoint® Premium Server
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2019 Datacenter
Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
329
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
330
MEMO
331
MEMO
332 EN GB EN US EN AU D0C9-7042
© 2019
EN GB EN US EN AU D0C9-7042
Operating Instructions
AirPrint Guide
For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before using
the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 2
Symbols Used in Manuals............................................................................................................................. 2
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................2
1. How to Use AirPrint
Before Using AirPrint...........................................................................................................................................5
About AirPrint..................................................................................................................................................5
Requirements for using AirPrint......................................................................................................................5
Confirming Settings........................................................................................................................................ 6
Notes and Limitations.....................................................................................................................................7
Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS.............................................................................................................. 10
Connecting the Machine to OS X or macOS............................................................................................ 10
Printing Documents Using OS X or macOS............................................................................................... 11
Scanning Documents Using OS X or macOS............................................................................................15
Sending Faxes Using OS X or macOS...................................................................................................... 17
Using AirPrint From iOS................................................................................................................................... 21
Printing Documents Using iOS.................................................................................................................... 21
2. Trademarks
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 23
1
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in Manuals
Indicates supplementary explanations of the product's functions and instructions on resolving user errors.
[]
Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
The screen displayed after you press the [Settings] key on the Home screen varies depending on the
machine.
The screen type is written as follows in this manual.
• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Standard
• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Classic
2
3
4
This section describes how to use devices from OS X, macOS or iOS using AirPrint.
Before Using AirPrint

About AirPrint
AirPrint is a function that allows you to use AirPrint-compatible printers or multi-function printers that are
on the same network to print, scan, and fax from iOS, OS X, or macOS. You can use the print function
on iOS, and you can use the print, scan, and fax functions on OS X, or macOS. You can use the print,
scan, and fax functions via wired LAN, wireless LAN, or a USB connection on the same network, without
installing any printer drivers or software.
• Available functions may differ depending on connected device or connection method.

• For details about available functions, see our web site.
Requirements for using AirPrint
OS X and macOS requirements

The following conditions are necessary to print with OS X or macOS:
• OS X 10.7 (Lion) or later
• AirPrint compatible printer or multi-function printer
The following conditions are necessary to scan with OS X or macOS:
• OS X 10.10.3 (Yosemite) or later
• AirPrint compatible multi-function printer
The following conditions are necessary to send fax with OS X or macOS:
• OS X 10.10.3 (Yosemite) or later
• AirPrint compatible multi-function printer
iOS requirements
The latest version of iOS must be installed to print with iOS.
• iPad (All models)
• iPhone (3GS or later)
• iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
5
Output device requirements

To use AirPrint, select [Active] for the following settings. These settings are set to [Active] by default.
• AirPrint
• Bonjour
• IPP
A device certificate must be installed because AirPrint uses SSL encrypted communications. A
device certificate is already installed by default.
To confirm the AirPrint settings and device certificate, see page 6 "Confirming Settings".
Confirming Settings
Confirm the settings required for AirPrint by using a web browser on a computer on the network.
We use Web Image Monitor installed on the printer or multi-function printer. To log in Web Image
Monitor, see the web manual for your machine.
Confirming AirPrint settings
1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

2. Click [Configuration] in "Device Management".
3. Click [AirPrint] in "Network".
4. Confirm that "AirPrint" is set to [Active].
If [Active] is not set, set to [Active].
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [IPv4] in "Network".
7. Confirm that "IPP" is set to [Active].
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [Bonjour] in "Network".
10. Confirm that "IPv4" or "IPv6" in "Bonjour" is set to [Active].
11. Click [OK].
Confirming IPP-SSL environment settings
1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

2. Click [Configuration] in "Device Management".
3. Click [Device Certificate] in "Security".
Confirm the following conditions for "Certificate1":
6
• "Certificate Status" must be [Installed].

• The certificate must have a valid expiration date in "Validity Period".
If an error message appears, see the web manual for your machine.
4. Click [OK].
5. Click [SSL/TLS] in "Security".
6. Configure the following settings:
• Set [Active] for the version of the internet protocol you are using for "SSL/TLS".
• Set [Active] for "TLS1.2" in "SSL/TLS Version".
7. Click [OK].
Notes and Limitations
About basic function

• You need to set the security settings for TLS1.2 to use AirPrint.
• A device certificate (self-signed certificate) is installed automatically when AirPrint is set to
[Active] but a device certificate for SSL/TLS is not installed.
• Your machine may be unable to communicate with the following utilities after the device
certificate for SSL/TLS is installed:
• Ridoc GlobalScan
• Third-party products
If this happens, you can recover communications by using one of the three ways described
below.
• Install the certificate issued by the certificate authority to both the machine and the utility.
• If a certificate (self-signed certificate) is already installed on the device, install it to the
utility as a reliable certificate.
• After setting AirPrint to [Inactive], delete the device certificate for SSL/TLS (You cannot
use AirPrint when AirPrint is set to [Inactive]).
• The default for "Permit SSL/TLS Communication" is [Ciphertext/Cleartext]. You need to
specify HTTPS to use encrypted communications because access using HTTP is not redirected
to HTTPS when [Ciphertext/Cleartext] is set. For instance, you must enter a URL starting with
https to access Web Image Monitor.
• When [Ciphertext/Cleartext] is set in "Permit SSL/TLS Communication", your machine may
communicate in clear-text with device management software even if a certificate for SSL/TLS
is installed. If you want to use encrypted communications, return the setting to [Ciphertext
Priority] or [Ciphertext Only].
• If you cannot use AirPrint, contact your service representative.
7
About the print function

• To print with AirPrint, configure the settings to not use the user authentication function or set
print job authentication to [Simple (All)]. For details, see the web manual for your machine.
• When printing with AirPrint, your machine cannot accept multiple jobs simultaneously. Wait
for the preceding job to finish before printing the next one.
• If you cancel a job while it is printing, the main text may continue printing if that job has a
cover sheet.
• You may not be able to use the printing functions depending on the application.
• When printing odd pages, the last page may be counted as black and white depending on
the application and the operation system.
About the scanner function
• Even if [Not Available] is selected in [Use a Destination List that is not DSM], you can scan
documents with AirPrint.
The [Use a Destination List that is not DSM] settings appear in a different menu according to
the screen type.
Standard: [Scanner Settings], [Others], [WSD/DSM Settings]
Classic: [General Settings] under [Scanner Features]
• When scanning is performed with AirPrint, the following settings are enabled. The settings
name varies according to the screen type.
Standard:
• Compression (Black & White): On
• Compression Method (Black & White): MMR
• Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color): On
Settings in [Sending Settings] under [Scanner Settings] on the machine are not applied.
Classic:
• Compression (Black & White): On
• Compression Method (Black & White): MMR
• Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color): On
Settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features] on the machine are not applied.
• You cannot use the scanner function if the user authentication management function is used to
restrict the use of functions.
About the fax function
• The name of the sender is the one used for [First Name] specified for [Register Fax
Information] (screen type: Standard) or [Program Fax Information] (screen type: Classic). For
details about the settings, see the web manual for your machine. If you want to use a name
other than that set in [First Name], contact your service representative.
8
The [Register Fax Information] settings (screen type: Standard) or the [Program Fax
Information] settings (screen type: Classic) appear in a different menu according to the screen
type.
Standard: [Detailed Initial Settings] in [Fax Settings]
Classic: [Initial Settings] in [Fax Settings]
• If unavailable letters are used in the address, the letters are ignored when sending a fax.
• The line type for fax transmission is set to external line (default). If you want to use an
extension line for fax transmissions, contact your service representative.
• You can check transmission results in the Record.
• You cannot check the contents of documents sent with the fax function of AirPrint from the
machine.
• If you are using OS X 10.8, a cover sheet will not be sent even if it is configured.
• You cannot use the fax function in the following conditions:
• When the use of functions is restricted by the user authentication management function
• When the fax function is restricted by an external charge unit
• When "Restrict Adding of User Destinations (Fax)" in [Extended Security] in "Security" is
set to [On] on Web Image Monitor
• When the optional fax unit is not installed
• If the country code is set to Korea and a sender's name is not registered on the machine
• When the fax is being used on the machine
• When the hard disk on the machine has insufficient storage
9
Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS

This section describes how to use the print, fax, and scan functions of printers and multi-function printers
from OS X and macOS. OS X 10.14 is used for example in this manual.
Connecting the Machine to OS X or macOS
Use the following procedure to connect the machine to OS X or macOS using AirPrint.
1. Click [System Preferences...] under the Apple menu.
2. Click [Printers & Scanners].

3. Click [+].
4. Select the machine you are using from the list in "Name".
5. Select [Secure AirPrint] or [AirPrint] from [Use].
Devices that are not compatible with AirPrint are also displayed because devices are discovered
by using the Bonjour protocol.
6. Click [Add].
When the selected machine is displayed on the screen in Step 3, the connection is complete.
10
Printing Documents Using OS X or macOS
1. Click [Print...] in the [File] menu of the application.
2. Select the machine to use for printing from "Printer".

3. Change the print settings as necessary, and then click [Print].
You can change the print settings by clicking [Show Details]. For details, see page 11 "Changing
print settings when using OS X or macOS".
Changing print settings when using OS X or macOS
You can change the print settings from OS X and macOS. Setting items may differ depending on the
application you are using, the specifications of the connected machine, and the configuration of options.
1
2
9
3
4 10
5
6 11
7 8 DVL901
1. Printer
Select the machine to use for printing.
11
2. Presets
You can save the displayed settings or recall stored settings.
3. Copies
Specify the quantity to print.
4. Pages
Specify the range of pages to print.
5. Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper. You can also specify custom sizes here.
6. Orientation
Select the orientation of the paper.
7. PDF
Displays the workflow menu for PDF.
8. Hide Details
Hides the print settings.
9. Black & White
Select this item to print in black and white.
10. Two-Sided
You can print on both sides of the paper when this item is checked.
11. Print option menu
Displays the menu according to the specifications of the connected machine and the configuration of options.
For details, see page 12 "Print option menu".
Print option menu
Setting items may differ depending on specifications of the connected device or optional configurations.
[Media & Quality]
Select the paper tray and the paper type you want to use.
1
2
DVL902
1. Feed from
Select the paper tray.
2. Media Type
Select the type of paper.
12
[Layout]
Configure settings for two-sided printing or to combine multiple pages on one sheet.
2
3
4
5
6
DVL903
1. Pages per Sheet

Specify the number of pages to combine on one side of the paper.
2. Layout Direction
Specify how to arrange the pages.
3. Border
Specify the width and number of the borders between combined pages.
4. Two-Sided
Specify the print format for two sided printing.
5. Reverse page orientation
Reverse the orientation of the output paper.
6. Flip horizontally
Print by flipping the entire image on the page left to right.
[Paper Handling]
Specify the order of the pages to be printed, or print only the odd or even pages.
1
2
3
4
DVL904
1. Collate pages
When printing two or more sets, print them by sorting them in sets. (Sort printing)
2. Pages to Print
Specify to print all pages or only the odd or even pages.
3. Page Order
Specify the order of the pages to print.
13
4. Scale to fit paper size

Select this item to reduce or enlarge printouts to fit the paper. If you select this item, you can select the
paper size in "Destination Paper Size".
Reduce or enlarge printouts to fit the selected paper size.
When printing on paper larger than the print data without enlarging it, check [Scale down only].
[Cover Page]
Configure settings for inserting a cover page (banner page).
2
DVL905
1. Print Cover Page

Specify whether or not to insert a cover page and where to insert it.
2. Cover Page Type
Select the type of cover page to insert.
[Finishing Options]
Configure settings for stapling, the output tray, and folding.
1
2
3
DVL906
1. Staple
Specify the position of stapling.
2. Output Bin
Select the output tray.
3. Fold
Specify how to fold.
[Supply Levels]
You can check the remaining amount of consumables, such as toner and paper.
When you click [More Info…], Web Image Monitor starts and you can check more detailed
information.
14
Scanning Documents Using OS X or macOS
1. Place originals in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure glass.
For details about placing originals, see the web manual for your machine.
2. Click [System Preferences...] under the Apple menu.
3. Click [Printers & Scanners].

4. Select the device to use for scanning from the list of "Printers".
5. Click [Scan].
6. Click [Open Scanner...]
7. Change the scan settings as necessary and click [Scan].
Check [Use Document Feeder] when using the ADF.
You can change the scan settings by clicking [Show Details]. For Details, see page 16
"Changing scan settings".
When the scanned original is displayed on the [Scan] screen, scanning is complete.
15
Changing scan settings
You can change the scan settings from OS X and macOS. Setting items may differ depending on the
application you are using, the specifications of the connected machine, and the configuration of options.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14 13 DVL908
1. Scan Mode
Select whether to scan from the ADF or the exposure glass.
2. Kind
Select the type of original.
3. Resolution
Specify the resolution for scanning the original.
4. Use Custom Size
You can specify the scanning range as a value when this item is selected.
5. Size
Select the size of the original to scan.
6. Orientation
Select the orientation of scanned data.
7. Scan To
Specify the place to save scanned data.
8. Name
Specify the name for scanned data.
9. Format
Specify the file format for scanned data.
10. Image Correction
Specify the correction method for scanned data.
11. Enable edge detection
Use the function of the operating system to detect the outline of images and to specify the trimming range.
16
12. Scan
Execute scanning.
13. Overview
Display the scanned image of the original.
14. Hide Details
Hides the scan settings.
Sending Faxes Using OS X or macOS
1. Click [Print...] under the [File] menu of the application.
2. Select the device to use for sending fax from "Printer".

The machines that can be used to send faxes have "- Fax" at the end of their names.
3. Enter a fax number in "To".
4. Change the fax transmission settings as necessary and click [Fax].
For details about fax transmission settings, see page 17 "Changing fax transmission settings".
Changing fax transmission settings
You can change the fax transmission settings from OS X and macOS. Setting items may differ depending
on the application you are using, the specifications of the connected machine, and the configuration of
options.
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9 DVL909
1. Printer
Select the machine to use for sending fax.
2. Presets
You can save the displayed settings or recall stored settings.
3. Copies
Specify the quantity to send fax.
4. Pages
Specify the range of pages of faxes to send.
5. Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper.
6. Orientation
Select the orientation of the fax.
7. Fax transmission option menu
Displays the menus according to the specifications of the connected machine and the configuration of options.
For details, see page 18 "Fax transmission option menu".
8. PDF
Displays the workflow menu for PDF.
9. Hide Details
Hides the fax transmission settings.
Fax transmission option menu
Setting items may differ depending on specifications of the connected device or optional configurations.
18
[Fax Information]
Enter information necessary for sending faxes.
1
2
DVL910
1. To
Enter the fax number of the destination.
2. Dialing Prefix
Enter the phone number necessary to call an external line from the phone being used.
3. Use cover page
Select this item when sending a cover page as the first page of the fax. Enter the contents of the cover
page in [Subject] and [Message].
[Preview]
This setting is not active even if it is configured.
[Layout]
Configure settings to combine multiple pages on one sheet.
4
5
DVL911
1. Pages per Sheet

Specify the number of pages to combine in one side of the paper.
2. Layout Direction
Specify how to arrange the pages.
3. Border
Specify the width and number of the borders between combined pages.
19
4. Reverse page orientation

Reverse the orientation of the fax to be sent.
5. Flip horizontally
Print by flipping the entire image on the page left to right.
[Paper Handling]
Specify the order of the pages to be sent, or send only the odd or even pages.
1
2
3
DVL912
1. Pages to Print
Specify to send all pages or only the odd or even pages.
2. Page Order
Specify the order of the pages to be sent.
3. Scale to fit paper size
Select this item to reduce or enlarge the size of faxes. If you select this item, you can select the paper size
in "Destination Paper Size".
Reduce or enlarge the size of faxes when sending to fit the selected paper size.
When sending on paper larger than the fax data without enlarging, check [Scale down only].
[Scheduler]
Configure a schedule for sending faxes.
2
DVL913
1. Print Document
Select [Now] to send the fax immediately.
Select [At] and specify the time to send the fax.
Select [On hold] to store the fax job in the print queue. You can send the fax later.
2. Priority
Select the priority level for sending the fax.
20
Using AirPrint From iOS
Using AirPrint From iOS

This section describes how to use the print function of printers and multi-function printers from iOS.
Printing Documents Using iOS
1. Tap the share icon ( ) on the application displaying data to print.

2. Tap [Print].
If [Print] is not displayed, flick the bottom area to the left.

3. Tap [Select Printer].
4. Tap the name of the device to use.
5. Tap [Options].
6. Change the print settings as necessary and tap [Print].
You can change the print settings by tapping [Options]. For details, see page 21 "Changing print
settings when using iOS".
Changing print settings when using iOS
You can change print settings from iOS. Setting items may differ depending on specifications of the
connected device or optional configurations.
21
DVL907
1. Printer
Select the device to use for printing.
2. Quantity
Specify the quantity to print.
3. Options
Show or hide the print settings.
4. Range
Specify the pages to print.
5. Double-sided
Configure setting for duplex printing.
6. Black & White
Select whether to print in black and white or color.
7. Staple
Configure setting for stapling.
8. Punch
Configure setting for punching.
9. Paper
Select the size of the paper.
22
2. Trademarks
This section describes about trademarks.
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, Macintosh, OS X, macOS and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
AirPrint and AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
23
MEMO
24 EN GB EN US EN AU M0BQ-7664A
EN GB EN US EN AU M0BQ-7664A © 2018, 2019
Operating Instructions
Mopria Guide
For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before using
the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................... 2
Meanings of Symbols.................................................................................................................................... 2
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................2
Preparations........................................................................................................................................................ 4
Connecting the Machine and an Android Device on the Same Network.................................................4
Confirming the Settings on the Machine.......................................................................................................4
1. Using Mopria Print
About Mopria Print Service................................................................................................................................7
Setting Up an Android Device...........................................................................................................................8
Printing................................................................................................................................................................. 9
2. Using Mopria Scan
About Mopria Scan......................................................................................................................................... 11
Setting Up an Android Device........................................................................................................................ 12
Using the Scanner Function............................................................................................................................. 14
Confirming/Changing Settings.......................................................................................................................16
3. Supplement
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................19
1
Introduction
Meanings of Symbols
Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that may result in
the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the instructions are not obeyed.
Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the product's functions and instructions on resolving user errors.
[]
Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this product, losses of documents or data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of important documents or data. Documents or data
might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine. Also, you are
responsible for taking protective measures against computer viruses, worms, and other harmful software.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this product or
any results from the data executed by you.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
The versions of Mopria applications used in this manual's description are as follows.
The actual screen may vary depending on the version of the application you are using.
• Mopria Print Service: 2.8.5
• Mopria Scan: 1.1.3
The screen displayed after you press the [Settings] key on the Home screen varies depending on the
machine.
The screen type is written as follows in this manual.
• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Standard
2
• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Classic
3
Preparations
To use Mopria Print Service and Mopria Scan, you need to configure the settings on both the machine
and the Android device.
Connecting the Machine and an Android Device on the Same Network
Connect the machine and your Android device with one of the following methods. For details about the
connection procedure, see the instruction manuals provided with the machine or your Android device.
• Connecting directly on a wireless LAN network (Wi-Fi)
• Connecting over an access point (You can connect the machine and the access point on a wireless
LAN network or a wired LAN network.)
Confirming the Settings on the Machine
To use Mopria Print Service and Mopria Scan, the machine's settings need to be as shown below.
Confirm these settings.
Setting values
Setting item for using How to confirm using your web browser (Web Image Monitor)*1
Mopria
User Disabled 1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a device administrator.

Authentication (Factory-set 2. Click "Device Management" [Configuration], in this order.
Management value: Disabled) 3. Click [User Authentication Management] in "Device
Settings", and confirm that "User Authentication
Management" is disabled. If it is enabled, switch it to
disabled.
IPP Enabled 1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

(Factory-set 2. Click "Device Management" [Configuration], in this order.
value: Enabled) 3. Click [IPv4] in "Network", and confirm that "IPP" is enabled.
If it is disabled, switch it to enabled.
Bonjour Enabled 1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

(Factory-set 2. Click "Device Management" [Configuration], in this order.
value: Enabled) 3. Click [Bonjour] in "Network", and confirm that "IPv4" or
"IPv6" for "Bonjour" is enabled. If it is disabled, switch it to
enabled.
4
*1 The procedures in this manual may be different for some versions of Web Image Monitor. If the procedures
are different, see the instruction manual provided with the machine or the Web Image Monitor Help.
5
6
This section explains how to use the Mopria Print Service to print on the machine from an Android
device.
About Mopria Print Service

The machine supports the Mopria Print Service.
You can easily print on the machine by using the Mopria Print Service over a wireless network from an
Android device. You do not need to install a printer driver specifically for the machine on your Android
device.
DTN753
For details about the Mopria Print Service, see the following URL.
https://mopria.org/print-from-android
• If the operating system in your Android device is Android 8 or 9, you can use the "Default Print
Service", which is pre-installed on the operating system. For the differences between the Default
Print Service and Mopria Print Service, see https://mopria.org/android-8-9-faq.
7
Setting Up an Android Device

You can set up an Android device to use the Mopria Print Service.
1. If the Mopria Print Service is not installed on your Android device, install it.
Search for Mopria Print Service at the Google Play store, and install it.
2. Open the Android settings screen and tap [Device connection], [Printing].
3. Tap [Mopria Print Service].
4. Turn the service on.
If a message appears, confirm the information and tap [OK].
Mopria authorized devices on the same network are automatically discovered, and then shown in
a list.
When the name of the machine appears, the setup is complete.
D0C9OA8402
8
Printing
Printing
You can use the Mopria Print Service to print from an Android device.
• The Mopria Print Service cannot accept multiple jobs at the same time. When the first job is
finished, print the next job.
1. Open the page you want to print on your Android device.

2. Select [Print], [Share], or another menu to open the Mopria Print Service screen (the
screen in step 3).
The names of menus and operational procedures vary depending on the type of application.
After you tap [Print], [Share], or another menu, if a [Mopria Print] icon ( ) or [Print] icon ( )
appears, tap that icon.
3. Perform the next operation in the Mopria Print Service screen.
1. Select an output printer. To change the output location, tap , and then select a location
from the list.
2. To change the printing conditions, such as the number of copies, paper size, one-sided/two-
sided printing, etc., tap , and then change the settings.
3. Tap the [Print] icon ( ).
1
2
D0C9OA8400
Printing starts.
9
10
This section explains how to use Mopria Scan to use the machine's scanner function from an Android
device.
About Mopria Scan

The machine supports Mopria Scan.
You can easily use the machine's scanner function over a wireless network from an Android device. You
do not need to install a scanner driver specifically for the machine on your Android device.
DTN753
For details about Mopria Scan, see the following URL.

https://mopria.org/scan-to-android#What-is-Mopria
11

You can set up an Android device to use Mopria Scan.
1. If Mopria Scan is not installed on your Android device, install it.

Search for Mopria Scan at the Google Play store, and install it.
2. Start Mopria Scan.
D0C9OA9903
Mopria authorized devices on the same network are automatically discovered, and then shown in
a list.
When the name of the machine appears, the setup is complete.
12
3. If you cannot find the machine, tap [ADD SCANNER MANUALLY].
D0C9OA8401
The information input screen appears.
4. Input the information for the machine, and then tap the confirmation icon ( ), in the
upper right.
The machine's information is registered.
13
Using the Scanner Function

You can use Mopria Scan to scan from an Android device.
• You cannot use Mopria Scan's scanner function when personal authentication or user code
authentication is set on the machine and users are restricted.
1. Place the original on the machine.

2. Start Mopria Scan from an Android device, and then select the machine.
D0C9OA8403
3. If necessary, set the scanning conditions, and then tap [SCAN].
D0C9OA8404
The scanned image is saved to the Android device.
14
Using the Scanner Function
• You can use Mopria Scan's scanner function even if [Use a Destination List that is not DSM] is set to
[Not Available].
The [Use a Destination List that is not DSM] settings appear in a different menu according to the
screen type.
Standard: [Scanner Settings], [Others], [WSD/DSM Settings]
Classic: [General Settings] under [Scanner Features]
• The following settings are applied when an original is scanned using Mopria Scan. The setting
name varies according to the screen type.
• Standard:
• [Compression (Black & White)]: On
• [Compression Method (Black & White)]: MMR
• [Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color)]: On ([Off] is applied when "Color mode" is set to
[Color (24b)] and "File format" is set to [TIFF] in Mopria Scan.)
(Settings in [Sending Settings] under [Scanner Settings] on the machine are not applied.)
• Classic:
• [Compression (Black & White)]: On
• [Compression Method (Black & White)]: MMR
• [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)]: On ([Off] is applied when "Color mode" is set
to [Color (24b)] and "File format" is set to [TIFF] in Mopria Scan.)
(Settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features] on the machine are not applied.)
• If the application you are using in the Android device is not compatible with the file format of the
image scanned with Mopria Scan, you may not be able to open the image properly. Use an
application that is compatible with the file format of the scanned image.
15
Confirming/Changing Settings
Confirm Mopria Scan's settings, and then if necessary, you can change them.
1. Start Mopria Scan.
D0C9OA9903
2. Tap the menu icon ( ) in the upper right.

3. Tap [Settings].
D0C9OA8405
The settings screen appears.
16
Confirming/Changing Settings
4. Confirm the settings, and change them as needed.
17
18
3. Supplement
Troubleshooting
This section explains what to do if you have trouble with your Android device's setup, printing, or
scanning.
Condition Cause Solution
The name of the The following causes are Use the following solution that
machine does not possible. corresponds to the cause.
appear (the machine • The machine's power is not • Turn on the power to the machine.
is not discovered turned on. • Confirm that the machine and
automatically) when
• The machine and the Android device can connect to the
doing setup, printing,
Android device cannot same network. For details, see
or scanning on your
connect to the same page 4 "Connecting the Machine
Android device.
network. and an Android Device on the Same
• The Mopria Print Service is Network".
disabled on the Android • Enable the Mopria Print Service on
device. the Android device. For the setting
procedure, see Steps 2 to 4 in
page 8 "Setting Up an Android
Device".
If you still cannot print or scan, even after
applying the solutions, redo the setup.
There is also an FAQ in the Mopria Print Service Help. Display the Mopria Print Service Help by tapping
[Mopria Print] on the list of applications screen on your Android device.
Mopria and the Mopria logo are trademarks of Mopria Alliance Inc.
Android and Google Play are registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
19
MEMO
20 EN GB EN US EN AU D0A4-7665A
EN GB EN US EN AU D0A4-7665A © 2018, 2019

Operation Manual Im C300

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual Im C300

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Information Safety Information English

Read This First Información de seguridad Español

Consignes de sécurité Français

Safety Information 1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

2. Safety Information for This Machine

3. Other Information for This Machine

For information not found in this manual,

1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

2. Safety Information for This Machine

3. Other Information for This Machine

The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with

Do not throw into the fire

Do not use the cleaner

Warning; Laser beam

Caution, hot surface

Caution, sharp edges

Requirements for Unpacking Products

• When using this machine in a poorly ventilated or narrow room continuously

• When carrying or moving the machine by lifting it for relocation to another

• Contact your sales or service representative for cleaning the machine's

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or

• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or

Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels

The unit gets very hot. Wait for 20 seconds

There are sharp edges inside the machine. When

Installing the Ferrite Core

IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ de l'unité Fax

Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l'unité Fax

Recycling Batteries (For Users in the USA and Canada)

Li-ion batteries are recyclable.

Información de 1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina

3. Más información sobre esta máquina

Para información no incluida en este

Lea atentamente este manual antes de utilizar la máquina y

1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina

2. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

3. Más información sobre esta máquina

• Antes de configurar los ajustes de seguridad y autenticación ampliados, consulte la

Los significados de los símbolos de seguridad

Advertencia: Rayo láser

Precaución, superficie caliente

Precaución, bordes afilados

Requisitos para desempacar productos

• Para evitar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe

• Si se utiliza esta máquina en una habitación mal ventilada o estrecha de

• A la hora de trasladar la máquina con la bandeja de papel opcional acoplada,

• A la hora de trasladar la máquina elevándola para su reubicación en otra

• Después de mover la máquina, utilice el dispositivo de fijación para fijar la máquina.

PRECAUCIÓN • No desmonte ni modifique esta máquina. Hacerlo podría producir una

• Si la unidad de alimentación de papel está instalada, no abra más de una

• Póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas o de servicio para

• Al sustituir el papel o retirar el papel atascado, tenga cuidado de no hacerse

• La unidad de fusión alcanza temperaturas altas. Al retirar la unidad de

• No deje los siguientes elementos en un lugar al que puedan acceder los

• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),

• Si se da cualquiera de las siguientes situaciones al manejar el tóner, reciba

• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),

Posiciones de las etiquetas de ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCIÓN

Esta máquina tiene bordes angulosos en su interior. Al retirar

Leyes y normativas Seguridad para láser

Sobre el modelo IM C300F

Sobre los modelos IM C400F/C400SRF